Oem and Specialty Products

OEM AND SPECIALTY PRODUCTS Founded in 1984, AFL is a global leader providing fiber optic products, equipment, and engineering services to the telecommunications, electric utility, wireless, energy, private network and OEM markets. AFL also serves a diverse mix of industry segments that include service providers, military and defense, mining, oil and gas, and biomedical.

AFL brings years of experience in developing solutions for customers, fostering a creative culture to drive and deploy innovative technologies that will improve communications for years to come. Our product line consists of fiber optic cable, transmission and substation accessories, outside plant equipment, connectors, fusion splicers, test equipment and training.

AFL’s service portfolio includes market-leading positions with the foremost communications companies supporting inside plant central office, EF&I, outside plant, enterprise and wireless areas.

AFL is dedicated to bringing our customers a quality product as well as delivering superior value. OEM and Specialty Products

Table of Contents Fusion Splicers and Accessories LZM-100 LAZERMaster™ Laser Splicing Sytem...... 3 DFS1 Digital FiberScope...... 70 FSM-100M and FSM-100P Fusion Splicers...... 5 NS and NSR Series Fiber Optic Network Simulators...... 74 Fujikura 70S Fusion Splicer...... 7 OTDR Fiber Rings...... 75 Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer...... 9 OPM1 Optical Power Meter ...... 77 Fujikura 19S Fusion Splicer...... 11 OPM4-FTTx PON Power Meter...... 79 Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer...... 13 OPM5 and OPM4 Optical Power Meters...... 81 Fujikura 70R Fusion Splicer...... 15 VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator...... 84 Fujikura 19R Fusion Splicer...... 17 C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM...... 86 Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer...... 19 C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit...... 90 CT-30 Fiber Cleaver...... 21 C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit...... 94 CT-32 Precision Fiber Cleaver...... 22 Fiber Optic Cable Assemblies CT-38 Precision Fiber Cleaver...... 23 Connector Specifications ...... 97 CT-100 Fiber Cleaver...... 24 Simplex Cable Assemblies...... 98 CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers...... 25 Bend Insensitive Cable Assemblies ...... 99 CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers...... 26 Two-Fiber Cable Assemblies...... 100 ® PowerCleave ...... 27 LC Uniboot Cable Assemblies...... 101 AutoCleaver ...... 28 Quad Cable Assemblies...... 102 AutoCleaver LDF...... 29 Circular Premise Cable (CPC) Assemblies...... 103

AutoCleaver LDA...... 31 Sub-Unitized MicroCore® Trunk Cable Assemblies ...... 104 AutoCleaver S1-80 µm / S1-125 µm ...... 33 SC Angled Pigtail Assemblies ...... 106 AutoCleaver S2...... 34 Node Cable Assemblies ...... 107 LDF CleaveMeter 3D ...... 35 LightLink Fiber Receiver Service Cable Assemblies (FRSC). . . . .108 Hot Jacket Strippers...... 36 Loose Tube & Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube ™ AFL PowerStrip ...... 37 Cable Assemblies ...... 110 High Tensile Stripper...... 38 Fiber Management USC-03 Ultrasonic Cleaner...... 39 Future Access Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for MDU Applications. . . 112 FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07 Optical Fiber Recoaters...... 40 4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for the MDU FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07 Optical Fiber Recoaters...... 41 Splice and Distribution Enclosure...... 113 AutoCoater 2™ ...... 42 FASTConnect® Field-Installable Connectors...... 115 MiniCoater 2™ ...... 45 FASTConnect® Universal Tool Kit...... 117 ReCoater 2 XL™ ...... 47 FUSEConnect® Field-Installable Connectors ...... 118 ProofTester ...... 49 FUSEConnect® MPO Field-Installable Connectors ...... 119 Fiber Arrangement Tool ...... 50 FUSEConnect® Tool Kit and Accessories...... 121 Ribbon Forming Adhesive...... 50 SpliceConnect with Tool Kit...... 122 Splice Protection Sleeves ...... 51 Buildout Attenuators ...... 123 Cotton Swabs...... 53 Temporary Joining Tools...... 53 Couplers and Modules Wideband Couplers...... 124 Test & Inspection Equipment and Accessories Ruggedized Wideband Couplers...... 125 M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR ...... 54 Wavelength Division Multiplexer Couplers...... 126 OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR...... 60 Planar Couplers...... 127 M710 Multifunction OTDR...... 66 Optical Coupler Modules...... 128

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 2Q15 1 OEM and Specialty Products

Optical Splitter Shelf...... 130 LG-250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure ...... 186 Optical FTTx Coupler Module...... 131 MuxGuard® 250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure...... 187 Optical FTTx WDM Module...... 132 LG-350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure ...... 188 RFoG WDM Module...... 133 LG-350-AC Drop Access Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . .190 LGX® FTTx Splitter Modules ...... 134 LG-350XL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure...... 191 LGX® FTTx WDM Modules ...... 135 LG-700 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure ...... 192 Dense WDM (DWDM) Modules...... 136 LightGuard® Sealed Splice Closure Accessories...... 193 Coarse WDM Modules (CWDM)...... 138 LightLink Terminal Adapters for Sealed Closures...... 196 Rack Mount Panels OptiNID™ Fiber Demarcation LightLink LANSytem OptiNID® 500 Optical Demarcation Closure ...... 197 1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel...... 139 OptiNID® 760XL Optical Demarcation Closure ...... 198 2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel...... 141 OptiNID® 1224 Optical Demarcation Closure...... 199 3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel ...... 143 Downhole, Umbilicial, Sensing, and Security Cables 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel ...... 145 Hermetic Fiber Assemblies ...... 200 5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel ...... 147 Stainless Steel Fiber Optic Tubes...... 202 6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel ...... 149 Traditional Downhole Cable...... 203 7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel ...... 151 Low Profile Downhole Cable...... 204 8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel ...... 153 High Temperature Downhole Cable...... 205 Optical Interconnect Modules Fiber Optic Component Poli-MOD® Patch and Splice Module...... 155 for Umbilical Cable ...... 206 Pigtail Assemblies for Patch and Splice Panels...... 157 Tactical Tight Buffered Cable...... 208 XFM® MPO Optical Cassettes...... 158 Non-Armored Security Cable...... 209 Uniflex® Security Cable ...... 211 Splice Closures and Accessories Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDM...... 160 Premise Fiber Optic Cables Interchangeable Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Splice Closures Simplex Cable...... 212 and Fiber Enclosures ...... 161 Zipcord, Dual-link and Micro-Dual Cable...... 214 LightGuard® (LG) Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures.162 RIBBON-Link® Cable ...... 216 LG-410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure...... 163 Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cable...... 218 LG-420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure...... 164 Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable ...... 220 LG-420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure ...... 165 Cleaning Accessories LG-500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure...... 166 Cletop Cassette Cleaner Series...... 222 LG-500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures. . . . 167 One-Click® Cleaner Series...... 224 LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure...... 168 Cletop Adapter Cleaning Sticks...... 226 LG-600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure ...... 169 CCT - Connector Cleaning Tips...... 227 LightGuard® Aerial Splice Closure Accessories...... 170 FCC2 Enhanced Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid .228 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays...... 172 Field Portable Duffle Bag Cleaning Kits...... 229 LightLink Splitter Trays...... 180 FiberWipes™ ...... 231 LightGuard® Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures...... 181 Fiber Optic Tool Kits ...... 232 Peel & Seal Grommet Systems for Sealed Fiber Optic Closures. . . 182 Cable Preparation Tool Kit ...... 232 LG-55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure ...... 183 Emergency Restoration Tool Kit ...... 233 LG-55-SC Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure...... 184 Master Splicer Tool Kit ...... 233 LG-150 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure ...... 185

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 2Q15 2 LZM-100 LAZERMaster™ Laser Splicing Sytem

LZM-100

The LZM-100 LAZERMaster is a glass processing and splicing system that uses a CO2 laser heat source to perform splicing, adiabatic tapering (to create MFAs or pump combiners), lensing, or other glass shaping operations with glass diameters of 2 .3 mm or more . The high resolution optical analysis system works in conjunction with on-board firmware for fully automatic splicing, tapering and other glass shaping processes . High precision glass processing is enabled by the intuitive and user-friendly on-board firmware (virtually identical to that of the Fujikura FSM-100 ARCMaster splicers) . Operations may also be performed manually and by PC control . A SpliceLab PC control GUI is supplied with the LZM-100 to provide additional features, greater flexibility and finer control . The SpliceLab GUI is pre-installed on the All-in-one computer . Customers can also create proprietary PC control algorithms using a complete set of PC control commands . LZM -100

Features

•• CO2 laser heat source eliminates electrode or filament maintenance, provides extremely stable operation and greatly reduces the need for periodic calibration •• Automated laser beam diameter control to fine tune the size of the heating area •• An advanced configurable system capable of producing tapers, ball lenses, combiners, MFAs, glass shaping and splicing •• Excellent performance for dissimilar diameter fiber splicing •• Ultra high strength splicing •• Redundant automated laser safety features 2 mm to 125 μm Splice •• 2 .3 mm maximum fiber diameter (larger fibers may be spliced manually) •• Long travel / high resolution Z motion for long adiabatic tapers •• Automatic operation by on-board LZM-100 splicer firmware, manual operation or operation by PC (PC and SpliceLab GUI included with the LZM-100 system) •• Intuitive SpliceLab PC GUI: Easy to understand, navigate and operate •• Complete set of PC command codes enables users to develop proprietary processes

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION ITEM NO. LAZERMaster LZM-100 Glass Processing & Splicing System S015871 Advanced Adiabatic Tapering (Standard baseline LZM-100 system . Includes AC adapters & cords and SpliceLab PC software) LAZERMaster LZM-100 (with dual theta motors) S015872 All-in-one Computer (includes keyboard and mouse, monitor stand for mounting S015242 all-in-one computer . SpliceLab software pre-installed .) (required) End-View Observation & Alignment Option S015244 Side Table Work Surface Option (Work surface to provide additional area for accessories such S015247 as fiber preparation equipment . May be attached to the left or right side of the LZM-100 or both . Folds down against the side of the LZM-100 chassis when not needed or to allow easy movement through narrow doorways .) Cylindrical Lens & Lens Holder (optional) S015251 LZM-100 Training (USA) S015867 LZM-100 Training (International) S015868 Ball Lens 320 μm with 125 Splice to 80 μm Fiber

Fiber Heating and Splicing Method CO2 Laser Laser Safety Features Metal cover with interlock, class 1 enclosure Automatic actuation of safety shutter Automatic laser power cutoff Triple redundancy Laser Beam Control Proprietary feedback system assures laser beam power stability Laser beam size and shape may be customized to meet specific user requirements Typical Splice Loss 0 .02 dB for SMF (ITU-T G 652). Typical Splice Strength >400 kpsi for SMF (ITU-T G 652). using appropriate fiber preparation equipment Camera Field of View 2 .7 mm Fiber Observation Methods • PAS (Profile Alignment System) via transverse fiber observation . • WSI (Warm Splice Image) and WTI (Warm Taper Image) • End-view observation (Optional) Applicable Fiber Diameter 80 μm to 2300 μm for automatic alignment by PAS Larger diameter fibers may be aligned manually or by power meter feedback V-Groove Clamping System Infinitely variable from 80 μm up to 2300 μm Clamping bare fiber or fiber coating Patented “split V-groove” system Fiber Handling Fujikura FSM-100, FSM-45 and FSM-40 splicer fiber holders Custom fixtures to meet specific customer requirements Alignment Methods PAS (Profile Alignment System, automatic alignment by camera observation) Manual Other methods by PC control Power meter feedback via GPIB (Optional) End-view (Optional) X/Y Alignment Resolution 0 .1 μm Maximum Z Travel Length 150 mm (both left and right Z units) Z Travel Resolution 0 125. μm theoretical Maximum Taper Length 130 mm Maximum Taper Ratio 10:1 standard (For uniform direction, one-pass tapering) Dual direction tapering offers greatly increased taper ratios, as does tapering with more than one tapering pass . Maximum Taper Speed 1 mm/sec standard (Optional 5 mm/sec) Splicing Control Internal firmware or operation by PC Fiber Tapering & Glass Shaping Control Internal firmware or operation by PC PC Control SpliceLab software will be provided Complete command set for PC control PC Option An all-in-one computer is required . Use of the SpliceLab software on a PC provides finer control and additional features compared to the LZM-100 internal firmware . Using another software application, the PC interface also allows for advanced maintenance functions such as the ability to confirm laser beam alignment, and align if required . Interface Ports USB 2 .0 (For PC communications, data and image download, etc .) GPIB (Optional, for power meter feedback) Electrical Power 100-240 VAC Operating Conditions 15-40oC Rotation Motors Optional: Provides theta rotational motion for PM alignment for both left and right sides PM Fiber Alignment Methods • PAS (For PANDA and other PM fibers) • IPA (Interrelation Profile Alignment, applicable to almost all PM fibers . Three distinct IPA methods available ). • End-view (Optional) • Power meter feedback (Requires polarizer and analyzer, as well as optional GPIB interface) • Manual • Other methods by PC control End-View Observation & Alignment Optional internal end-view system

Preliminary Specifications, subject to revision and refinement

© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00061, Revision 3, 7.24.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 44 FSM-100M and FSM-100P Fusion Splicers Whether splicing similar fiber types or double clad LDF fibers for high power lasers, the ARCMaster series splicers provide multiple solutions for diverse production needs . With State of the ARC™ technology, the ARCMaster sets the standard for fusion splicing with a multitude of new features designed to make splicing easier . FSM-100M The patent-pending “split V-groove” fiber clamping system accommodates optical fiber ranges from 60 to 2000 μm for cladding or coating without changing V-grooves or fiber clamps . The “Plasma Zone” fiber positioning system incorporates multiple fiber and electrode positioning techniques to provide unprecedented versatility for splicing LDF, heat sensitive or small diameter fibers . With a new fiber imaging technology, Interrelation Profile Alignment (IPA), alignment and splicing capabilities are possible with virtually any PM fiber type . Longer fiber tapering application is possible with Fujikura’s Sweep Arc technology . Incorporating PAS (cold fiber image) and WSI (warm image) technologies, the optical analysis system provides a number of advanced features including improved loss estimation capabilities, FSM-100P fiber image performance with both LDF, small or heat sensitive fibers . Users can program multi-step glass processing operations to include non-splicing Features operations such as generating tapers or lenses . Dual LCD monitors provide enhanced •• Split V-groove clamping system data and graphical information that is user-selectable during each stage of the splicing •• “Plasma Zone” fiber positioning process . Both units are designed with the needs for production in mind and are suitable •• PAS and WSI for the most popular production workstations . •• New IPA alignment method for PM fibers •• Enhanced sweep arc technology Ordering Information •• Zero degree fiber handling for LDF DESCRIPTION AFL NO. •• Special functions for glass ARCMaster FSM-100M Fusion Splicer (machine only) S014821 processing capability Includes: FH-100-250 fiber holders (pair), FH-100-900 fiber holders (pair), •• Fiber profile memory function spare electrodes (pair), ADC-15 AC adapter, ACC-02 AC power cord, USB cable, dust cleaning swab set, operation manual and software on CD, and transit case •• New arc calibration technology ARCMaster FSM-100M Fusion Splicer Kit * S014822 •• Short cleave length capability ARCMaster FSM-100P Fusion Splicer (machine only) S014823 •• Fast and accurate PANDA splice mode Includes: FH-100-250 fiber holders (pair), FH-100-400 fiber holders (pair), FH-100-900 •• Ergonomic, production friendly design fiber holders (pair), spare electrodes (pair), ADC-15 AC adapter, ACC-02 AC power cord, USB cable, dust cleaning swab set, operation manual and software on CD, and transit case •• User selectable display on dual ARCMaster FSM-100P Fusion Splicer Kit * S014824 LCD monitors One year extended warranty (extends factory warranty by one year) S012996 •• Internet firmware updates Two year extended warranty (extends factory warranty by two years) S013000

* Each splicer kit includes an HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper, a CT-32 Cleaver and a SPA-HJS-030 Spacer for HJS-02 in addition to the items listed above .

Specifications Accessories for the FSM-100M and FSM-100P

PARAMETER VALUE DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Applicable Fiber Silica based Single-mode and Multimode glass fiber: High Strength Accessories SMF (G .652), MMF (G .651), NZDSF (G .655), EDF, High Strength Preparation Kit S013632 DCF, LDF and PMF, etc . Includes: USC-02, AFL PowerStrip and AFL PowerCleave Fiber Dimension Cladding diameter: 60 to 500 µm Ultrasonic Cleaner (USC-02) S014783 Coating diameter: 100 to 2,000 µm HTS-12 High Tensile Stripper - includes 250 µm blades S012094 Cleave Length Glass clamping: 8 to 10 mm (standard 9mm) (400 µm available) Coating clamping: 3 to 5 mm (standard 4mm) AFL PowerStrip High Tensile Stripper S012808 Typical Splice Loss SMF: 0 .03 dB AFL PowerCleave High Strength Cleaver S009972 MMF: 0 .02 dB Strippers NZDSF/LDF: 0 .05 dB HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper S010340 PMF: 0 .06 dB (FSM-100P) SPA-HJS-030 Spacer S012086 Splicing Time SMF/MMF: 15 sec . HJS-02-80 Hot Jacket Stripper (80 µm cladding) S013264 NZDSF/LDF: 25 sec . JS-02-900 (900 µm) S010908 PMF (PANDA): 35 to 50 sec . (FSM-100P) Electrodes PMF (IPA): 90 to 300 sec . (FSM-100P) ELCT2-25 Spare Electrodes (pair) S002068 Polarization Cross-Talk PMF (PANDA): -40 dB / 0 .6 degree (FSM-100P) Cleavers PMF (IPA): -32 dB / 1 .4 degree (FSM-100P) CT-32 Cleaver S014348 Return Loss 60 dB or more CT-38 Cleaver ( for 80 µm cladding) S014349 Heating Time FP-03 (40 mm): 30 sec . Fiber Holders (Pairs) FP-03 (60 mm): 35 sec . FH-100-060 Fiber Holder (55 µm - 71 µm) S014977 Micro sleeves: 55 sec . FH-100-100 Fiber Holder (94 µm - 117 µm) S014828 Sweep Length ±5 mm FH-100-125 Fiber Holder (118 µm - 139 µm) S014829 Electrode Life 2,500 Arc Discharges (SMF G 652. splicing at 1mm gap) FH-100-150 Fiber Holder (140 µm - 169 µm) S014861 Electrode Gap 1 to 3 mm FH-100-180 Fiber Holder (170 µm -199 µm) S014830 Electrode Offset -0 .3 to +0 .1 mm FH-100-210 Fiber Holder (200 µm -239 µm) S014831 Proof Test 1 .96 N to 2 .45 N FH-100-250 Fiber Holder (240 µm -289 µm) S014832 Dimensions (mm) 311W x 232D x 160H FH-100-300 Fiber Holder (290 µm -339 µm) S014833 Weight FSM-100M: 7 .7 kg FH-100-350 Fiber Holder (340 µm -389 µm) S014834 (excluding AC adapter) FSM-100P: 7 .9 kg FH-100-400 Fiber Holder (390 µm -489 µm) S014835 Operation Temperature 0°C to 40°C at 0 to 95% RH (Non-Dew) FH-100-500 Fiber Holder (490 µm -589 µm) S014836 Storage Temperature -40°C to 80°C FH-100-600 Fiber Holder (590 µm -689 µm) S014837 Monitor Type Dual 4 .1 inch TFT color LCD monitors FH-100-700 Fiber Holder (690 µm -789 µm) S014838 Magnification 125 µm: 187 to 300 X FH-100-800 Fiber Holder (790 µm -889 µm) S014839 250 µm: 58 to 300 X FH-100-900 Fiber Holder (890 µm -989 µm) S014840 400 µm: 58 to 93 X FH-40-LT900 Fiber Holder S013584 Power and Cords ADC-15 AC Adapter (FSM-100M/P) S014826 ACC-02 AC Power Cord S001171 ADC-09 AC Adapter for HJS-02 S014389 ACC-09 AC Power Cord (for ADC-09) S014390 Miscellaneous CC-27 Transit Case (100 M/P) S014825 DCS-01 Dust Cleaning Swab S014827 HP Power Meter Coupling Adapter S012180 ILX Power Meter Coupling Adapter S012184 Fiber Holder Adapter for HP/ILX PM S012188

Fujikura 70S Fusion Splicer The Fujikura 70S is the world’s fastest and most robust core alignment fusion splicer . Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by Fujikura, the 70S has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency . A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion . Fully programmable “auto open sheath clamps” open one or both sheath clamps, after the tensile test, to prepare the fiber for removal . A new automated “clamshell design” tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a 14-second shrink time . The result is a total splice process time of approximately 21

70S seconds! Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhance by a mirror-less optical system and "severe-impact resistant" monitor . Battery capacity is now 200 splices/shrinks . An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before .

Features •• Automated and programmable wind protector •• 14-second automated tube heater •• Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture In case with lid detached •• Li-ion battery with 200 splices/shrinks per charge •• 5 mm cleave length for splice on connector or small package needs •• Sheath clamp or fiber holder operation •• On-board training and support videos •• Internet software upgrades •• Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. 70S Fusion Splicer (machine only) S015580 Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Pot, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 70S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver) S015590 Includes: CT30A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual, and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 70S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord) S015591 Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap One Year Extended Warranty S012996 Two Year Extended Warranty S013000

Recommended Accessories for the 70S

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Cleavers Batteries and Power Cords CT-06A Cleaver S015276 ADC-18 AC Adapter S015585 CT-30A Cleaver S014080 ACC-14 AC Power Cord S014536 Fiber Holders BTR-09 Battery S015581 FH-60-250 Fiber Holder (pair) S014548 DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord S015582 FH-60-900 Fiber Holder (pair) S014549 DCC-12 Power Cord S013552 FH-60-160 Fiber Holder (pair) S014690 (connects AC Adapter to cigarette lighter socket) FH-60-LT900 Fiber Holder (pair) S015181 DCC-13 Power Cord S013556 FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder S015275 (connects AC Adapter to power source via alligator clips) FUSEConnect® Accessories Miscellaneous FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each) S014696 ELCT2-20A Electrodes S013532 FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair) S014695 Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S014773 FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each) S014697 ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S010532 JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series) S016100 CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair) S014705 SL-01 Sleeve Loader S015674 CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair) S014704 Worktable Upper S015779 Sheath Clamps Worktable Lower S015780 CLAMP-S70C Sheath Clamp S015586 (Coating diameter from 100 µm - 1000 µm (5-16 mm cleave)) Inner Box Set S015979 CLAMP-S70D Sheath Clamp S015862 USB Cable S014777 (900 µm diameter loose tube fiber (5-16 mm cleave)) CC-30 Transit Case S015587

Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Model 70S Fusion Splicer Applicable Fibers Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G 653),. NZDS (G .655) Cladding Diameter 80 - 150 μm Coating Diameter 100 μm to 1,000 μm Fiber Cleave Length 5 to 16 mm Typical Average Splice Loss 0 02. dB with SM, 0 01. dB with MM, 0 04. dB with DS, 0 04. dB with NZDS, measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T standards Splicing Time SM FAST mode — 7 seconds; SM AUTO mode — 10 seconds; AUTO mode — 15 seconds with SM fiber Arc Calibration Method Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available Splicing Modes 100 preset and user programmable modes Splice Loss Estimate Based upon dual camera core axis alignment data Storage of Splice Result Last 2,000 results stored in the internal memory Fiber Display X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously . Front or rear monitor display options with automated image orientation Magnification 320X for single X or Y view, or 200X for X and Y view Viewing Method Dual cameras with 4 .7 inch TFT color LCD monitor Operating Condition 0 to 5,000 m above sea level, 0 to 95%RH and -10 to 50°C respectively Mechanical Proof Test 1 .96 to 2 .25N Tube Heater Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function Tube Heating Time Typical 14 seconds with FP-03 sleeve, 17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-16 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, micro Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 200 cycles with power save functions activated Electrode Life 3,000 Arc Discharges Power Supply Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240 V AC or 10 to 15 V DC with ADC-18, 14 8. V DC with BTR-09 battery Terminals USB 1 .1 (USB-B type) for PC communication . Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03 Wind Protection Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph) Dimensions 146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5 .75 W x 6 .25 D x 5 .9 H (inches) Weight 2 .5 kg (5 .5 lbs) with AC adapter ADC-18; 2 .7 kg (5 95. lbs) with BTR-09 battery

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00059, Revision 3, 5 .26 .2015 Specifications are subject to change without notice . 8 Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer The Fujikura 21S active cladding alignment fusion splicer bridges the long standing gap between core alignment and fixed v-groove fusion splicer technology . Moveable v-grooves eliminate splicer errors due to dust and other contaminants . Despite its incredibly small size, this ruggedized, full-featured unit offers unmatched versatility for splicing in the most challenging environments .The innovative transit case and work tray provide multiple options for the best utilization of available work space while the long life battery provides power for up to 200 splice cycles which include application of the splice protection sleeve .

21S (with Cleaver for scale) The Fujikura 21S incorporates features typically found only in more expensive models . Removable sheath clamps allow the use of fiber holders if desired .The large 4 7". monitor provides a crystal clear image, even in the brightest sunlight, for evaluating splice quality .The electrode life has been extended to 3,000 splices, minimizing downtime for replacement and stabilization . Software updates are accomplished via the internet allowing users to quickly update their software as new splice programs become available .The fully ruggedized chassis provides for shock, dust and moisture protection while the two camera observation system provides for accurate fiber alignment and loss estimation calculations .The Fujikura 21S is also fully compatible with the FUSEConnect® line of fusion installable connectors . Backed by the best service team in the industry, the Fujikura 21S is the ideal splicer to use when portability, ruggedness, versatility and reliability are needed for your splicing application .

Workstation in Transit Case Features •• Dual camera, active cladding alignment technology •• World’s smallest active clad alignment splicer at 4 .72"W x 7 .44"D x 2 .8"H •• Fully ruggedized for shock, moisture and dust resistance •• Transit case converts to easy to use workstation •• Extended life electrodes •• Long life battery (200 splices/shrinks per charge) •• Auto start tube heater

Ordering Information Workstation on Transit Case DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer S016111 Includes: Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer, S21A Sheath Clamp, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-11 Battery Pack (installed), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container,SD01 Screwdriver and CC-32 Transit Case Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer Kit 1 S016155 Includes: Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer, CT-30A Cleaver, S21A Sheath Clamp, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-11 Battery Pack (installed), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-32 Transit Case Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer Kit 2 S016154 Includes: Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer, CT-06A Cleaver, S21A Sheath Clamp, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-11 Battery Pack (installed), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-32 Transit Case One Year Extended Warranty S012996 Fujikura 21S Kit 1 Two Year Extended Warranty S013000

Recommended Accessories for the 21S

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Cleavers FUSEConnect® Accessories CT-06A Cleaver S015276 FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each) S014696 CT-30A Cleaver S014080 FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair) S014695 Fiber Holders FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each) S014697 FH-60-250 Fiber Holder (250 µm single fiber) S014548 CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair) S014705 FH-60-900 Fiber Holders (900 µm single fiber) S014549 CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair) S014704 FH-60-LT900 (900 µm loose buffer tube) S015181 Miscellaneous FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder S015275 Worktable Set S016157 Sheath Clamps TS-01 Tripod Screw S015895 CLAMP-S21A Sheath Clamp S016160 ELCT2-12 Electrodes S014028 CLAMP-S21B Sheath Clamp S016161 ADC-19 AC Adapter S015523 Batteries ACC-09 Power Cord S014390 BTR-11 Battery Pack S016156 AP-01 Alcohol Container S015525 SD-01 Screwdriver S015526 CC-32 Transit Case S016158

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Applicable Fibers Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DSF (G .653), NZDS (G 655). Cladding Diameter 125 μm Coating Diameter 100 μm to 3000 μm Fiber Cleave Length 5 mm to 16 mm Typical Average Splice Loss 0 .03 dB (SM), 0 .01 dB (MM), 0 .05 dB (DS) and 0 05. dB (NZDS) Splicing Time Typical 9 sec with SM Arc Calibration Method Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available Splicing Modes Total 100 splice modes Splice Loss Estimate Based on dual camera cladding alignment data Storage of Splice Result Last 2,000 splices Fiber Display 4 .7 inch TFT color LCD with X or Y view or both X and Y view simultaneously Magnification 200X magnification for X/Y view Viewing Method 2 axis CMOS camera Operating Condition Altitude: 0 to 3,660 m above sea level, -10° to 50° C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH, non-dew Mechanical Proof Test 1 .96 N Tube Heater 30 heating modes Tube Heating Time Typical 30 sec with FP-60 (60 mm) sleeve Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, micro Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 200 cycles with BTR-11 Electrode Life 3,000 splices Power Supply Auto select from 100 V to 240 V with AC adapter, 14 .8 V DC with installed battery Terminals USB 2 .0 Wind Protection Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph) Dimensions 120 x 189 x 71 (mm) / 4 .72" x 7 .44" x 2 .8" (inches) Weight 1 .14 kg (2 .51 lbs) with battery

Fujikura 19S Fusion Splicer The Fujikura 19S is a low cost, fixed v-groove single fiber splicer with similar features found on the Fujikura 70S . Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by Fujikura, the 19S has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency . A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion . Fully programmable “auto open sheath clamps” open one or both sheath clamps, after the tensile test, to prepare the fiber for removal . A new automated “clamshell design” tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a faster shrink time . Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhance by a mirror-less

19S optical system and "severe-impact resistant" monitor . An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before .

Features •• Automated and programmable wind protector •• Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture •• Li-ion battery with 180 splice/heat cycles per charge •• 5 mm cleave length for splice on connector or small package needs •• Sheath clamp or fiber holder operation In case with lid detached •• On-board training and support videos •• Internet software upgrades •• Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. 19S Fusion Splicer (machine only) S015679 Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Pot, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 19S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver) S015680 Includes: CT30A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual, and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 19S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord) S015681 Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap One Year Extended Warranty S012996 Two Year Extended Warranty S013000

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00072, Revision 3, 10 .15 .2014 www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 Specifications are subject to change without notice . 11 N SPLIC SIO ER FU S Fiber Optic Cable

Fujikura 19S Fusion Splicer

Recommended Accessories for the 19S

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Cleavers Batteries and Power Cords CT-06A Cleaver S015276 ADC-18 AC Adapter S015585 CT-30A Cleaver S014080 ACC-14 AC Power Cord S014536 Fiber Holders BTR-09 Battery S015581 FH-60-250 Fiber Holder (pair) S014548 DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord S015582 FH-60-900 Fiber Holder (pair) S014549 DCC-12 Power Cord S013552 FH-60-LT900 Fiber Holder (pair) S015181 (connects AC Adapter to cigarette lighter socket) FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder S015275 DCC-13 Power Cord S013556 (connects AC Adapter to power source via alligator clips) FUSEConnect™ Accessories Miscellaneous FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each) S014696 ELCT2-20A Electrodes S013532 FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair) S014695 Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S014773 FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each) S014697 ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S010532 CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair) S014705 JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series) S016100 CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair) S014704 SL-01 Sleeve Loader S015674 Sheath Clamps Worktable Upper S015779 CLAMP-S70C Sheath Clamp S015586 Worktable Lower S015780 (Coating diameter from 100 µm - 1000 µm (5-16 mm cleave)) Inner Box Set S015979 CLAMP-S70D Sheath Clamp S015862 (900 µm diameter loose tube fiber (5-16 mm cleave)) CC-30 S015587 USB Cable S014777

Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Model 19S Fusion Splicer Applicable Fibers Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G 653),. NZDS (G .655) Cladding Diameter 125 μm Coating Diameter 100 μm to 1,000 μm Fiber Cleave Length 5 to 16 mm Typical Average Splice Loss 0 05. dB with SM, 0 02. dB with MM, 0 08. dB with DS, 0 08. dB with NZDS, measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T and IEC standards Splicing Time SM FAST mode — 9 seconds; SM AUTO mode — 11 seconds; AUTO mode — 11 seconds Arc Calibration Method Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available Splicing Modes 100 preset and user programmable modes Splice Loss Estimate Based upon dual camera cladding axis offset alignment data Storage of Splice Result Last 2,000 results to be stored in the internal memory Fiber Display X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously . Front or rear monitor display options with automated image orientation Magnification 320X for single X or Y view, or 200X for X and Y view Viewing Method Dual cameras with 4 .73 inch TFT color LCD monitor Operating Condition 0 to 3,660 m above sea level, 0 to 95%RH and -10 to 50°C respectively Mechanical Proof Test 1 .96 to 2 .25N Tube Heater Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function Tube Heating Time 17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-16 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, micro Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 180 cycles with power save functions activated Electrode Life 3,000 Arc Discharges Power Supply Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240 V AC or 10 to 15 V DC with ADC-18, 14 8. V DC with BTR-09 battery Terminals USB 1 .1 (USB-B type) for PC communication . Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03 and SH-8 tube heater Wind Protection Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph) Dimensions 146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5 .75 W x 6 .25 D x 5 .9 H (inches) Weight 2 .3 kg (5 .1 lbs) with AC adapter; 2 .5 kg (5 .5 lbs) with battery

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00072, Revision 3, 10 .15 .2014 www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 Specifications are subject to change without notice . 12 N SPLIC SIO ER FU S Fiber Optic Cable

Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer The Fujikura 12S is the world’s smallest, lightest and most portable fusion splicer available today . Despite its incredibly small size, this ruggedized, full-featured unit offers unmatched versatility for splicing in the most challenging environments . The innovative transit case and work tray provide multiple options for the best utilization of available work space while the long life battery provides power for up to 100 splice cycles which include application of the splice protection sleeve . The Fujikura 12S incorporates features typically found only in more expensive models . 12S (with Cleaver for scale) The large 4 .5" monitor provides a crystal clear image, even in the brightest sunlight, for evaluating splice quality . The electrode life has been extended to 3,000 splices, minimizing downtime for replacement and stabilization . Software updates are accomplished via the internet allowing users to quickly update their software as new splice programs become available . The fully ruggedized chassis provides for shock, dust and moisture protection while the two camera observation system provides for accurate fiber alignment and loss estimation calculations . The Fujikura 12S is also fully compatible with the FUSEConnect® line of fusion installable connectors . Backed by the best service team in the industry, the Fujikura 12S is the ideal splicer to use when portability, ruggedness, versatility and reliability are needed for your splicing application .

Workstation in Transit Case Features •• World’s smallest splicer at 4 .76"W x 6 .38"D x 2 .24"H •• Fully ruggedized for shock, moisture and dust resistance •• Transit case converts to easy to use workstation •• Dual camera, fixed v-groove alignment technology •• Extended life electrodes •• Long life battery (100 splices/shrinks per charge) Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Workstation on Transit Case Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer S015521 Includes: Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed), FH-60-250 Fiber Holders (pair), FH-60-900 Fiber Holder, ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer Kit 1 S015522 Includes: Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer, CT-30 Cleaver, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed), FH-60-250 Fiber Holders (pair), FH-60-900 Fiber Holders (pair), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer Kit 2 S015530 Includes: Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer, CT-06 Cleaver, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed), FH-60-250 Fiber Holders (pair), FH-60-900 Fiber Holders (pair), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case One Year Extended Warranty S012996 Fujikura 12S Kit 1 Two Year Extended Warranty S013000

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 © 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00028, Revision 4, 1 .22 .2015 Specifications are subject to change without notice . 1313 N SPLIC SIO ER FU S Fiber Optic Cable

Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer

Recommended Accessories for the 12S

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Cleavers Batteries CT-06 Cleaver (for single fibers) S015588 BTR-10 Battery Pack S015527 CT-30 Cleaver (for single to 12 ribbon fibers) S014076 Miscellaneous Fiber Holders Worktable Set S015817 FH-60-250 Fiber Holder (pair) S014548 TS-01 Tripod Screw S015895 FH-60-900 Fiber Holder (pair) S014549 ELCT2-12 Electrodes S014028 FH-60-LT900 Fiber Holder (pair) S015181 ADC-19 AC Adapter S015523 FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder S015275 ACC-09 Power Cord S014390 FUSEConnect® Accessories AP-01 Alcohol Container S015525 FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each) S014696 SD-01 Screwdriver S015526 FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair) S014695 CC-29 Transit Case S015524 FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each) S014697 USB Cable S014777 CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair) S014705 CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair) S014704

Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Model 12S Fusion Splicer Applicable Fibers Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DSF (G .653), NZDS (G 655). Cladding Diameter 125 μm Coating Diameter 250 μm or 900 μm Fiber Cleave Length 5 mm to 13 mm Typical Average Splice Loss 0 05. dB (SM), 0 02. dB (MM), 0 08. dB (DS) and 0 08. dB (NZDS) Splicing Time Typical 15 sec with SM Arc Calibration Method Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available Splicing Modes Total 100 splice modes Splice Loss Estimate Based on dual camera cladding alignment data Storage of Splice Result Last 2,000 splices Fiber Display 4 .5 inch TFT color LCD with X or Y view or both X and Y view simultaneously Magnification 100X magnification for X/Y view Viewing Method 2 axis CMOS camera Operating Condition Altitude: 0 to 3,660 m above sea level, -10° to 50° C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH, non-dew Mechanical Proof Test 1 .96 N Tube Heater 30 heating modes Tube Heating Time Typical 30 sec with FP-03 (60 mm) sleeve Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, micro Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 100 cycles with BTR-10 Electrode Life 3,000 splices Power Supply Auto select from 100 V to 240 V with AC adapter, 14 .8 V DC with installed battery Terminals USB 2 .0 Wind Protection Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph) Dimensions 121 x 162 x 57 (mm) / 4 .76 x 6 .38 x 2 .24 (inches) Weight .776 kg (1 .71 lbs) with battery

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 © 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00028, Revision 4, 1 .22 .2015 Specifications are subject to change without notice . 1414 N SPLIC SIO ER FU S Fiber Optic Cable

Fujikura 70R Fusion Splicer The Fujikura 70R is equipped with a precision, fixed v-groove for splicing single fibers or ribbon fiber up to 12 fibers . Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by Fujikura, the 70R has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency . A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion . A new auto-start “clamshell design” tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a 40-second shrink time for 12-fiber ribbon . The result is a total splice process time of approximately 55 seconds! Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhanced by a mirror-less optical system and

70R "severe-impact resistant" monitor . Battery capacity is now 110 splices/shrinks . An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before .

Features •• Automated and programmable wind protector •• 40-second automated tube heater •• Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture •• Li-ion battery with 110 splices/shrinks per charge In case with lid detached •• On-board training and support videos •• Internet software upgrades •• Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. 70R Fusion Splicer (machine only) S015669 Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), FH-50-12 Fiber Holder, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 70R Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver) S015670 Includes: CT30 Cleaver, HJS-02 Stripper, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), FH-50-12 Fiber Holder, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 70R Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord) S015671 Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30 Cleaver, HJS-02 Stripper, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), FH-50-12 Fiber Holder, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap One Year Extended Warranty S012996 Two Year Extended Warranty S013000

Fujikura 70R Fusion Splicer

Accessories Recommended for the 70R

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Cleavers and Strippers Batteries and Power Cords CT-30 Cleaver S014076 ADC-18 AC Adapter S015585 HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper S014080 BTR-09 Battery S015581 Fiber Holders (pairs) DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord S015582 FH-50-12 S013828 DCC-12 Power Cord (connects ADC-13 to cigarette lighter socket) S013552 FH-50-10 S013824 DCC-13 Power Cord S013556 FH-50-8 S013820 (connects ADC-13 to power source via alligator clips) FH-50-6 S013816 ACC-14 AC Power Cord S014536 FH-50-4 S013812 Miscellaneous FH-50-2 S013808 ELCT2-20A Electrodes S013532 FH-50-250 (250 μm coated single fiber) S013800 Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S014773 FH-50-900 (900 μm jacketed single fiber) S013804 ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S010532 FH-60-LT900 (pair) S015181 JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series) S016100 FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder S015275 FST-12 Fiber Separation Tool S014012 FUSEConnect® Accessories FAT-04 Fiber Arrangement Tool S010212 FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each) S014696 FAA-03A Ribbon Forming Adhesive (4 oz . bottle) S008720 FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair) S014695 FAA-03A Ribbon Forming Adhesive (0 .5 liter bottle) S008622 FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each) S014697 CC-30 Transit Case S015587 CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair) S014705 CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair) S014704

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Model FSM-70R Fusion Splicer Applicable Fibers Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G .653), NZDS (G .655) Fiber Count Single, 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 Cladding Diameter 125 µm Coating Diameter Ribbon: 0 .25 mm to 0 .4 mm, Single: 250 µm and 900 µm Fiber Cleave Length 10 mm Typical Average Splice Loss 0 .05 dB with SM, 0 .02 dB with MM, 0 .08 dB with DS, 0 .08 dB with NZDS; measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T standards Splicing Time Typical 15 seconds with standard single-mode fiber Arc Calibration Method Automatic, real-time by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode; manual arc calibration function available Splicing Modes 100 preset and user programmable modes Splice Loss Estimate Based upon dual camera cladding alignment data Storage of Splice Result Last 2000 splice results stored in the internal memory Fiber Display X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously; front or rear monitor display options with automatic image orientation Magnification 35X to 90X Viewing Method Dual cameras with 4 .7 inch TFT color LCD monitor with anti-reflective coating Operating Condition 0 to 3,660 m above sea level, 0 to 95% RH, and -10 to 50°C respectively Mechanical Proof Test 1 .96 to 2 .25 N Tube Heater Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function Tube Heating Time Typical 40 seconds with FP-5 sleeve, 17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-15 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, Micro Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 110 cycles with power save functions activated Electrode Life 1,500 Arc Discharges Power Supply Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240V AC or 10 to 15V DC with ADC-18, 14 8V. DC with BTR-09 battery Terminals USB 2 .0 (USB-B type) for PC communication and Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03 Wind Protection Maximum wind velocity of 15m/s (34 mph) Dimensions 146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5 .7 W x 6 .3 D x 5 9. H (inches) Weight 2 .3 kg (5 .1 lbs) with AC adapter; 2 .5 kg (5 .5 lbs) with battery

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00071, Revision 3, 5.26.2015 www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 16 Fujikura 19R Fusion Splicer The Fujikura 19R is equipped with a precision, fixed v-groove for splicing single fibers or ribbon fiber up to 4 fibers . Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by Fujikura, the 19R has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency . A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion . A new auto-start “clamshell design” tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a 18-second shrink time for 4-fiber ribbon . The result is a total splice process time of approximately 29 seconds! Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhance by a mirror-less optical system and

19R "severe-impact resistant" monitor . Battery capacity is now 140 splices/shrinks . An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before .

Features •• Automated and programmable wind protector •• 18-second automated tube heater •• Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture •• Li-ion battery with 140 splices/shrinks per charge In case with lid detached •• On-board training and support videos •• Internet software upgrades •• Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. 19R Fusion Splicer (machine only) S015659 Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), FH-50-4 Fiber Holder, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 19R Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver) S015660 Includes: CT30 Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), FH-50-4 Fiber Holder, FH-50-250 Fiber Holder, FH-50-900 Fiber Holder, HJS-02 Stripper, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 19R Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord) S015661 Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30 Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), FH-50-4 Fiber Holder, FH-50-250 Fiber Holder, FH-50-900 Fiber Holder, HJS-02 Stripper, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap One Year Extended Warranty S012996 Two Year Extended Warranty S013000

Recommended Accessories for the 19R

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Cleavers and Strippers Batteries and Power Cords CT-06 Cleaver S015588 ADC-18 AC Adapter S015585 CT-30 Cleaver S014076 ACC-14 AC Power Cord S014536 HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper S010340 BTR-09 Battery S015581 Fiber Holders DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord S015582 FH-50-250 S013800 DCC-12 Power Cord S013552 FH-50-900 S013804 (connects AC Adapter to cigarette lighter socket) FH-50-4 S013812 DCC-13 Power Cord S013556 FH-50-2 S013808 (connects AC Adapter to power source via alligator clips) FH-60-LT900 (pair) S015181 Miscellaneous FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder S015275 ELCT2-20A Electrodes S013532 FUSEConnect® Accessories Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S014773 FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each) S014696 ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S010532 FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair) S014695 JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series) S016100 FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each) S014697 FST-12 S014012 CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair) S014705 FAT-04 Fiber Arrangement Tool S010212 CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair) S014704 FAA-03A Ribbon Forming Adhesive (4 oz . bottle) S008720 FAA-03A Ribbon Forming Adhesive (0 .5 liter bottle) S008622 USB Cable S014777 CC-30 Transit Case S015587 Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Model FSM-19R Fusion Splicer Applicable Fibers Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G 653),. NZDS (G .655) Fiber Count Single, 2, 4 Cladding Diameter 125 µm Coating Diameter Ribbon: 0 .25 mm to 0 .4 mm; Single: 250 µm and 900 µm Fiber Cleave Length 10 mm Typical Average Splice Loss 0 05. dB with SM, 0 02. dB with MM, 0 08. dB with DS, 0 08. dB with NZDS, measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T standards Splicing Time SM FAST mode - 11 seconds; SM AUTO mode - 15 seconds; Auto mode - 15 seconds Arc Calibration Method Automatic, real-time by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available Splicing Modes 100 preset and user programmable modes Splice Loss Estimate Based upon dual camera cladding alignment data Storage of Splice Result Last 2000 splice results stored in the internal memory Fiber Display X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously; front or rear monitor display options with automatic image orientation Magnification 90X Viewing Method Dual cameras with 4 .7 inch TFT color LCD monitor with anti-reflective coating Operating Condition 0 to 5,000 m above sea level, 0 to 95% RH, -10 to 50°C respectively Mechanical Proof Test 1 .96 to 2 .25 N Tube Heater Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function Tube Heating Time Typical 40 seconds with FP-5 sleeve, 17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-16 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, micro Splice/Heat with Battery Typical 140 cycles with power save functions activated Electrode Life 2,000 Arc Discharges Power Supply Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240V AC or 10 to 15V DC with AC Adapter, 13 .2V DC with battery Terminals USB 2 .0 (USB-B type) for PC communication, Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03 Wind Protection Maximum wind velocity of 15m/s (34 mph) Dimensions 146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5 .7 W x 6 3. D x 5 .9 H (inches) Weight 2 .3 kg (5 .1 lbs) with AC adapter; 2 .5 kg (5 .5 lbs) with battery

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00073, Revision 3, 5.26.2015 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 18 Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer The Fujikura 12R is the world’s smallest, lightest and most portable fusion splicer available today . Despite its incredibly small size, this ruggedized, full-featured unit offers unmatched versatility for splicing in the most challenging environments . The innovative transit case and work tray provide multiple options for the best utilization of available work space while the long life battery provides power for up to 100 splice cycles which include application of the splice protection sleeve . The Fujikura 12R incorporates features typically found only in more expensive models .

12R (with Cleaver for scale) The large 4 .5" monitor provides a crystal clear image, even in the brightest sunlight, for evaluating splice quality . The electrode life has been extended to 1,500 splices, minimizing downtime for replacement and stabilization . Software updates are accomplished via the internet allowing users to quickly update their software as new splice programs become available . The fully ruggedized chassis provides for shock, dust and moisture protection while the two camera observation system provides for accurate fiber alignment and loss estimation calculations . The Fujikura 12R is also fully compatible with the FuseConnect line of fusion installable connectors . Backed by the best service team in the industry, the Fujikura 12R is the ideal splicer to use when portability, ruggedness, versatility and reliability are needed for your splicing application .

Features Workstation in Transit Case •• World’s smallest splicer at 4 .76"W x 6 .38"D x 2 .24"H •• Fully ruggedized for shock, moisture and dust resistance •• Transit case converts to easy to use workstation •• Dual camera, fixed v-groove alignment technology •• Extended life electrodes •• Long life battery (100 splices/shrinks per charge)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Workstation on Transit Case Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer S015571 Includes: ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed), FH-50-4 Fiber Holders (Pair), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (Pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer Kit S015667 Includes: CT-30 Cleaver, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed), FH-50-4 Fiber Holders (Pair) FH-50-250 Fiber Holders (Pair), FH-50-900 Fiber Holders (Pair), ACC-09 Power Cord, HJS-03 Hot Jacket Stripper, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (Pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case

Fujikura 12R Kit

Recommended Accessories for the 12R

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Cleavers & Strippers Batteries CT-30 Cleaver (for single to 12 ribbon fibers) S014076 BTR-10 Battery Pack S015527 HJS-03 Battery Powered Hot Jacket Stripper S013996 Miscellaneous Fiber Holders Worktable Set S015817 FH-50-2 (2 ribbon fiber) S013808 TS-01 Tripod Screw S015895 FH-50-4 (4 ribbon fiber) S013812 ELCT2-12 Electrodes S014028 FH-50-250 (250 µm single fiber) S013800 ADC-19 AC Adapter S015523 FH-50-900 Fiber Holders (900 µm single fiber) S013804 ACC-09 Power Cord S014390 FH-60-LT900 (900 µm loose buffer tube) S015181 AP-01 Alcohol Container S015525 FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder S015275 SD-01 Screwdriver S015526 FUSEConnect™ Accessories CC-29 Transit Case S015524 FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each) S014696 FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair) S014695 FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each) S014697 CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair) S014705 CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair) S014704

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Model Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer Applicable Fibers Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G .653), NZDS (G .655) Fiber Count Single to 4-fiber ribbon Cladding Diameter 125 μm Coating Diameter 250 μm and 900 μm Fiber Cleave Length 10 mm Typical Average Splice Loss 0 .05 dB (SM), 0 .02 dB (MM), 0 .08 dB (DS) and 0 .08 dB (NZDS) Splice Time Typical 20 sec with SM Arc Calibration Method Automatic, real-time by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available Splicing Modes Total 100 splice modes Splice Loss Estimate Based upon dual camera cladding alignment data Storage of Splice Result Last 2,000 splices Fiber Display 4 .5 inch TFT color LCD with X or Y view or both X and Y view simultaneously Magnification 66X magnification in X or Y view; 33X magnification in X and Y view Viewing Method 2 axis CMOS camera Operating Condition 0 to 3,660 m above sea level (single fiber),0 to 95% RH non-dew, -10 to 50°C respectively Mechanical Proof Test 1 9. 6 to 2 .25 N Tube Heater 30 heating modes Tube Heater Time Typical 30 sec with FP-03 (60 mm) and FP-04 sleeves Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, micro Splice/Heat with Battery Typical 100 cycles with BTR-10 Electrode Life 1,500 splices Power Supply Auto select from 100V to 240V with AC adapter, 14 .8 V DC with installed battery Terminals USB 2 .0 Wind Protection Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph) Dimensions 121W x 162D x 57H (mm) / 4 .76 W x 6 38. D x 2 .24 H (inches) Weight with Battery 776 g / 1 .71 lbs .

CT-30 Fiber Cleaver The CT-30 Cleaver sets the standard for portability, reliability and ease of use . Available for either single fiber or ribbon splicing (up to 12 fiber ribbons) applications, the CT-30 Cleavers are compatible with all AFL fusion splicers . The improved version offers a larger base for a more stable platform, improved visibility when placing the fiber, and three scrap collection options . Designed for excellent portability, the CT-30 is equally at home in a splicing van or in a bucket truck and is ideal for FTTx applications . The 16-position blade yields 48,000 single-fiber cleaves, or 4,000 12-fiber ribbon cleaves before requiring replacement, and the built-in scrap collector conveniently stores fiber shards until they can be safely discarded . The CT-30 Cleaver is packaged with three scrap collection options that allow the user to tailor it to their cleaving preferences . The CT30 is delivered with the SC-01 Side Cover installed for users that prefer not to use an automated scrap collection system . For those that prefer an automated scrap collection system, the FC-02 Fiber Collector and two scrap box options are included . The FDB-02 Scrap Box is a smaller bin for users seeking a compact profile . The FDB-03 Scrap Box is a larger bin with sweeping brush and static resistant surfaces for those users seeking to maximize scrap capacity . All scrap options are easily configured by the user . *Delivered as shown Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Applicable Fiber Conventional silica optical fiber Fiber Count Single and up to 12 fiber ribbon Coating Diameter 250 μm to 900 μm Cladding Diameter 125 μm Cleave Angle Capability typically <0 .5˚ Blade lifetime 48,000 fiber cleaves (4,000 12-fiber cleaves) Dimensions (W x D x H) 69 mm x 82 mm x 41 mm (2 7". x 3 2". x 1 .6") Weight 180 g (0 .4 lbs)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION APPLICATION FIBER HANDLING SYSTEM CLEAVE LENGTH AFL NO. CT-30 Fiber Ribbons Fiber Holders for the following: 10 mm S014076 (up to 12 fibers) FH-XXX, FH-50-XXX or FH-60-XXX versions Shown in CC-21 Carrying Case CT-30A Single Fibers: AD-30A Adapter Plate 900 µm: 10-20 mm S014080 250-900 µm coating, 250 µm: 6-20 mm 125 µm cladding

Included with Cleaver: Accessories •• AD-30A Adapter Plate (CT30A only) DESCRIPTION AFL NO. •• FC-02 Fiber Collector Replacement Blade for CT-30 Series Cleavers S012828 •• FDB-02 Scrap Box (small) FC-02 Fiber Collector S014092 •• FDB-03 Scrap Box (large) AD-30A Adapter Plate S014096 •• SC-01 Side Cover (installed) AD-30B Adapter Plate (Fixed 16 mm cleave length) S014100 AD-30C Adapter Plate for 2 & 3mm Cord S015896 •• CC-21 Carrying Case FDB-02 Fiber Collector Scrap Box S014104 •• Hex Wrench (1 .5 mm) FDB-03 Large Fiber Collector Scrap Box S014483 •• Instruction Manual SC-01 Side Cover S014353 HBA-01 Fiber Holder Base Attachment S014388 CC-21 Carrying Case for CT-30 Series Cleaver S014484

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00011, Revision 3, 2 .3 .14 www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 Specifications are subject to change without notice . 21 CT-32 Precision Fiber Cleaver The CT-32 is a modified version of our standard cleaver model CT-30 . The modifications allow use of a spacer system that provides for the full range of acceptable cleave lengths for use with our factory fusion splicer models FSM-45F and 45PM . The CT-32 also allows for a reduced cleave length of 8 mm on 900 µm jacketed fibers and as short as 3 mm on 250 µm and 400 µm coated fibers . Included with the CT-32 is a 1 mm spacer that allows for the recommended cleave lengths for use with our factory fusion splicer models . An optional 2 mm spacer can be purchased to expand cleave length options .

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Dimensions (W x D x H) 69 mm x 82 mm x 41 mm (2 .7" x 3 .2" x 1 .6") Weight 180 g (0 .4 lbs) Blade lifetime 48,000 cleaves (1,000 x 3 heights x 16 positions ) Cleave angle capability typically <0 5˚. Fiber count Single Fiber type Silica Optical Fiber Cladding diameter 125 µm Coating diameter 0 25. mm to 0 9. mm depending on fiber holder (FH-40 series) *Delivered as shown

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION APPLICATION AFL NO. CT-32 Single Fibers: S014348 Includes: CT-32 cleaver, SPA-40-CT-040 cleaver spacer, 250 µm to 900 µm coating, FC-02 fiber collector, FDB-02 scrap box (small), 125 µm cladding FDB-03 scrap box (large), SC-01 side cover, hex wrench, carrying case and instruction manual

Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. SPA-40-CT-050 Spacer (2 mm) S014351 Replacement Blade for CT-30 Series Cleavers S012828 FC-02 Fiber Collector S014092 Shown in CC-21 Carrying Case FDB-02 Fiber Collector Scrap Box S014104 CC-21 Carrying Case for CT-30 Series Cleaver S014484

Application

CLEAVE LENGTH REQUIRED CLEAVER SPACER NOTE (mm) PROVIDED OPTIONAL 10 — SPA-40-CT-050 — 9 SPA-40-CT-040 — — 8 — — — 5 — SPA-40-CT-050 Short cleave length of 3 mm to 4 SPA-40-CT-040 — 5 mm available by stripping with 3 — — HJS-02 and SPA-040-HJS-030 . (sold separately)

© 2006, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00012, Revision 2, 8 .30 .12 Specifications are subject to change without notice . 22 CT-38 Precision Fiber Cleaver The CT-38 cleaver is designed for cleaving silica fibers with 80µm cladding . Utilizing the same one step design of our popular CT-30 cleaver, the CT-38 is quick, easy, and dependable . The 16 position blade yields 48,000 cleaves by providing for blade height and position adjustments . The cleaver can be used with either the FSM-45F and 45PM fiber holder system or with the optional AD-30A adapter plate for other applications .

Application

CLEAVE REQUIRED CLEAVER SPACER FIBER DESCRIPTION LENGTH NOTE PLACING PROVIDED OPTIONAL (MM) CT-38 Fiber 10 — SPA-40-CT-050 — Holder 9 SPA-40-CT-040 — — 8 — — — 5 — SPA-40-CT-050 Short cleave length of 3 mm to 4 SPA-40-CT-040 — 5 mm available by stripping with 3 — — HJS-02 and SPA-040-HJS-030 . (sold separately) CT-38A Fiber Plate 6 to 20 SPA-40-CT-050 — Requires purchase of CT-38 and optional AD-30A .

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Dimensions (W x D x H) 69 mm x 82 mm x 41 mm (2 7". x 3 .2" x 1 .6") Weight 180 g (0 .4 lbs) Blade lifetime 48,000 cleaves (1,000 x 3 heights x 16 positions ) Cleave angle capability typically <0 .5˚ Fiber count Single Fiber type Silica Optical Fiber Cladding diameter 80 µm

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION APPLICATION AFL NO. CT-38 (fiber holder) Single Fibers: S014349 Includes: CT-38 cleaver, SPA-40-CT-040 cleaver spacer, 165 µm coating, hex wrench, carrying case and instruction manual 80 µm cladding

Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Replacement Blade for CT-30 Series Cleavers S012828 CC-21 Carrying Case for CT-30 Series Cleaver S014484 AD-30A Adapter Plate S014096 SPA-40-CT-050 Spacer S014351

Model LG-350-AC AFL Part # FC001058 Style Dome / Butt Size (inches) 10 dia . 19 8. L Approx . weight (lbs) 12 CT-100 Fiber Cleaver Precise cleaving is required for photonic splicing applications as the types of optical fiber Total Splice Capacity become more diversified to meet new applications . In addition, angled cleaving is often Single Fusion 144 required for low back-reflection fiber end preparation . The CT-100 has been developed Mass Fusion N/A to offer adjustability and versatility for these various fiber types and applications while offering superior cleaving performance beyond conventional cleavers that utilize a Recommended Splice Tray circular blade . The CT-100 is equipped with a motorized diamond blade that touches Model LL-4808L AFL Part # FA000018 the fiber after tension has been applied providing high-strength cleaving capability . Max Trays Per Closure 4 Features

Fiber Splice Capacity Per Tray •• Diamond blade with long blade life Single Fusion 36 •• Large diameter fiber cleaving capability(fiber diameter range 80 to 250 µm) •• Angle cleaving capability (0 to 15 degrees) Ribbon Fusion N/A •• Cleave counter •• Adjustable cleave length •• Dual power sources (4 “AA” batteries or AC adapter) Cable Entry Capacity Total Number of Entry Ports 5 Specifications Number of Express Ports 2 Number of Drop Ports 3 PARAMETER VALUE Applicable Fiber Conventional silica optical fiber Single-cable Grommet Scenario - Max 1 Cable per Entry Port Cleaving Performance Typical 0 .5 degrees (Absolute Maximum Cable Diameter Capactiy) Cladding Diameter 80 to 250 µm Max Number of Cables 5 Total (2 Express Cables / 3 Drop Cables) Coating Diameter 160 to 2000 µm Single Cable Express Port Grommet AFL Part # FC000726 Cleave Angle Capability 0 to 15 degrees (adjustable) Single Cable Express Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters 1 00”. - 0 40”. Cleave Length 0 to 40 with Fiber Holder, FH-100 series or FH-40 series Single Cable Drops Port Grommet AFL Part # FC000727 Dimensions 140 mm (W) x 110 mm (D) x 95 mm (H) Single Cable Drop Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters 0 80”. - 0 30”. Weight 900 g or less (excluding batteries) Blade Lifetime 20,000 fibers (1,000 fibers x 20 positions) Dual-cable Grommet Scenario - Max 2 Cables per Entry Port DC Power Supply 4 “AA” size batteries (approx . 2000 cleaves) Max Number of Cables AC Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC / 50 to 60 Hz using ADC-16 Dual Cable Express Port Grommet AFL Part # Operating Conditions Temperature: 0 to 40°C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH (Non-condensing) Dual Cable Express Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters Storage Conditions Temperature: -40 to 80°C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH (Non-condensing) Dual Cable Drops Port Grommet AFL Part # Dual Cable Drop Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters Ordering Information

Multi-port Grommet Scenario - More than 2 Cables per DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Entry Port (Absolute Maximum Cable Count Capacity) CT-100 Advance Optical Fiber Cleaver Total Number of Cables Includes: ADC-16 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, 1 .5 mm hex wrench, S014972 Multi-port Express Port Grommet AFL Part # 2 .5 mm hex wrench and instruction manual Multi-port Express Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters Multi-port Drops Port Grommet AFL Part # Accessories Multi-port Drop Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters DESCRIPTION AFL NO. ADC-16 AC Adapter S015017 Mounting Hardware ACC-09 AC Power Cord S014390 Hanger/Mount Support CB-03 Cleaver Blade S015214 AFL Part # Ground kit AFL Part #

Drop Cables © 2011, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00008, Revision 3, 5 .24 .13 Specifications are subject to change without notice . Single-fiber OSP Flat Drop Cable with Toning Wire, SC/APC on one 24 end, other end unterminated, singlemode fiber

Tools Required Items needed by Construction and I&R teams Cleavers

CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers When exceptional cleave quality is required for fibers up to 1,250 μm, the new large diameter CT-105/CT-106 cleaver family provides both flat and angled cleaves using an automatic clamping system with programmable force . The color LCD shows cleaving progress and recommended insert size depending on fiber coating and cladding diameter . Saving and storing cleaving programs to a PC or tablet is accomplished using a USB port . The LDF cleaver’s extensive programming features allow for optimal results .

Specifications CT-105 PARAMETER CT-105 CT-106 Applicable optical fiber Glass optical fibers, capillary Number of fibers Single Cladding diameter 80 - 1,250 μm Coating diameter 160 - 3,000 μm Fiber clamping Automatic clamping Cleaving length 5 - 40 mm Angled cleaving - 0 - 15° (up to 800 μm cladding fiber) Blade life 20,000 fibers (Cladding diameter 125 μm) Number of cleaving mode Maximum 100 Language English/Japanese CT-106 Monitor 4 .7 inches color LCD Dimensions 240(W)×134(D)×155(H) mm 240(W)×134(D)×162 .5(H) mm Weight 3 .5 kg 3 .8 kg Features Power supply AC adapter : ADC-19 Input : AC100 to 240 V (50 to 60 Hz) (max . 20 W) •• Applicable up to Operation condition 0 to 95% RH and 0 to 40°C (non-dew) 1,250 μm diameter fibers Storage condition 0 to 95% RH and -40 to 80°C (non-dew) •• Automatic clamping system Terminal USB2 .0 (Mini-B type) for PC communication •• Up to 100 program modes can be stored Ordering Information •• Angled cleaving function on CT-106 •• 20,000 cleave per blade DESCRIPTION AFL NO. for 125 μm fiber CT-105 Large Diameter Optical Fiber Cleaver S016076 •• Fiber backstop standard Includes: ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, HEX-01 hex wrench, USB-01 USB Cable on all cleavers and M-CT105 instruction manual CT-106 Angled Large Diameter Optical Fiber Cleaver S016077 Includes: ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, HEX-01 hex wrench, USB-01 USB Cable and M-CT105 instruction manual

blade

clamp fiber backstop backstop

Angled Cleaving Automatic Clamp Function Backstop Angled cleaving from 0-15° is possible Clamping optical fiber with programmable A back stop is important for cleaving both for fibers up to 800 µm (only for CT-106) force automatically . No compressed air or very small and large diameter fibers and is torquewrenches required . standard on all CT-105/CT-106 cleavers .

CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers

Accessories DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. CB-06 Replacement Blade S016078 Fiber Holder Inserts (continued) Height adjusting spacer (10 piece pack) AC adapter ADC-19 S015523 INSERT-L-1000-1250 S016091 SPA-CT105-30 (30 μm) S016095 AC power cord ACC-09 S014390 INSERT-L-1500-1750 S016092 SPA-CT105-50 (50 μm) S016096 Fiber Holder Inserts INSERT-L-2000-2250 S016093 SPA-CT105-100 (100 μm) S016097 Master fiber holder insert kit S016098 INSERT-L-2500-3000 S016094 (includes all available inserts listed below) INSERT-U-80-400 S016079 INSERT-L-80 S016085 INSERT-U-500-750 S016080 INSERT-L-125 S016086 INSERT-U-1000-1250 S016081 INSERT-L-160 S016087 INSERT-U-1500-1750 S016082 INSERT-L-250 S016088 INSERT-U-2000-2250 S016083 INSERT-L-400 S016089 INSERT-U-2500-3000 S016084 INSERT-L-500-750 S016090

Insert Selection Guide INSERT-U-500-750 INSERT-U-1000-1250 INSERT-U-1500-1750 INSERT-U-2000-2250 INSERT-U-2500-3000 INSERT-U-80-400 FRFRFRFRFR INSERT-L-80 60-100 INSERT-L-125 90-160 INSERT-L-160 115-200 INSERT-L-250 180-300 INSERT-L-400 280-500 F 475-700 INSERT-L-500-750 R 675-950 F 925-1150 INSERT-L-1000-1250 R 1125-1400 F 1375-1700 INSERT-L-1500-1750 R 1675-1900 F 1875-2200 INSERT-L-2000-2250 R 2175-2450 F 2425-2750 INSERT-L-2500-3000 R 2725-3175

Upper and lower inserts can be changed up or down depending on required fiber fit into the V-groove. F & R denote the end of the insert that is visible in the cleaver . Inserts 500 μm and above are double-sided . Therefore, the F & R determine which side of the insert you are using .

Upper and lower inserts are necessary for both left and right side clamps. Case 1: Cleaving fiber with a coating Case 2: Cleaving glass rod

L: INSERT-U-xxx-xxx R: INSERT-U-xxx-xxx L: INSERT-U-xxx-xxx R: INSERT-U-xxx-xxx

L: INSERT-L-xxx-xxx R: INSERT-L-xxx-xxx L: INSERT-L-xxx-xxx R: INSERT-L-xxx-xxx According to coating diameter According to cladding diameter According to coating diameter According to cladding diameter Inserts according to both coating diameter Two insert pairs of the same size according and cladding diameter are necessary. to rod diameter are necessary.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00080, Revision 0, 1.5.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 26 PowerCleave® To complement the line of world class splicing systems, AFL’s PowerCleave combines the precision of an ultrasonic cleaver with the ease and improved fiber management of the Fujikura fiber holder system . The PowerCleave utilizes the tensile stress method photo to avoid touching or damaging the bare glass surface during cleaving, ensuring highly robust, reliable and durable splice results . The PowerCleave provides consistent flat ends even at cleave lengths as short as 3 mm . Specially designed for use with Fujikura’s specialty market splicers, this advanced cleaving system allows for more reliability and greater splicing consistency with less dependence on operator technique .

Features •• Tensile cleaving with ultrasonic blade •• Consistent, low-angle cleaves of short cleave-length fibers •• Fiber holder system reduces fiber handling •• Clean, reliable quality

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Fibers Cleaved 80 µm - 200 µm (cladding diameter) Minimum Cleave Length 3 mm Cleave Angle <0 .6 typical (95% of cleaves) Blade Diamond with an estimated life of over 20,000 cleaves Clamping System Compatible with Fujikura specialty market fiber holder systems Case ABS impact resistant with non-slip feet and a 6 25. mm ( .24 inch) BSW thread tripod mount for hard mounting to a workstation Battery 9V alkaline (MN 1604), battery life approximately 10,000 cleaves Dimensions (L x W x D) 75 mm x 153 mm x 150 mm (3 0. x 6 0. x 5 9. inches) Weight 1 1. kg (2 .4 lbs) Operating Temperature 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F) Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F) CE Conformity Fully complies with all EC equipment guidelines according to the CE declaration of conformity

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. PowerCleave Kit S009972 Includes: PowerCleave, Instruction manual, 2 .5 mm x 60 mm screwdriver, 2 mm Allen wrench

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00063, Revision 3, 5.29.12 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 27 AutoCleaver The AutoCleaver is a fully automatic, ultra high precision fiber cleaver with a typical cleave angle of less than 0 .3° . Designed for industrial applications where high accuracy, reliability and production yield are required, the AutoCleaver has a built-in microprocessor which controls all vital parameters and settings such as fiber positioning, clamping, fiber tension and the exact position and speed of the diamond blade . The cleaver can be connected to an external PC from which all programmable parameters and settings can be accessed . The AutoCleaver has a diamond blade with an extensive life, generating typically more than 26,000 cleaves per blade . With interchangeable adapters to fit all commercially Features available fiber holders, the AutoCleaver’s adapter is easily adjustable for desired cleave lengths and the automatic fiber waste disposal system removes any hazardous fiber scraps . •• Fully automatic •• Low cleave angles of < 0 .3º The AutoCleaver comes in a small bench top design, workbench-mountable or ready to be •• Very flat end faces integrated into different subsystems . •• Designed for production environment •• Waste fiber deposition Specifications •• Long diamond life of > 26,000 PARAMETER VALUE •• PC controllable Fiber Cladding 80-230 µm* Fiber Coating 160 - 900 µm* Cleave Angle Typical < 0 .3º Cycle Time Typical <12 sec # of Cleaves/Blade >30,000 Fiber Waste Typical < 20 mm Power Supply External 12V DC Compressed Air External Compressor**, 6 bar, 4 mm instant push-in fitting PC Connection RS-232 Dimensions 175 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 104 mm (H) Weight 1 .4 kg * Fiber specific handling kits required ** Not included in delivery

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. AutoCleaver with Power Supply and Cord 50000000-US (Includes: V-groove and Height Adjuster for 125 µm fiber, PC software, RS-232 cable, Adapter Plate FJK, AC STD, manual and tools)

Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Adaptor Plate FJK, AC STD 50000020 V-groove, STD, Cla 80 µm (Blue) 51030010 V-groove, STD, Cla 125-199 µm (Yellow) 51030020 V-groove, STD, Cla 200-349 µm (Orange) 51030030 Height Adjuster STD, Cla 80 µm (Blue) 51040010 Height Adjuster STD, Cla 125-159 µm (Yellow) 51040020 Height Adjuster STD, Cla 160-199 µm (Blank/Grey) 51040030 Height Adjuster STD, Cla 200-349 µm (Orange) 51040040 Diamond blade 50000010 Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool 50000050 Power Supply, 100-240V, 1 .25A 50100240 Adapter for Power Supply, US 50100241

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00033, Revision 2, 2.9.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 28 AutoCleaver LDF The AutoCleaver LDF is a high precision fiber cleaver, designed for cleaving of Large Diameter Fibers . It provides outstanding cleaving performance for large diameter fibers from 250 μm up to 1200 μm in diameter . It also supports cleaving of fibers as small as 125 μm . The unique and patent-pending cleaving process generates typical cleave angles of less than 0 .5 degrees with LDF fibers . The AutoCleaver LDF can be configured for use with the Fujikura FSM-45 series of fusion splicers and therefore supports splicing operations with large diameter fibers . The cleaved fiber is transferred from the cleaver to the Fujikura splicer using a standard Fujikura fiber holder . The built in Microprocessor controls all vital parameters and Features settings, such as fiber alignment, clamping, tension and the exact position and speed of the diamond blade . This control of sensitive parameters guarantees a high cleaving •• Fully automatic repeatability and accuracy . During cleaving, the fiber coating is clamped by a touch- •• Low cleave angles: < 0 .50° operated tension clamp . The clamp is quickly interchangeable based on the fiber coating •• Very flat end faces diameter . A v-groove clamping block and a fiber height adjuster are selected based •• Operator independent upon the diameter of the fiber cladding . The fiber coating tension clamp as well as •• Designed for production and the V-groove clamp block and height adjuster work together as a fiber handling kit to laboratory environments ensure optimum cleaving performance for a particular fiber . These parts may be selected •• Automatic scrap fiber collection at the time of cleaver purchase from the selection guide matrix . Other sets are easily •• Long diamond life exchanged by the operator to set the cleaver up for another fiber size . •• PC controllable The AutoCleaver LDF also accepts the use of NYFORS fiber holders in place of the •• Adaptable for fiber holders of the tension clamps normally used for coating clamping . This provides versatile use of the Fujikura FSM-45F-LDF and cleaver for operations when splicing is not required . The cleaver is designed to generate FSM-45PM-LDF fusion splicer minimum amounts of fiber waste, typically less than 20 mm . An automatic waste disposal system removes any hazardous fiber scraps . The cleaver can be connected to an external PC that gives access to all programmable parameters and settings . The AutoCleaver LDF comes in a small bench top design . It has been designed to easily permit recessed mounting for ergonomic workbench operations in a production environment and is therefore ready to be integrated into different subsystems .

Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Fiber Cladding 250 - 1000 µm* Fiber Coating 300 - 1500 µm* Cycle Time Typical < 14 seconds Cleave Angle Typical < 0 5º. Cladding Diameter 230 - 1000 µm Coating Diamter 250 - 1500 µm Fiber Waste Typical < 20 mm Power Supply External 12V DC Compressed Air External Compressor**, 6 bar 4 mm instant push-in fitting PC Connection RS-232 Dimensions 175 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 104 mm (H) Weight 2 5. kg * Fiber specific handling kits required ** Not included in delivery

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. AutoCleaver LDF with Power Supply and Cord 50100000-US Includes: Adaptor Plate FJK, PC software, RS-232 cable, manual and tools Nyfors AutoCleaver LDF w/Universal Stage S015274 Includes: Long Rail, Power Supply & Cord Adaptor Plate FJK, PC software, RS-232 cable, manual and tools

* See Fiber Handling matrix below for additional required items .

Selection Guide Matrix for Determining Fiber Handling Kit

DESCRIPTION LABEL AFL NO. V-Groove (Used with all splicer brands) Select size based on fiber cladding diameter V-groove, LD, Cladding 200-349 µm Orange 51030030 V-groove, LD, Cladding 350-699 µm Green 51030040 V-groove, LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm Red 51030050 Height Adjuster (Used with all splicer brands) Select size based on fiber cladding diameter Height Adj . LD, Cladding 200-349 µm Orange 51040040 Height Adj . LD, Cladding 350-529 µm White 51040050 Height Adj . LD, Cladding 530-699 µm Black 51040060 Height Adj . LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm Red 51040070 Linear Insert (Used only with Fujikura splicers) Select size based on fiber coating diameter Linear Insert, Coating 210-699 µm 210-699 51050010 Linear Insert, Coating 700-1000 µm 700-1000 51050020

Misc. Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Diamond blade 50000010 Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool 50000050 Power Supply, 100-240V, 1 .25A 50100240 Adapter for Power Supply, US 50100241 Universal Stage NFF FH Base S014770

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00035, Revision 4, 2.3.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 30 AutoCleaver LDA The AutoCleaver LDA is a high precision fiber cleaver, designed for angle cleaving of large diameter fibers (LDF) . It is a special version of the well-known AutoCleaver LDF which provide outstanding cleaving performance for fibers from 230 μm up to 1000 μm in diameter . The unique and patent pending cleaving process generates typical cleave angles of less than 0 .5 degrees . The AutoCleaver LDA is capable of cleaving fibers with a coating diameter up to 1000 μm, achieving cleave angles from 0 up to more than 15 degrees with very consistent ±0 .5 degrees cleave angles . The cleave angle is set using a micrometer screw positioner allowing the operator to quickly setup the cleaver Features for different fiber sizes or cleave angles . •• Variable angle cleaving, The V-groove clamp block and the fiber height adjuster are selected to match the 0 to >15 degrees diameter of the fiber cladding . The V-groove clamp block and the height adjuster work •• Semi automatic together as a fiber handling kit to ensure optimum cleaving performance for a particular •• Easy handling fiber range . These parts have to be be selected from the Selection Guide Matrix when •• Operator independent you purchase the cleaver . The parts are easily exchanged by the operator to set the •• Designed for production and cleaver up for a different fiber size . laboratory environments The built-in microprocessor controls all parameters and settings, such as clamping, •• Automatic fiber astew collection tension and the exact position and speed of the diamond blade . This control of sensitive •• Long-lasting diamond parameters guarantees a high cleaving repeatability and accuracy . •• PC controllable The cleaver is designed to generate a minimum amount of fiber waste, typically less than 20 mm . An automatic waste disposal system removes any hazardous fiber scraps . The cleaver can be connected to a PC that gives access to all programmable parameters and settings . The AutoCleaver LDA comes in a small bench top design .

Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Cycle time Typical < 18 seconds Cladding diameter 230-800+ μm* Coating diameter 250-1000 μm Cleave angle 0 to >15 degrees Fiber waste length Typical < 20 mm, automatic disposal Power supply External 12 V DC, 15 W Compressed air supply External compressor**, 6-8 bar, 4 mm instant push-in fitting PC Interface RS-232 Dimensions 175 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 104 mm (H) Weight 2 5. kg

* Fiber specific handling parts required . See the Selection Guide Matrix for more information .

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. AutoCleaver LDA with Power Supply and Cord 50400000 Includes: AutoCleaver LDA unit for angle cleaving, PC software, RS-232 cable, Manual and Tools

* See Fiber Handling matrix below for additional required items .

Selection Guide Matrix for Determining Fiber Handling Kit

Misc. Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Diamond blade 50000010 Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool 50000050 Power Supply, 100-240V, 1 .25A 50100240 Adapter for Power Supply, US 50100241

© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00034, Revision 0, 8.30.12 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 32 AutoCleaver S1-80 µm / S1-125 µm When a specific and accurate bare fiber length is required, the AutoCleaver S1 provides the perfect cleave every time . Sensing the edge of the coating and adjusting the bare fiber length according to the customers’ specifications, the AutoCleaver S1 cleaves 80 µm and 125 µm fibers automatically . Cleave angles are typically under 0 .3° with excellent end face quality . A built-in microprocessor controls all the vital parameters and settings such as fiber positioning, clamping, fiber tension and the exact position and speed of the diamond blade . The cleaver can be connected to an external PC, enabling access to all programmable parameters and settings . The AutoCleaver S1 is available in a small bench top design, workbench-mountable or ready to be integrated into different sub-systems . At the time of order, the desired cleave length must be specified . The minimum cleave length possible is 3 mm and the maximum is 6 5. mm . The bare fiber length can be fine-tuned by software between 0 and 500 µm .

Features Specifications •• Fully automatic PARAMETER VALUE •• Low cleave angles of < 0 .3º Fiber Cladding 80 - 125 µm* Fiber Coating 160 - 400 µm* •• Very flat end faces Cleave Angle Typical < 0 3º. •• Operator independent Cycle Time Typical < 14 seconds •• Designed for production environment Cladding diameter 80 and 125 µm # of Cleaves/Blade > 30,000 •• Waste fiber deposition Fiber Waste Typical < 20 mm •• Long diamond life Power Supply External 12V DC •• Available for 80 or 125 µm fibers Compressed Air External Compressor**, 6 bar 4 mm instant push-in fitting •• PC controllable PC connection RS-232 Dimensions 175 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 104 mm (H) Weight 1 4. kg * Fiber specific handling kits required ** Not included in delivery

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. AutoCleaver S1-80 µm with Power Supply and Cord 50100029 (Includes: V-groove & Height Adjuster, Adaptor Plate, PC software, manual and tools) a + - 10 µm / AutoCleaver S1-125 µm with Power Supply and Cord 50100028 (Includes: V-groove & Height Adjuster, Adaptor Plate, PC software, manual and tools)

Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Adaptor Plate FJK, AC STD 50000020 Adaptor Plate NYF/ECA, AC STD 50000030 V-groove, STD, Cla . 80 µm 51030010 V-groove, STD, Cla . 125-199 µm 51030020 Height Adj . STD, Cla . 80 µm 51040010 Height Adj . STD Cla . 125-159 µm 51040020 Diamond blade 50000010 Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool 50000050 Power Supply, 100-240V, 1 .25 A 50100240 Adapter for Power Supply, US 50100241

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00036, Revision 3, 10.15.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 33 AutoCleaver S2 The AutoCleaver S2 contains special fiber clamps with air pressure-controlled clamping forces, designed for cleaving air-clad fiber . Coupled with modified software, these features enable the AutoCleaver S2 to handle otherwise difficult-to-cleave fibers . The clamping force of the fiber clamps is set individually by changing the air pressure .

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. AutoCleaver S2 - Small Cylinder/FJK 50100030 Includes: 12 mm v-groove clamping cylinder, FJK Fiber Holder Adapter LDF, RS-232 cable, PC software, tools and manuals AutoCleaver S2 - Large Cylinder/FJK 50100092 Features Includes: 20 mm v-groove clamping cylinder, FJK Fiber Holder Adapter LDF, RS-232 cable, •• Fully automatic PC software, tools and manuals •• Low cleave angles of < 0 .5º •• Very flat end faces Accessories •• Operator independent DESCRIPTION LABEL AFL NO. •• Automatic fiber astew collection V-groove, STD, Cladding 125-199 µm Yellow 51030020 •• Long-lasting diamond V-groove, LD, Cladding 200-349 µm Orange 51030030 •• PC controllable V-groove, LD, Cladding 350-699 µm Green 51030040 V-groove, LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm Red 51030050 Height Adjuster LD, Cladding 200-349 µm Orange 51040040 Specifications Height Adjuster LD, Cladding 350-529 µm White 51040050 PARAMETER VALUE Height Adjuster LD, Cladding 530-699 µm Black 51040060 Fiber Cladding 125 - 1000 µm* Height Adjuster LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm Red 51040070 Fiber Coating 250 - 1500 µm* Holder, LD, Coating 200-299 µm 250 µm 51010010 Cycle Time Typical < 14 seconds Holder, LD, Coating 300-399 µm 350 µm 51010020 Cleave Angle Typical < 0 .5º Holder, LD, Coating 400-499 µm 450 µm 51010030 Fiber Waste Typical < 20 mm Holder, LD, Coating 500-599 µm 550 µm 51010040 Power Supply External 12V DC Holder, LD, Coating 600-699 µm 650 µm 51010050 Compressed Air 4mm instant push-in fitting Holder, LD, Coating 700-799 µm 750 µm 51010060 PC Connection RS-232 Holder, LD, Coating 800-899 µm 850 µm 51010070 Dimensions 175 mm(W) x 138 mm(D) Holder, LD, Coating 900-999 µm 950 µm 51010080 x 104 mm(H) Holder, LD, Coating 1000-1099 µm 1050 µm 51010090 Weight 2 .5 kg Holder, LD, Coating 1100-1199 µm 1150 µm 51010100 Holder, LD, Coating 1200-1299 µm 1250 µm 51010110 * Fiber specific handling kits required Holder, LD, Coating 1300-1399 µm 1350 µm 51010120 Holder, LD, Coating 1400-1499 µm 1450 µm 51010130 Distance Plate LD Cladding 200-349 µm Orange 51020010 Distance Plate LD Cladding 350-699 µm Green 51020020 Distance Plate LD Cladding 700-1000 µm Red 51020030 Diamond blade — 50000010 Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool — 50000050 Power Supply, 100-240 V, 1 25. A — 50100240 Adapter for Power Supply, US — 50100241

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00037, Revision 4, 10.15.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 34 CleaveMeter 3DLDF The CleaveMeter 3DLDF is a non-contact (Michelson) interferometer used to examine all types of large diameter fibers with a cladding diameter of 250-1200µm . The optical system consists of a CCD camera with two user-selectable magnifications . Connected to the USB-port of an external PC, parameters and settings are programmed from the PC . A small bench-top design, the CleaveMeterLDF is designed to be compatible with all NYFORS’ automatic large diameter fiber (LDF) cleavers such as the AutoCleaverLDF and the CleaveMasterLDF . The CleaveMeterLDF accepts the fiber holders used by the NYFORS cleavers without mechanical adjustments . For other types of holders, customized adapters must be provided .

Specifications Features •• Documents images from critical PARAMETER VALUE end-faces during production Fiber Cladding 250 - 1200µm •• Precise results Curing Coating 300 - 1500µm •• Fast and easy handling Power Supply USB port PC Connection USB port Dimensions 95mm (W) x 160mm (D) x 140mm (H) Weight 1 .5kg

* Fiber specific adaptor plates required

Ordering Information

PART NO. DESCRIPTION 30000005 CleaveMeter LDF/Excluding Adapter Plate

MISC. ACCESSORIES 30010010 Adapter Plate, FJK, 200-259µm 30020010 Adapter Plate, NYFORS, Generic

Octagon 400µm Circular 550µm 0 .38˚ 0 .17˚

Hot Jacket Strippers The HJS-02, HJS-03 and HJS-03-24 hot jacket strippers provide superior ribbon andfield-ribbonized stripping performance . They conserve energy with a Power Save feature when the splicer is operated by battery power . A temperature selection switch provides easy field optimization for different fibers or operating conditions . HJS-02 An optional single-fiber adapter may be used to provide easy single-fiber capability for difficult-to-strip fibers . These strippers accept all Fujikura field and factory splicer designed fiber holders . The HJS-03 is a battery powered hot jacket stripper specifically designed for use withthe SpliceMate fusion splicer but it can be used in other applications . The HJS-03-24 hot jacket stripper is designed for smooth and controlled stripping of 24-fiber ribbon .

Specifications

MODEL HJS-02, HJS-03 HJS-03-24 Applicable Fiber Count 1 to 12 Fiber Ribbon 1 to 24 Fiber Ribbon HJS-03 Ribbon Thickness 250 µm to 400 µm 250 µm to 400 µm Stripping Length 35 mm maximum 35 mm maximum Typical Heating Time 3 second Normal Mode 3 second Normal Mode 8 second Power Save Mode 30 second Power Save Mode Standard Heating Temperature 100ºC 100ºC Dimensions (W x D x H) 107 mm x 40 mm x 29 mm 149 mm x 58 mm x 36 mm Weight 195 g (0 43lb). 300 g (0 .66 lb) Power Supply 12V DC 12V DC Operating Conditions -10ºC to 50ºC -10ºC to 50ºC Storage Conditions -40ºC to 80ºC -40ºC to 80ºC

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. HJS-03-24 with Power Assist Tool Strippers HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper (12 fibers max .) Includes DCC-11 S010340 HJS-02-80 Hot Jacket Stripper (80 µm cladding) Includes DCC-11 S013264 HJS-03 Battery Powered Hot Jacket Stripper S013996 HJS-03-24 Hot Jacket Stripper (24 fibers max ). S012960 HJS-03-24PA Power Assist Tool for HJS-03-24 S012964 AC Power Operation ADC-09 AC Adapter (for HJS-02, HJS-03 and HJS-03-24) S014389 ACC-09 AC Power Cord (for ADC-09) S014390 DC Power Operation DCC-11 DC Power Cord for HJS-02/HJS-03 (for FSM-17R/50R/18R/60R) S013852 DCC-03 DC Power Cord for HJS-02/HJS-03 (for FSM-30R/40R24) S006126 Miscellaneous SAD-01 Single Fiber Adapter for HJS-02 S010428

( ) © 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00031, Revision 4, 8 .7 .12 www.AFLglobal.com or 800 235-3423 Specifications are subject to change without notice . 3636 AFL PowerStrip™ AFL PowerStrip is a thermal stripper used in high strength splicing . Using the proven blade and centering design of the Schleuniger FiberStrip 7030 in addition to the fiber holder system, the AFL PowerStrip automatically centers the fiber, heats the buffer or coating and strips the buffer at a controlled rate with perfect alignment . The fiber holder system reduces fiber handling, making this tool ideal for any production environment .

Specifications Features •• 250 µm and 900 µm fiber capability PARAMETER VALUE Fibers Stripped - Single Buffered Fiber Cladding diameter: 125 µm standard, 80 µm optional •• Short cycle time Coating diameter: 250 µm and 900 µm standard, 160 µm •• Lightweight and portable and 400 µm optional Clamping System Fujikura fiber holder clamp; compatible with FSM-45F/PM and 100 series fiber holders Stripping Length Up to 35 mm Heater Temperature Range 110°C to 150°C (230°F to 302°F) Heating Time 1 .5 to 13 seconds Cycle Time Approximately 5 seconds/cycle (after heating) Power Supply Input: 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 ± 3 Hz; Output: 12 V DC, 12 W, 1 A Dimensions (L x W x D) 209 mm x 57 mm x 45 mm (8 .25 x 2 25. x 1 .8 inches) Weight 0 .7 kg (1 .5 lbs) CE Conformity Complies with all CE equipment guidelines

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. AFL PowerStrip Kit S012808 Carrying case, fiber holder clamping system, blades and centralizers for 125/250 µm and 125/900 µm fiber, power supply 230 V AC or 100/120 V AC, power cord 2 m (6 .5 feet), cleaning brush and tool set (hex keys, adjustment screwdriver) Coating Blades 80/160 µm S012656 125/250 µm S012596 125/400 µm S012628 125/900 µm S012604 250/400 µm S014400 Centralizers 160 µm S012652 250 µm S012600 400 µm S012624 900 µm S012608 Power Supply 12 V DC W/PLUG ADPT S015185 * Custom blades and centralizers available on request .

37 High Tensile Stripper The Fujikura high tensile stripper HTS-12 provides excellent strength performance when removing 250 µm and 400 µm buffer from optical fibers . Heating temperature and duration are fully adjustable for a variety of buffer materials . Self centering blades eliminate the need for an external guide and make replacement quick and easy . Designed for use with the FSM-40F/PM fiber holder system, the HTS-12 is an ideal solution for stripping when high strength fusion splices are a must .

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Applicable Fiber: Cladding Diameter 125 µm Coating Diameter 250 µm / 400 µm (optional) Stripping Length 35 mm max Temperature Settings 120º, 140º, 160º, or 180º C (adjustable) Heating Time 3 seconds approximate Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC (50 to 60 Hz) Dimensions (W x D x H) 140 x 60 x 60 (mm) / 5 .51 x 2 36. x 2 36. (inches) Weight 600 g / 1 3. lbs Operating Conditions 0ºC to 40ºC, 10% to 85% RH (non-condensing)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. HTS-12 High Tensile Stripper w/ 250 µm Blades S012094 400 µm Blade for HTS-12 S011946 250 µm Blades for HTS-12 S011942

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00030, Revision 1, 2 .10 .11 Specifications are subject to change without notice . 38 USC-03 Ultrasonic Cleaner The Fujikura ultrasonic cleaner model USC-03 provides a simple and cost effective method for cleaning optical fibers when high strength fusion splices are required . This ultrasonic cleaner readily accepts all FH-40-XXX, FH-50-XXX, FH-60-XXX and FH-100-XXX series fiber holders . The Universal Fiber Holder Adapter, available as an optional accessory, enables the use of FH-XXX series fiber holders . The high frequency ultrasonic action cleans debris and coating residue without damaging the exposed cladding and a built-in timer ensures that the required cleaning time is consistently used for all fibers processed . This cleaner, when used in conjunction with high strength stripping and cleaving accessories, produces outstanding results for the most demanding high strength applications .

Features •• Built-in timer assures correct cleaning time •• Adjustable high intensity vibratory cleaning action •• Adjustment knob allows fine-tuning of fiber submersion depth •• Alcohol bath lid prevents cleaning fluid evaporation when machine is idle

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Applicable Fibers Single optical fiber Applicable Fiber Holders FH-40, 50, 60 and 100 series Recommended Fluid Ethyl-alcohol Tank Capacity 24 cc to 45 cc Included Accessories Ultrasonic Frequency 50 kHz Fiber Cleaning Length 54 mm (max), adjustable Output Power 10 W (max) Timer Range 1 to 99 seconds Power Requirement AC 100 to 240 V / 50 Hz to 60 Hz Operating Environment 0oC to 40oC, 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing Storage Environment -20˚C to 60˚C, non-condensing humidity Dimensions (W x D x H) 95 x 190 x 157 (mm) / 3 .74 x 7 48. x 6 .18 (inches) Weight 1 kg / 2 .2 lbs

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. USC-03 S014783 Universal Fiber Holder Adapter S013568 ADC-10 Power Adapter S012548 ACC-09 Power Cord S014390

FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07 Optical Fiber Recoaters AFL offers a complete lineup of high quality fiber recoaters to address the small packaging needs of the fiber optic industry . The FSR series recoaters provide automatic operation with an easily exchangeable, low cost, mold design . A quick change resin bottle and pump assembly make messy, cumbersome, and time consuming acrylate changes a thing of the past . The pump system also provides a purge cavity for elimination of bubbles in the FSR-05 acrylate material . A programmable resin injection system provides an exact volume of resin to the mold cavity to ensure consistent and repeatable recoat performance . While the base model FSR-05 provides only recoating functions, the FSR-06 and FSR- 07 also provide programmable rate and force proof-testing capabilities up to 2 kgf or 10 kgf respectively . All of the recoaters are compatible with special recoating resins to provide higher stiffness recoating for 900 μm jacketed fibers, as well as specialty low-index resins for recoating of double-clad fibers . A USB - PC interface allows the user to control and store key parameters associated with the recoating process . The quartz mold technology provides very consistent recoating quality and have an estimated lifetime of 10,000 recoats per mold set .

FSR-06

Specifications

PARAMETER FSR-05 FSR-06 FSR-07 Applicable fiber coating Colored and non-colored Recoating diameter 195 μm, 255 μm, 280 μm, 450 μm, 670 μm, 1000 μm Custom sizes are available Recoating length 4 to 50 mm Recoating time Injection 20 sec/Curing 4 sec (Jacket diameter 250 μm with 280 μm MOLD) Resin injection Volume and speed are programmable FSR-07 Recoat material UV curable Acrylate Recommended specification for other viscosity 2000-6000 cps Curing wavelength 365± 15 nm Features DSM Desotech DesoLite(R) 950-200 recommended •• Easy mold, resin and pump exchange Material of mold Quartz •• Quartz molds for high-quality, Recoat modes 100 modes consistent recoating All variables programmable •• Wide selection of available mold sizes Proof-test modes — 30 modes •• Automated operation Speed, force, time programmable •• Bubble elimination system Load application — Linear Clamp Mandrel Tension — 0 .5 kgf ~ 2 0. kgf 0 .5 kgf ~ 10 .0 kgf •• Programmable resin injection Dimensions 252 mm (W) x 135 mm (D) 252 mm (W) x 175 mm (D) x 169 mm (H) •• Selectable proof–tester x 169 mm (H) •• PC interface with USB Weight 2 .9 kg 4 .3 kg 4 .5 kg Power source AC 100 to 240 C /50 to 60 Hz (External AC adaptor ADC-19) LCD monitor 4 .7 inch, Tilt angle PC interface USB 2 0. Type B mini Operating condition 10 to 30°C, 0 to 90% (non dew) Storage condition -40 to 60°C (non dew, no resin)

FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07 Optical Fiber Recoaters

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. FSR-05 S016103 Includes: 280 μm mold, ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, USB-01 USB Cable and M-FSR05 instruction manual . FSR-06 with 280 μm mold S016104 Includes: 280 μm mold, 2 kgf Proof Tester, ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, USB-01 USB Cable, PC-02 Fiber protect cover and M-FSR05 instruction manual . FSR-06 with 450 μm mold S016186 Includes: 450 μm mold, 2 kgf Proof Tester, ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, USB-01 USB Cable, PC-02 Fiber protect cover and M-FSR05 instruction manual . FSR-07 S016105 Includes: 10 kgf Proof Tester, 280 μm mold, ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, USB-01 USB Cable, PC-03 Fiber protect cover and M-FSR05 instruction manual .

Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Fiber protect cover for FSR-06: PC-02 S016107 Fiber protect cover for FSR-07: PC-03 S016108 Tube set: FSR-05-TUBE-01 S016109 Pump head: FSR-05-PUMP-01 S016110 UV resin bottle: FSR-05-BTL-01 S016112 Force gauge adaptor: FGA-02 S016113 MOLDS FSR-05-MOLD-195 S016133 FSR-05-MOLD-255 S016134 FSR-05-MOLD-280 S016106 FSR-05-MOLD-450 S016135 FSR-05-MOLD-670 S016136 FSR-05-MOLD-1000 S016137

•• Easy mold, resin, and pump exchange •• Factory installation is not required Bubble Separator

Mold exchange Bubble Separator Performance

Spare Pump for quickly changing Resin and pump exchange UV resin type: FSR-05-pump-01

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00081, Revision 2, 5.26.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 41 AutoCoater 2™ Designed for high strength applications, the AutoCoater 2 restores the protective coating on spliced acrylate-coated optical fibers . It is fully automatic, allowing for operator skill independence in factory environments with high productivity and cost advantages . Recoating compound is injected automatically into soft silicone recoating molds identical to those used in NYFORS manual recoaters . These silicone molds are easily & rapidly exchangeable with no realignment required . With different sizes and custom molds available, the operator can not only easily exchange molds to meet requirements for different fiber and fiber coating diameters, but he can also choose whether to (a) recoat to a uniform diameter that exactly matches the original fiber coating diameter, (b) recoat with a cross section slightly smaller in diameter than the original fiber coating (undersize), or (c) recoat with a larger diameter that moverlaps the primary coating at each end of the recoat section (over-coating) . With easy and rapid reconfiguration and simple setup, the AutoCoater 2 is the ideal choice for fully automatic skill-independent recoating operations where flexibility is required to Dispensing Robot is easily removed from the rear meet many different recoating needs and specifications . of the AutoCoater for rapid recoat resin exchange Rapid exchange of recoating resin type The customer selected recoating compound is automatically injected from an easily attached 1 oz Nalgene bottle, functioning as the recoater reservoir tank . This greatly Uniform Diameter simplifies refilling in high volume production . This bottle as well as the injection pump, supply lines, and injection needle comprise an easily exchangeable recoating compound “Dispensing Robot” . The dispensing robot may be rapidly removed with only 2 screws and one electrical interface connection . Since it can be removed and exchanged as a single unit, the need to purge or cleanse the injection Over-Mold (Over-Coating) pump and supply lines when changing from one type of recoating resin to another is completely eliminated . Another option when using several compounds in parallel is to operate the recoater in manual mode, using a syringe for manual resin injection of recoating compound into the mold . The combination of mold sizes and mold types (for uniform and undersize recoating as Undersize Recoating well as overcoating) and the simplicity of exchanging recoating compounds underscores the flexibility of the soft mold AutoCoater 2 as the most versatile and easily adaptable automatic recoater in the world .

Features •• Consistent, high quality recoating •• Automatic and skill independent •• Short cycle time •• Linear and mandrel strength testing •• Uniform diameter, overcoating and undersize recoating capability •• Easy exchange of recoating resin type •• No need for compressed air or vacuum •• Compatible with all common recoating resins including low-index and high temperature materials

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00067, Revision 1, 2.4.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 42 AutoCoater 2™ Other features Short curing times are achieved through an efficient UV LED array arranged along the length of the mold . Curing times depend on the fiber and fiber coating diameter as well as the properties of the customer-selected recoating resin, but are typically as short as 3 seconds which allows for very fast recoating operations with total cycle times of 15 seconds or less – faster than any competing recoater on the market . Besides standard High-index materials, low-index recoating compounds can be rapidly cured, typically with a curing time of no more than 30 seconds . High temperature (200°C) acrylate recoating compounds useful for oil and gas down-hole applications are also compatible, as well as stiffer recoat resins suitable for recoating 900 µm jacketed fibers . Strength tests can be carried out with the linear clamps or mandrels (optional) . Linear proof tests can be performed up to 22 N, while the mandrels allow for tensile tests with forces up to 100 N . Level of force, pulling rate and hold times at maximum force are programmable . The AutoCoater 2 comes in an ergonomic, bench-top design for comfortable operation . The main operator interface is a user-friendly and easy-to-navigate GUI on the touch screen control panel . System software supports storable and user-defined programs for easy process change . Remote monitoring and supervision can be carried out through an Ethernet interface .

Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Curing time Programmable, 3 s typical Cycle time 15 seconds typical Light source UV LED Wavelength 380-385 nm Injection Automatic from 1 oz bottle Mold mounting Exchangeable Mold length 34 mm and 55 mm Recoating diameter (μm) 165, 250, 300, 400, 550 and 900 μm Linear proof test Programmable, 0-22 N Mandrel Tensile Test (optional item) Programmable, 0-100 N Hold time Programmable Pull rate 0 .5-20 N/s Display units lbs, kg, N, kpsi, GPa PC connection Ethernet and USB flash drive Compressed air Not needed Power supply External 12 V DC, 60 W Dimensions 270 mm (W) x 210 mm (D) x 115 mm (H) Weight 4 .5 kg

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. AutoCoater 2 w/ Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter), Fiber Tensioner-Standard, 10100035 Packet of 250 µm Molds (34 mm length), Mold Guide Pins, Manual and Tools

Accessories DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Mold Options Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100036 Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100037 Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100038 Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100039 Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100040 Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100078 Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100041 Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100042 Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100043 Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100044 Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100045 Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100046 Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100079 Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100047 Custom molds are available upon request Miscellaneous Mold Guide Pins 10100070 Fiber Tensioner, 900 µm (left and right) 10100061 Mandrels (Rotary Tensile Test) 10100056 Dispenser Robot 10100069 Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter) 90100409

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00067, Revision 1, 2.4.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 44 MiniCoater 2™ This compact and easy-to-use recoater is based on NYFORS proven silicone mold technology which has been developed and refined in the course of the last twenty years . Molds are available in different sizes to cover a range of coating diameters and can easily be exchanged by the operator with no realignment required . Custom molds are available on request . With the standard molds the recoated part of the fiber is round with a cross section that perfectly and uniformly matches that of the original fiber coating, but molds can also be selected for both over-coating and undersize recoating of optical fibers . These features makes the MiniCoater 2 well suited for research and development operations and small Uniform Diameter scale production where the fiber type and dimensions need to be changed frequently . The cordless battery operation enables easy movement from lab-to-lab, or from one production area to another . Injection of the recoating compound is performed manually . While this does require a manual user operation, it also ensures flexibility because the user can immediately Over-Mold (Over-Coating) switch from one type of recoating compound to another (e .g . from a high-index recoating material to a low-index material) without any need to flush out a recoater reservoir and injection pumping system . This, in addition to the rapidly exchangeable mold sizes and shapes (for uniform diameter and undersize recoating as well as overcoating), ensures the flexibility and adaptability of the MiniCoater 2 . Undersize Recoating Short curing times are achieved through a highly efficient UV LED array, which also has the ability to cure low-index recoating compounds used in fiber laser manufacturing . In addition, the MiniCoater 2 is compatible with recoating materials that can withstand 200°C high temperature applications such as down-hole applications in oil and gas wells . The MiniCoater 2 has a simple two button control with a three digit display and comes in a very compact package . The small size and light weight of the MiniCoater 2™ makes it ideal for situations where the recoater must be frequently moved from one lab or production area to another . The small size also facilitates easy ergonomic integration into a production work bench where space is at a premium . In addition, since the MiniCoater 2 may be operated by battery power, and also due to the small size and weight, it is well suited to recoating in a remote field environment where a high degree of portability is required .

Features •• Ideal recoater for remote sites •• Easy mold exchange and replacement such as on oil rigs •• Handles most fiber dimensions with •• Very compact design custom molds available •• Small, lightweight, highly portable •• Uniform high quality recoating •• Runs on built-in rechargeable battery •• Short curing times or AC adapter •• High and low-index recoating •• Battery provides power for hours •• Uniform diameter, over-coating and of remote-site operation undersize recoating capability •• Compatible with high-temperature recoating compounds

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Curing time Programmable, 3 seconds typical Light source UV LED Wavelength 380-385 nm Mold material Silicone Mold length 34 mm and 55 mm Recoating diameter (μm) 165, 250, 300, 400, 550 & 900 μm Power supply Battery or external 12 V DC, 40 W Dimensions 150 mm (W) x 77 mm (D) x 60 mm (H) Weight 0 .7 kg

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. MiniCoater 2 w/ Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU adapter), Fiber Clamps (for 165-330 µm & 330-900 µm), 10100033 Packet of 250 µm Molds (34 mm length), Mold Guide Pins, Manual and Tools

Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Mold Options Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100036 Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100037 Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100038 Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100039 Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100040 Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100078 Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100041 Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100042 Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100043 Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100044 Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100045 Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100046 Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100079 Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100047 Custom molds are available upon request Miscellaneous Mold Guide Pins 10100070 Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter) 90100409 FIBER CLAMPS,MINIC 2,165-330 µm 10100074 FIBER CLAMPS,MINIC 2,330-900 µm 10100058

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00070, Revision 2, 10.15.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 46 ReCoater 2 XL™ The extended length ReCoater 2 XL is used to restore the protective coating on acrylate-coated optical fibers in high strength applications . Designed to process long sections of stripped fiber, it accepts silicone molds of up to 110 mm length . Molds are available in different sizes to cover a range of fiber coating diameters and can easily be exchanged with no realignment required . With standard molds the recoated part of the fiber is round with a cross section that perfectly and uniformly matches that of the original coating, but molds can also be selected for both overcoating and ReCoater 2 XL™ with optional Mandrels attached undersize recoating of optical fibers . These features as well as the ability to recoat very long stripped fiber sections makes the ReCoater 2 XL ideal for research and development operations and small scale production where the fiber type and length Features need to be changed frequently . •• Extended length recoating up to more than 100 mm Injection of the recoating compound is performed manually . While this does require •• Easy mold exchange and replacement a manual user operation, it also ensures flexibility because the user can immediately •• Handles most fiber dimensions, switch from one type of recoating compound to another (e .g . from a high-index with custom molds available recoating material to a low-index material) without any need to flush out a recoater •• Uniform diameter, overcoating and reservoir and injection pumping system . undersize recoating capability This, in addition to the rapidly exchangeable mold sizes and shapes (for uniform •• Short curing times diameter and undersize recoating as well as overcoating), ensures the flexibility and •• High and low-index recoating adaptability of the extended length ReCoater 2 XL . •• Linear or mandrel strength testing Short curing times are achieved through an efficient UV LED array, arranged along the length of the mold . Curing times depend on the fiber and fiber coating diameter as well as the properties of the customer-selected recoating resin, but are typically as short Uniform Diameter as 3 seconds which allows for very fast recoating operations . The highly efficient light source also makes it possible to cure low-index recoating compounds used in fiber laser manufacturing . Strength tests can be carried out with linear clamps or mandrels (optional) . Linear proof Over-Mold (Over-Coating) tests can be performed up to 22 N, with programmable levels of force, pulling rates and hold time at maximum force . With the mandrels, tensile tests can be performed with forces up to 100 N . Linear clamps are carefully designed so that the primary coating is not damaged . The ReCoater 2 XL comes in an ergonomic, bench-top design for comfortable operation . Undersize Recoating The main operator interface is an easy-to-navigate and user-friendly GUI on the touch screen control panel . System software supports storable and user-defined programs for easy process change . Remote monitoring and supervision can be carried out through an Ethernet interface .

Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Curing time Programmable, 3 seconds typical Light source UV LED Wavelength 380-385 nm Mold material Silicone Mold mounting Exchangeable Mold length 34 mm, 55 mm and 110 mm Recoating diameter (μm) 165, 250, 300, 400, 550 & 900 μm Linear proof test Programmable, 0-22 N Rotary tensile test (optional item) Programmable, 0-100 N Resolution 0 .01 N Hold time Programmable Pulling speed Programmable Pulling rate 0 .5-20 N/s Display units lbs, kg, N, kpsi, GPa PC connection Ethernet and USB flash drive connection Power supply External 12 V DC, 60 W Compressed air Not needed Dimensions 270 mm (W) x 170 mm (D) x 98 mm (H) Weight 3 .9 kg

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. ReCoater 2 XL w/ Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter), Fiber Tensioners, Standard, Packet of 250 µm Molds (110 mm length), 10100068 Mold Guide Pins (Extended length), Manual and Tools

Accessories DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Mold Options Mold Options (continued) Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100036 Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces) 10100048 Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100037 Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces) 10100049 Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100038 Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces) 10100050 Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100039 Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces) 10100051 Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100040 Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces) 10100052 Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100078 Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 110 mm (5 pieces) 10100080 Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces) 10100041 Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces) 10100053 Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100042 Custom molds are available upon request Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100043 Miscellaneous Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100044 Mold Guide Pins (Extended) 10100071 Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100045 Fiber Tensioner, 900 µm (left and right) 10100061 Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100046 Mandrels 10100056 Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100079 Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter) 90100409 Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces) 10100047

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00071, Revision 1, 2.3.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 48 ProofTester The ProofTester is a compact and lightweight instrument ideal for strength testing of optical fibers up to 30 N . The ProofTester is developed to meet all types of applications where a strength test has to be performed . The ProofTester is designed with the user in mind . The fibers are easily placed in the correct position by guided linear clamps, and with a “One Touch” go button, the testing starts automatically . The built-in microprocessor controls all the important parameters such as pulling force, pull speed and hold time . This allows for a completely controlled test every time . The ProofTester can be connected to an external PC, which enables access to all programmable parameters and settings . The ProofTester is adapted for stand alone use or to be Features integrated in different subsystems . •• Fully automatic •• High pulling force Specifications •• Easy to operate •• Compact size PARAMETER VALUE Fiber Buffers 160 - 900 µm •• PC controlled Tensile Test 1 - 30 N •• Logging of test data Resolution 0 1. N Pulling Speed 20 - 100 mm/min Hold Time 0 - 10 sec Power Supply* External 12V DC Compressed Air External Compressor*, 5-7 bar, 4 mm tube instant push-in fitting Dimensions 210 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 110 mm (H) Weight 2 3. kg * Not included in delivery

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. ProofTester (Includes: PC software, RS-232 cable, manual and tools) 10100027 Power Supply (Purchased separately) 50100075 Power Adapter (Purchased separately) 50100009

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00042, Revision 3, 11.21.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 49 Fiber Arrangement Tool The FAT-04 features an easy-to-use fiber arrangement method utilizing linear travel . The FAT-04 includes a spare paste applicator to allow ribbon making to continue even if one of the paste applicators needs cleaning .

FAT-04 Ordering Information DESCRIPTION AFL NO. FAT-04 Fiber Arrangement Tool* S010212 SP-1 Foam Pads for FAT-04 S009016 (One set = 5 sheets of 25 pads each) Paste Applicator Blocks for FAT-04 (2 pieces) S010952

* FAT-04 includes 4 oz . FAA-03A ribbon forming adhesive, paste applicator blocks, cleaning swabs, CL-02 clips and SP-1 foam pads

Ribbon Forming Adhesive A key advantage of our fiber arrangement tool is the use of the ribbon forming adhesive . Ribbons formed with this adhesive have excellent stripability, especially compared to ribbonizing methods using tape . Unlike tape methods, the paste does not “gum-up” the stripping tool and cause broken fibers . The paste holds the stripped coating residue into a single piece of debris that is easily cleaned from the stripper . If needed, the ribbon can be easily separated into individual fibers using alcohol .

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. FAA-03A ribbon-forming adhesive (0 .5 liter bottle) S008622 FAA-03A FAA-03A ribbon-forming adhesive (4 oz . dispensing bottle) S008720

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00015, Revision 4, 5 .15 .15 Specifications are subject to change without notice . 5050 Splice Protection Sleeves AFL offers a wide selection of fiber protection sleeves to meet any application . The FP series is the industry standard for durable and lasting protection of single fiber splices in field installations, while the FP-04(T) and FP-05 provide the same durable protection for 8 and 12 fiber ribbon respectively . The FPS01 and FPS04 series are specially designed for optical components, where small packaging is a priority . These micro sleeves provide the known reliability of Fujikura sleeves in the smallest possible lengths . This easy and cost effective method is a great alternative to recoating . The FPS01 and FPS04 series offer a wide range of options to accommodate various coating sizes, and are manufactured in a variety of lengths . This gives great flexibility in designing optical modules .

Standard Sleeves: Dimensions & Applicable Fiber SLEEVES FOR SINGLE FIBERS UP TO 900 MICRONS DESCRIPTION SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK PACKAGING AFL NO. FP-60 60 mm 16 mm 3 .1 mm (max ). 1000 Box/100 Pack S015915 FP-40 40 mm 10 mm 3 .1 mm (max ). 1000 Box/100 Pack S015916 FP-03(34) 34 mm 10 mm 3 .1 mm (max ). 500 Box/10 Pack S000453

SLEEVES FOR TFOCA CABLE (DUAL 900 μm) DESCRIPTION FIBER COUNT SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK PACKAGING AFL NO. FP-D900 2 40 mm 10 mm 3 .6 mm (max .) 1000 Box & 50 Pack S014413

SLEEVES FOR RIBBON FIBERS DESCRIPTION FIBER COUNT SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK PACKAGING AFL NO. FP-04(T) Up to 8 fibers 40 mm 10 mm 4 .1 mm (max ). 250 Box/25 Pack S002105 FP-05 Up to 12 fibers 40 mm 10 mm 4 .5 mm (max .) 250 Box/5 Pack S003027 FP-05-28 Up to 12 fibers 28 mm 10 mm 4 5. mm (max .) 250 Box/25 Pack S014720 FPS04-30 Up to 4 fibers 30 mm 10 mm 2 .4 mm (max ). 1,000 Box/25 Pack S010848 FPS08-28 Up to 8 fibers 28 mm 10 mm 3 .4 mm (max .) 500 Box/25 Pack S013560 FPS24-40 Up to 24 fibers 40 mm 10 mm 8 mm (max .) 200 Box/5 Pack S013004

Specifications PARAMETER DESCRIPTION VALUE FP-60/40/03 series Outer tube Polyethylene FP-04(T) / FP-05 Inner tube Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate (Polyolefin Copolymer) FP-60/40/03 series Stainless steel Strength member FP-04(T) / FP-05 Quartz glass Operation condition (after shrink) -40 to 75°C, 0 to 95% RH (Non dew) Storage condition (before shrink) -40 to 60°C, Non dew

FP-03 series FPS01 series FP-40 series FP-60 series

FP-04(T)/05 FPS04-30 FPS08-28

Micro Sleeves: Dimensions & Applicable Fiber FPS01-400 SERIES FOR SINGLE FIBERS UP TO 400 MICRON FIBER DESCRIPTION SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK PACKAGING AFL NO. FPS01-400-12 12 mm 4 mm 1 5. mm 50 Pack S014088 FPS01-400-15 15 mm 4 mm 1 .5 mm 50 Pack S012668 FPS01-400-20 20 mm 8 mm 1 .5 mm 50 Pack S012672 FPS01-400-25 25 mm 10 mm 1 5. mm 50 Pack S012676 FPS01-400-34 34 mm 15 mm 1 .5 mm 50 Pack S012680 FPS01-400-40 40 mm 16 mm 1 5. mm 1,250 Box S011914

FPS01-900 SERIES FOR SINGLE FIBERS UP TO 900 MICRON FIBER DESCRIPTION SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK PACKAGING AFL NO. FPS01-900-15 15 mm 4 mm 2 .3 mm 50 Pack S012684 FPS01-900-20 20 mm 6 mm 2 .3 mm 50 Pack S012688 FPS01-900-25 25 mm 6 mm 2 .3 mm 50 Pack S011954 FPS01-900-34 34 mm 13 mm 2 .3 mm 50 Pack S012692 FPS01-900-45 45 mm 16 mm 2 .3 mm 50 Pack S012696

Specifications PARAMETER MODEL VALUE Outer tube FPS01 series / FPS04-30 Polyethylene Inner tube Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate (Polyolefin Copolymer) Strength member FPS01 series Stainless steel FPS04-30 / FPS08-28 Quartz glass Operation condition (after shrink) -40 to 75°C, 0 to 95% RH (Non dew) Storage condition (before shrink) -40 to 60°C, Non dew

Type Variations

FULL SCALE

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00051, Revision 5, 8.1.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 52 Cotton Swabs Thorough cleaning of a fusion splicer’s optical elements and alignment V-grooves is critical to ensure successful trouble-free splicing operations . CS-1 Cotton Swabs are especially useful for such cleaning operations . The small size of the CS-1 swabs ensures accessibility in tight places and will not leach out chemicals or lint and contaminate optical elements .

DESCRIPTION PART # CS-1 Cotton Swabs (pack of 25 each) S003719

Temporary Joining Tools The TJ-03 and TJ-24 provide a temporary fiber splice for fiber and cable connections to test equipment such as OTDRs . The TJ-03 uses a precision ceramic V-groove to align up to 12 fibers simultaneously and the TJ-24 aligns up to 24 fibers . The fibers are prepared for joining by using standard mass fusion fiber preparation tools (fiber holders, hot jacket stripper, and cleaver .) Using the TJ-03 or TJ-24 in conjunction with an OTDR equipped with an optical switch provides rapid one button optical tests of 12 or 24 fibers .

DESCRIPTION PART # TJ-03 Temporary Splice Kit: S012772 Features Fiber Holders (1 pair) FH-50-12, CT-30 Cleaver, HJS-02 Hot Jacket •• Precision ceramic V-groove alignment Stripper, ADC-09 AC Adapter for HJS-02, and the ACC-09 Power Cord TJ-03 Temporary Splice (without fiber preparation tools) S010456 •• Built-in magnifier and lamp to inspect TJ-24 Temporary Splice Kit: S013080 fiber placement inV-grooves Fiber Holders (1 pair) FH-24, CT-20 Cleaver, HJS-03 Hot Jacket Stripper, ADC-09 AC Adapter for HJS-03, Power Assist Lever for HJS-03, and the ACC-09 Power Cord TJ-24 Temporary Splice (without fiber preparation tools) S011666

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00005, Revision 2, 1.17.12 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 53 M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR Test, Troubleshoot and Document Single-mode and Multimode Fiber Networks

Features •• 30 dB dynamic range single-mode •• 16-hour battery life •• Remote display capable •• Touch and Test® intuitive user interface •• New faster processor •• Crisp bright display for indoor/outdoor viewing •• Integrated OPM standard; integrated VFL standard •• Inspection capable with DFS1 Digital FiberScope •• Rugged, hand-held, lightweight (<1 kg) •• Prepaid Calibration plans, Cal and Cal Plus

Test Modes •• Full Auto OTDR – Normal (point-to-point) fiber cable construction testing and fault location •• Expert OTDR – Full function OTDR for experienced users includes Auto and Auto-Once setup •• Real-Time OTDR – Fault location, splice verification •• Optical Power Meter – Measure optical power or fiber loss •• Visual Fault Locator – Red laser for fiber bend and break location

Languages supported •• English •• Italian •• Portuguese •• French •• Polish •• Turkish •• German •• Spanish •• Chinese (Simplified, Traditional) M210 OTDR with DFS1 Digital FiberScope

AFL’s M210 is the only inspection ready QUAD OTDR that combines OTDR, OPM and VFL capability with a proven, easy-to-use and easy-to-learn user interface. The M210 is the latest addition to the M200 family of OTDRs. Like other members of the M200 family, the M210 offers the intuitive Touch and Test user interface in a rugged, lightweight, easy-to-hold package ready for field use. The M210 features a more powerful processing engine, a higher resolution display and, for the first time in an OTDR of its size, an integrated Optical Power Meter. Touch and Test simplifies the M210 user experience, minimizes human errors and reduces training time by providing one-touch access to the Full-Auto, Expert and Real-Time OTDR test modes, OPM measurement mode as well as the Results Management and Job Creation menus. The M210 allows setting Pass/Fail thresholds to industry standard TIA/ISO or user-values and will automatically alert users of failing fibers. Touch and Test enables both experts and novices alike to complete jobs more accurately and in less time.

The M210 micro OTDR is available as a single-mode, multimode or single-mode/ multimode model in either a soft or hard case and as part of a QUAD Certification kit or QUAD Test and Inspection kit. M210 OTDRs are ideal for testing, analyzing and troubleshooting enterprise, LAN/WAN, campus and military single-mode and multimode (62.5 and 50 micron) fiber networks. All M210 models support IEC 61300-3-35 fiber end-face visual inspection practices using M210 QUAD Certification Kit (Tier 1 and Tier 2) a DFS1 Digital FiberScope. OTDR traces (.sor format), OPM measurement results and fiber end-face images can be saved together in a job. These results can be downloaded to a computer for analyzing and editing using the included companion, Test Results Manager, TRM® 2.0 Basic application software.

M210 QUAD Certification Kit in Hard Transit Case This kit is designed for integrated single-mode and multimode Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing with fiber end-face image capture. The M210 stores OTDR traces, loss readings and end-face images in a logical Job Structure for each fiber. Review results on the M210 and transfer to a PC for analysis and acceptance report documentation using included companion TRM® (Test Results Manager) software. In TRM, apply standards and

M210 QUAD Test and Inspection Kit (Tier 2) applications to loss readings to assure fibers meet the increasing bandwidth needs of fiber networks such as 10 GbE. This kit includes the QUAD M210, OLS4 LED/Laser Source, DFS1 FiberScope and cleaning accessories in a compact hard transit case. The hard transit case is a rugged, injection molded ABS case with a full length hinge, padlock loops, secure latches and O-ring seal to protect the contents from dust and water. The case is large enough to hold test, inspection and cleaning accessories and small enough to carry on an airplane. See accessories page.

M210 QUAD Test and Inspection Kit in Hard Transit Case This kit is designed for performing Tier 2 OTDR testing and troubleshooting and end-face inspection. This kit includes the QUAD M210, DFS1 FiberScope and cleaning accessories in a compact rugged hard transit case. See accessories page. M210 OTDR in Hard Transit Case M210 OTDR in Hard Transit Case Available in SM, MM or QUAD OTDR models. The hard transit case is large enough for optional test, inspection and cleaning accessories. See accessories page.

M210 OTDR in Soft Case Available in SM, MM or QUAD OTDR models. The soft case has a shoulder strap and a large pocket to simplify carrying equipment in the field. The pocket is large enough to accommodate cleaning and test accessories. See accessories page

M210 OTDR in Soft Case

© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 55 M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR Test Results Manager Software Test, Inspection and Cleaning Accessories Using TRM® (Test Results Manager), the companion PC software included with all M210 OTDRs, users can create acceptance reports conforming to industry guidelines. TRM allows users to create customized cover pages with their company logos and generate results pages showing dual wavelength traces and event tables, end-face image, Event Map and loss data for each fiber. DFS1 FiberScope Inspection Kit FCP2-00-0900 Basic Cleaning Kit

SC, ST, FC LC/MU D-LC Ultra 2.5 Mini-100 SC, ST, FC, LC/MU One-Click Cleaner Series

Accessories Ordering Information DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC inspection kit DFS1-00-04XU DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC inspection kit DFS1-00-04XA DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit without adapters DFS1-00-04XN Fiber Ring, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-M5-150-x1-x2a Fiber Ring, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-L5-150-x1-x2a Fiber Ring, 62.5/125 mm multimode, 150 m FR1-M6-150-x1-x2a Fiber Ring, single-mode, 150 m FR1-SM-150-y1-y2 a Wet Cleaning kit for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors 8500-20-0900 Dry Cleaning kit 8500-20-0901 Basic Cleaning kit with carry case (includes One-Clicks, FCP2-00-0900 FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB) Basic Cleaning kit with MPO Cleaners and carry case FCP2-00-0901 (includes One-Clicks, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB, MPO/MTP Cleaner) TRM® (Test Results Manager) Certification report page One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans) 8500-05-0001MZ One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans) 8500-05-0002MZ One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans) 8500-05-0005MZ One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans) 8500-05-0006MZ One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) 8500-05-0007MZ One-Click Ultra Cleaner D-LC (Duplex LC, 500 cleans x 2) 8500-05-0008MZ

Note: a. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2, y1, y2).

© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 56 M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR Specificationsa OTDR MULTIMODE SINGLE-MODE Emitter Type Laser Laser Safety Class Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11; IEC 60825-1:2007-03 Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11; IEC 60825-1:2007-03 Center Wavelengths 850/1300 nm 1310/1550 nm Wavelength Tolerance ±20/±30 nm ±20/±30 nm Dynamic Range (SNR = 1)b 26 dB 30 dB Event Dead Zonec 1.5 m 1.5 m Attenuation Dead Zoned 9 m 9 m Pulse Widths 10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1 µs, 3 µsm 10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1, 3, 10 µs Range Settings 250 m to 32 km 250 m to 208 km Sampling Points Up to 16,000 Up to 16,000 Minimum Data Point Spacinge 0.25 m 0.25 m Group Index of Refraction (GIR) 1.4000 to 1.6000 1.4000 to 1.6000 Distance Uncertainty/Accuracyf ±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing) ±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing) Linearity g ±0.05 dB/dB ±0.05 dB/dB Loss Threshold 0.02 dB 0.02 dB Loss Resolution 0.01 dB 0.01 dB Reflectance Resolution 0.01 dB 0.01 dB Reflectance Accuracy h ±2 dB ±2 dB Real Time Refresh Rate 1 Hz j 1 Hz k Units m, km, ft, kft, mi OTDR Modes Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time Trace File Format Bellcore GR-196 Version 1.1 Trace File Storage Medium Internal and USB Trace File Storage Capacity >1000 internal, 1000s on USB Trace File Transfer to PC USB

Notes: a. All specifications alidv at 23°C ±2°C (73.4°F ±3.6°F) unless otherwise specified. b. Longest Range and Pulse Width, 3 minutes Averaging Time, Filter on. c. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of a reflective spike caused by a -40 dB (multimode) or -45 dB (single-mode) event using 10 ns pulse width. d. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 dB of backscatter. e. Range <8 km. f. Does not include GIR uncertainty. g. Typical. h. For a non-saturated event. j. 16 km Range, Filter off. k. 32 km Range, Filter off. m. 3 µs @ 1300 nm

© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 57 M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR Specificationsa OPM (STANDARD) Calibrated Wavelengths 850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625, 1650 nm (displays up to 3 simultaneously) Detector Type InGaAs 2mm Display Rangeb +6 to -70 dBm Accuracy @ -10 dBm ±0.25 dB Resolution 0.01 dB Measurement Units dB, dBm, mW Wavelength ID c Yes Set Reference Yes Data Storage Yes Tone Detectiond 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz VFL (STANDARD) Emitter Type Laser Safety Class Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11; IEC 825-1:1993, 60825-1:2007-03 Wavelength 635 nm ±20 nm Output Power (nominal) 0.8 mW GENERAL Display Type 3.5-inch transflective color, high contrast, high reflectivity (20%) for optimum indoor/outdoor viewing , QVGA with touchscreen Size (in boot) 23 x 11 x 7 cm (8.8 x 4.3 x 2.8 in) Weight <1.4 kg (3 lb) Power Removable Li-ion or AC/DC power adapter (input 100-240 V, ~1.5 A 47-63 Hz) output 18 V DC/3.6 A (can test while charging, can operate on AC with battery removed) Battery Lifee 16 hours Recharge Timef 4 hours Auto Shut Off 0-60 minutes Connectivity USB host/full speed 1.1 Operating Temperature -10°C to +50°C Storage Temperature -20°C to +60°C Relative Humidity 0 to 95 % RH (non-condensing) DFS1 DIGITAL FIBERSCOPE SUPPORT Field of View 400 x 300 µm Optical Resolution 4 µm Detection Capability 2 µm

Notes: a. All specifications alidv at 23°C ±2°C (73.4°F ±3.6°F) unless otherwise specified. b. Measurement Range: +3 to -65 dBm for 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -60 dBm for 850 nm c. Wavelength ID Range: +3 to -50 dBm for 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -40 dBm for 850 nm d. Tone Detect Range: +3 to -50 dBm 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -40 dBm for 850 nm e. Typical with new battery, per GR-196-Core Issue 2. f. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating.

WAVELENGTHS (nm) DYNAMIC OTDR PORT OPM PORT AFL BASE All M210 OTDRs include a USB flash 850 1300 1310 1550 RANGE (dB) ADAPTERS ADAPTERS MODEL NO. drive, an AC adapter, UCI switchable 30/30 SC, FC SC, 2.5 mm Universal M210-20 adapters for OTDR and OPM ports, trace 26/26 SC, ST SC, 2.5 mm Universal M210-22 analysis and documentation software and 26/26/30/30 SC, FC, ST SC, 2.5 mm Universal M210-25 a quick reference guide.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. When ordering, select options as follows: M210 QUAD Certification Kit (Tier 1 and 2): M210 QUAD, OLS4, DFS1* in hard case M210-25K-01-HC2 Optical Configuration (NN), (U) for UPC M210 QUAD Test and Inspection Kit (Tier 2): M210 QUAD, DFS1* in hard case M210-25K-01-HC1 connection and Language (LL). Add (HC) * When ordering, specify DFS1 model. The DFS1 FiberScope kit is available as either PC/UPC inspection kit only if ordering the hard case option. (DFS1-00-04XU model) or APC inspection kit (DFS1-004XA model). Example: M210-25U-01-HC -> This M210 OTDR, SM (1310/1550), OPM, VFL in hard case M210-20U-01-HC model number indicates M210 QUAD M210 OTDR, MM (850/1300) OPM, VFL in hard case M210-22U-01-HC with the English/European language pack M210 OTDR, QUAD (850/1300/1310/1550), OPM, VFL in hard case M210-25U-01-HC M210 OTDR, SM (1310/1550) OPM, VFL in soft case M210-20U-01 in the optional hard case. M210 OTDR, MM (850/1300) OPM, VFL in soft case M210-22U-01 M210 OTDR, QUAD (850/1300/1310/1550), OPM, VFL in soft case M210-25U-01

M210 NN U LLL HC Hard Case option (HC) Optical Configuration (NN) (Select (HC) only if ordering hard case option) 20 = 1310/1550 nm SM 22 = 850/1300 nm MM Quick Reference Guide Language (LLL)* 25 = 850/1300 nm MM and 1310/1550 nm SM ENG = English FRA = French POR = Portuguese OTDR port ferrule (U = UPC) CHS = Chinese, Simplified ITA = Italian SPA = Spanish CHT = Chinese, Traditional POL = Polish TUR = Turkish DEU = German *Specify Language for OTDR Quick Reference Guide Calibration Plans

M210 OTDR AND/OR KIT 2 YR CAL PLAN 2 YR CAL PLUS PLAN Prepaid Cal plans offer two annual MODEL AFL NO. AFL NO. calibrations at a discounted price, a M210-25K-01-HC1 CAL2-00-M210-25K-HC1 CAL2-01-M210-25K-HC1 convenient calibration expiration email M210-25K-01-HC2 CAL2-00-M210-25K-HC2 CAL2-01-M210-25K-HC2 service, express calibration services and M210-20U-01-HC CAL2-00-M210-20 CAL2-01-M210-20 M210-22U-01-HC CAL2-00-M210-22 CAL2-01-M210-22 access to our product knowledge base. M210-25U-01-HC CAL2-00-M210-25 CAL2-01-M210-25 Cal Plus plans offer the same services as M210-20U-01 CAL2-00-M210-20 CAL2-01-M210-20 the Cal plans with the addition of a two M210-22U-01 CAL2-00-M210-22 CAL2-01-M210-22 year extended warranty (three years total M210-25U-01 CAL2-00-M210-25 CAL2-01-M210-25 coverage).

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

Hand-held Multifunction OTDR and Loss Test Set

Features •• Patented in- or out-of-service OTDR testing from a single port •• Icon-based LinkMap™ display with pass/fail for easy network analysis •• ServiceSafe® live PON detection and OTDR test without service disruption •• Wave ID reduces insertion loss test time and eliminates setup errors •• 34/32 dB dynamic range at 1310/1550 nm •• Best-in-class 0.8/3.5 m event/attenuation dead zones •• Rugged, hand-held, lightweight (<1 kg) •• High-contrast, backlit display: Easily viewed, even in direct sunlight •• Industry-leading battery life: >12 hours continuous operation •• Instant On: Ready to test in <5 seconds

Applications •• Cost-effective point-to-point and FTTH PON testing •• Troubleshoot in-service FTTH networks, including live PON power measurements plus PON OTDR testing at 1625 nm. •• Complete multi-wavelength insertion loss tests faster and eliminate setup errors using Wave ID source and power meter. •• Generate fiber-identifying tones and stable CW signals using integrated optical source. •• Trace fibers or locate faults using the Visual Fault Locator (VFL).

The AFL OFL280-10x FlexTester family offers an unmatched combination of optical fiber test functions, ease-of-use, portability, and value. All OFL280 FlexTester models include an integrated single-mode 1310/1550 nm OTDR with PON-optimized and standard test modes, optical power meter, 1310/1550 nm laser source, and visual fault locator. With new LinkMap, pass/fail analysis, macro-bend and splitter detection, launch quality check, plus AFL’s unique ServiceSafe and Wave ID features, OFL280 FlexTesters enable even novice users to troubleshoot like pros. The OFL280 FlexTester family offers four models to best suit your application needs: •• OFL280-103: Verify both in-service and out-of-service FTTx networks from a single port. Includes 1310/1550/1625 nm live PON OTDR with integrated PON Power Meter. •• OFL280-102: Most complete out-of-service FTTx PON testing at all PON wavelengths (1310/1490/1550 nm). •• OFL280-100: Cost-effective 1310/1550 nm OTDR for out-of-service installation testing or troubleshooting both FTTx PON and point- to-point fiber optic networks. Over 1000 OTDR test results (Telcordia SR-4731 .SOR file format) may be saved in the OFL280’s internal memory. Stored OTDR and OPM results may be transferred to PC via wireless Bluetooth® or USB cable. Windows® compatible TRM 2.0® Test Results Manager software is included for OTDR and OPM results viewing, analysis, and professional report generation.

New LinkMap™ Simplifies Network Troubleshooting Using the OFL280’s new LinkMap capability, even novice users can troubleshoot optical networks like a pro! LinkMap interprets the tested network and presents an icon-based view of network elements clearly identifying fiber start, end, connectors, splices, splitters, and macro-bends. Loss and reflectance of network elements is compared to user- settable pass/fail thresholds and displayed with clear pass/fail indications. Users can instantly toggle between LinkMap and Trace view at the press of a button. With launch quality check, integrated macro-bend and splitter event detection, OFL280 OTDRs offer even greater ease-of-use. OFL280s also provide a Link Summary showing end-to-end link length, loss, loss/distance and ORL.

ServiceSafe® Testing on Live PONs In FTTx PONs, troubleshooting a faulty fiber connection from one out-of-service subscriber’s location using a 1310/1550 nm OTDR could disrupt service to active subscribers. AFL’s ServiceSafe feature alerts the OTDR user to the presence of live traffic and prevents the initiation of service-disrupting 1310/1550 nm OTDR tests. The OFL280-103 additionally measures downstream power levels at 1490 and/or 1550 nm, and allows the user to initiate an OTDR test using the non-disruptive 1625 nm OTDR wavelength. To eliminate unnecessary connector wear, 1625 nm live PON OTDR testing and PON power measurements are performed through the same optical port used for 1310/1550 OTDR testing (US patent 8,411,259).

Fast, error-free Loss Tests using Wave ID OFL280s integrate an Optical Laser Source (OLS) and Optical Power Meter (OPM) supporting AFL’s unique Wave ID capability. With Wave ID, the OPM automatically synchronizes to a single or multi-wavelength Wave ID optical signal sent by another OFL280, FLX380, or AFL hand-held OLS. The OPM automatically measures power and loss at each wavelength, saving significant test time and eliminating setup errors. The integrated OLS and OPM also generate and detect fiber-identifying tones to enable positive fiber identification before disconnecting fibers during maintenance.

Create Professional Test Reports using TRM® 2.0 Stored OTDR and/or OPM results may be uploaded to a PC via USB or Bluetooth®. Uploaded results may be viewed and analyzed using TRM 2.0 Test Results Manager software included with each OFL280 FlexTester. The TRM report generation wizard enables users to easily generate professional, custom acceptance test reports conforming to industry guidelines.

OFL280 Features and Applications by Model OFL280 MODELS FEATURES -100 -102 -103 Compatible with all AFL optical power meters and laser sources, including tone and Wave ID features Compatible with AFL optical fiber identifiers (OFI) Integrated high-power optical power meter Integrated visual fault locator (red laser) 1310 nm – OTDR, PON OTDR, laser source (CW, wave ID, tone) 1550 nm – OTDR, PON OTDR, laser source (CW, wave ID, tone) 1490 nm – OTDR, PON OTDR, laser source (CW, wave ID, tone) 1625 nm – FTTx live fiber OTDR with filtered detector for in-service PON testing 1490/1550 nm – FTTx PON Power Meter (Detects and measures downstream PON power levels)

OFL280 MODELS FIBER TESTING APPLICATIONS -100 -102 -103 Point-to-point cable construction and troubleshooting. Verify end-to-end length, loss, and ORL. Verify splice and connector loss and reflectance. Locate sources of excess loss and/or reflections, including macro-bends. FTTx PON construction. Test to or through splitters. Verify end-to-end length, loss and ORL. Verify splitter, splice and connector loss and a reflectance. Locate sources of excess loss and/or reflections, including macro-bends. FTTx customer fiber troubleshooting - dark fibers (hard faults). Locate cable cuts, open splices, and bad connections. FTTx in-service (Live PON) troubleshooting. Automatically detect live PONs. Prevent service-disrupting 1310/1550 nm OTDR tests on live PONs. Locate macro- bends, poor splices or high-loss connections without disrupting service to active PON subscribers. FTTx service turn-up (commissioning). Verify PON power levels at the ONT (subscriber) location. Locate faults in the distribution or drop cables, or between splitters in PONs built using distributed splitter architecture, all without disrupting service to active PON subscribers. Note: a. Adds ability to perform OTDR and loss tests at 1490 nm. However, testing at 1310 and 1550 nm is recommended and generally is all that is needed to test or fault-locate inactive (dark) FTTx PONs during construction.

OFL280-100 and -102 models OFL280-103 model

Visual Fault Locator Visual Fault Locator OFL280 OTDR OFL280 OTDR

Optical Power Meter Optical Power Meter

Dark Fiber OTDR Dark Fiber OTDR Laser Source Laser Source Live Fiber OTDR PON Power Meter

OFL280 FlexTester Kit Configurations OFL280 FlexTesters are available in the following kit configurations: •• OFL280 FlexTester Soft Carry Case Kits •• OFL280 FlexTester PRO/PRO2 Kits •• OFL280 FlexTester Complete/Complete2 Kits All FlexTester kits include a rechargeable, replaceable Li-Ion battery pack, AC charger with country-specific power cord, tool-free interchangeable connector adapters with dust caps, TRM® 2.0 Test Results Manager software, USB cable, and a quick reference guide.

OFL280 FlexTester PRO/PRO2 Test and Inspection Kit

OFL280 FlexTester PRO Test kit FlexTester PRO & PRO2 Kits combine a user-selected OFL280 with either the FOCIS PRO or FOCIS Flex Fiber Optic Connector Inspection System, UPC or APC connector inspection adapter tips, cleaning supplies, and a rugged, waterproof hard carry case with room for additional fiber rings and cleaning supplies. FOCIS PRO and FOCIS Flex enable inspection of ferrule ends of patch cord connectors and end-faces of connectors mounted inside bulkhead adapters. PRO/PRO2 Kits include LinkMap™ plus TRM 2.0 Advanced. PRO Kits include FOCIS PRO comprising the DFS1 Digital FiberScope and hand-held DFD1 Touchscreen Tablet. FOCIS PRO includes image capture, save, AFL’s unique image- pairing capability, plus IEC and user-adjustable pass/fail analysis. With FOCIS PRO’s dedicated Touchscreen Tablet, the OFL280 is available for OTDR and optical loss testing. PRO2 Kits include a 150 m fiber ring plus FOCIS Flex, a hand-held and auto-focusing inspection probe with integrated display, rechargeable battery, internal storage and FlexTester PRO2 & Complete2 include FOCIS Flex Inspection pass/fail analysis. Its Bluetooth communications enable FOCIS Flex to instantly transfer captured images and pass/fail results to a paired FlexTester for display and/or storage.

OFL280 Complete/Complete2 Installation & Maintenance Kit Select a FlexTester Complete or Complete2 Kit to add an Optical Fiber Identifier for an even more complete network installation and maintenance test solution. FlexTester CMP/CMP2 Kits include LinkMap with Pass/Fail plus TRM 2.0 Advanced. Complete Kits combine an OFI-200D Optical Fiber Identifier with a user-selected OFL280, 150 m single-mode fiber ring (launch cable), FOCIS PRO with UPC or APC adapter tips, two One-Click Cleaners, standard FlexTester accessories, hard carry case. OFL280 FlexTester Soft Case Kit Complete2 Kits combine a user-selected OFL280 and choice of Optical Fiber Identifier with 150 m fiber ring, FOCIS Flex, UPC or APC adapter tips, cleaning supplies, standard FlexTester accessories, and rugged, waterproof, hard carry case.

OFL280 FlexTester Soft Carry Case Kit OFL280 FlexTester Soft Carry Case kits include the user-selected OFL280, standard accessories plus a One-Click Cleaner, packaged in a convenient soft carry case.

Specifications a

OTDR PON POWER METER FOR SINGLE-MODE ONLY Emitter Type Laser Calibrated Wavelengths 1490, 1550 nm Safety Class Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, Detector Type Filtered InGaAs IEC 60825-1: 2007-03 Isolation > 40 dB Fiber Type Single-mode Measurement Range +23 to – 50 dBm Available Wavelengths 1310/1490/1550/1625 nm Accuracy d ±0.5 dB Wavelength Tolerance ±20/±20/±20/±10 nm Resolution 0.01 dB Dynamic Range (SNR=1) 34/32/32/30 dB Measurement Units dBm or Watts (nW, µW, mW) b Event Dead Zone 0.8 m OPTICAL POWER METER Attenuation Dead Zone c 3.5 m Calibrated Wavelengths 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625, 1650 nm Pulse Widths 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1, 3, 10 µs Detector Type InGaAs Range Settings 250 m to 240 km Measurement Range +23 to -50 dBm Data Points Up to 30,000 Tone Detect Range +3 to -35 dBm Data Point Spacing 5.0 cm (range <1.5 km), Wavelength ID Range +3 to -35 dBm Range/30,000 (range >1.5 km) Accuracy e ±0.25 dB Group Index of Refraction (GIR) 1.4000 to 1.7000 Resolution 0.01 dB Distance Uncertainty (m) ±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing) Measurement Units dB, dBm or Watts (nW, µW, mW) Linearity ±0.05 dB/dB VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR Trace File Format .SOR per Telcordia SR-4731 Issue 2 Emitter Type Visible red laser Trace File Storage Medium 4GB internal memory (>1000 traces) Safety Class Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, Data Transfer to PC USB cable IEC 60825-1: 2007-03 PON OTDR Modes Test to splitter or through splitter Wavelength 650 ±20 nm Standard OTDR Modes Full Auto, Expert, Real Time Output Power (nominal) 0.8 mW into single-mode fiber LASER SOURCE Modes CW, 2 Hz flashing Emitter Type Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, GENERAL IEC 60825-1: 2007-03 Size (in boot) 20.1 x 13.0 x 5.3. cm (7.9 x 5.1 x 2.1 in) Fiber Type Single-mode Weight 0.8 kg (1.8 lb) Available Wavelengths 1310, 1490, 1550 nm Operational Temperature -10 °C to +50 °C, 0 to 95 % RH (non-condensing) Wavelength Tolerance ±20 nm Storage Temperature -20 °C to +60 °C, 0 to 95 % RH (non-condensing) Spectral Width (FWHM) 5 nm (maximum) Power Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC adapter Internal Modulation 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, CW Battery Life 12 hours, backlight ON, continuous operation Wavelength ID (one, two, or Compatible with AFL Optical Power Meters and three wavelengths) Light Sources Display LCD, 320 x 240, 3.5 inch (89 mm), color, high-contrast transflective with backlight Output Power Stability 0.25 dB and AR coating Output Power -1 dBm (1310, 1550 nm) ±1.5 dB; +3 dBm (1490 nm ) ±1.5 dB

Notes: a. All specifications alidv at 25 °C unless otherwise specified. b. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of a reflective spike caused by a -45 dB event using 5 ns pulse width. c. Typical distance from the location of a -45 dB reflective event to the point where the trace falls and stays within 0.5 dB of backscatter, using a 5 ns pulse width. d. At calibration wavelengths and power levels of approximately -5 dBm for 1550 nm and -10 dBm for 1490 nm. e. At 1310/1550 nm wavelengths with CW power level of approximately -10 dBm.

Ordering Information

ORDER ENTRY FORMAT INCLUDING OPTIONS KIT CONFIGURATION OFL280-1xx[C]-[LNG]-[AC] OFL280-1xx Basic Kit OFL280-1xx[C]-LM-[LNG]-[AC] OFL280-1xx Basic Kit with LinkMap™ Upgrade with Pass/Fail plus TRM® 2.0 Advanced OFL280-1XX-LM-[LNG] LinkMap Upgrade with Pass/Fail plus TRM 2.0 Advanced (for previously shipped OFL280) OFL280-1xx[C]-PRO-[LNG]-[AC] OFL280-1xx PRO Kit (with FOCIS PRO and cleaning supplies) OFL280-1xx[C]-PRO2-[LNG]-[AC]-[TIP]-[FR] OFL280-1xx PRO2 Kit (with FOCIS Flex, fiber ring, cleaning supplies) OFL280-1xx[C]-CMP-[LNG]-[AC]-[FR] OFL280-1xx Complete Kit (with FOCIS PRO, OFI-200D, fiber ring, cleaning supplies) OFL280-1xx[C]-CMP2-[LNG]-[AC]-[TIP]-[FR]-[OFI] OFL280-1xx Complete2 Kit (with FOCIS Flex, OFI choice, fiber ring, cleaning supplies)

Select OFL280 Options: Select OFL280 PRO, PRO2, CMP, CMP2 Kit Options:

[C] OTDR/Source Connector Type [FR] 150 m SMF Fiber Ring [FR] 150 m SMF Fiber Ring U UPC Blank N/A in PRO & CMP kits ASC/FC FR1-SM-150-ASC-FC A APC SC/SC FR1-SM-150-SC-SC ASC/ST FR1-SM-150-ASC-ST SC/FC FR1-SM-150-SC-FC ASC/ASC FR1-SM-150-ASC-ASC SC/LC FR1-SM-150-SC-LC ASC/AFC FR1-SM-150-ASC-AFC [LNG] Language Option [LNG] Language Option SC/ST FR1-SM-150-SC-ST ASC/ALC FR1-SM-150-ASC-ALC ENG English JPN Japanese SC/ASC FR1-SM-150-SC-ASC ALC/ALC FR1-SM-150-ALC-ALC CHS Simplified Chinese KOR Korean SC/AFC FR1-SM-150-SC-AFC FC/FC FR1-SM-150-FC-FC CHT Traditional Chinese POL Polish SC/ALC FR1-SM-150-SC-ALC FC/ST FR1-SM-150-SC-ST DEU German POR Portuguese LC/LC FR1-SM-150-LC-LC FC/LC FR1-SM-150-FC-LC FRA French SPA Spanish LC/ASC FR1-SM-150-LC-ASC FC/AFC FR1-SM-150-FC-AFC ITA Italian TUR Turkish LC/ALC FR1-SM-150-LC-ALC AFC/AFC FR1-SM-150-AFC-AFC

[AC] Destination AC Plugs [TIP] FOCIS Flex Tips & Cleaning (PRO2 and CMP2 kits only) Country FlexTester FOCIS PRO FOCIS Flex Blank Option not available in standard soft case, PRO and CMP kits US USA 3-wire, 115V, Type K US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, US SC SC-UPC bulkhead tip, 2.5 mm UPC ferrule tip, 2.5 mm cleaning EU European Union 3-wire, 250V, Type B US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, EU FC FC-UPC bulkhead tip, 2.5 mm UPC ferrule tip, 2.5 mm cleaning UK United Kingdom 3-wire, 250V, Type D US, EU, UK, SAA 3-pin, UK LC LC-UPC bulkhead tip, 1.25 mm UPC ferrule tip, 1.25 mm cleaning CN China, Australia 3-wire, 250V, Type C US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, SAA ASC SC-APC bulkhead tip, 2.5 mm APC ferrule tip, 2.5 mm cleaning DK Denmark 3-wire, 250V, Type E US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, EU AFC FC-APC bulkhead tip, 2.5 mm APC ferrule tip, 2.5 mm cleaning JP Japan 3-wire, 125V, Type M US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, US ALC LC-APC bulkhead tip, 1.25 mm APC ferrule tip, 1.25 mm cleaning CH Switzerland 3-wire, 250V, Type L US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, EU IT Italy 3-wire, 250V, Type I US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, EU IL Israel 3-wire, 250V, Type H US, EU, UK, SAA Select (US, [OFI] Optical Fiber Identifier Option Description (CMP2 kit only) EU, UK, SAA) Blank Option only available in CMP2 kit IN India 3-wire, 250V, Type G US, EU, UK, SAA Select (US, 200D OFI-200D - Jacketed & buffered fiber; 2 kHz only EU, UK, SAA) 400 OFI-400 - Jacketed & buffered fiber; power & tone display 400C OFI-400C - Jacketed fiber only OFI-400 400HP OFI-400HP - High-power OFI-400 FTTx OFI-FTTx - Active ONT Detector (FTTx PON systems)

FIBER SYS YES TEM NO S International Sales and Service Contact Information

ISO9001 CERTIFIED Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

Test, Troubleshoot and Report Single-mode and Multimode Fiber Networks

Features •• TruEvent™ advanced event analysis •• Inspection capable with DFS1 Digital FiberScope •• Live fiber detection prevents damage to network equipment •• Up to 13 hours battery life •• Dynamic range up to 44 dB for long range testing •• Automatic Pass/Fail analysis •• Large 6.5 inch full color touchscreen display •• Integrated Optical Power Meter (OPM) and Visual Fault Locator (VFL) •• Front Panel and First Connector Check features ensures M710 Compact QUAD OTDR accurate measurements

Applications •• Test and certify campus & central office networks and Distributed Antenna Systems (DAS) fiber infrastructure •• Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing and certification of SM and MM networks •• Document and create standards compliant acceptance reports with TRM® 2.0, companion PC software •• Inspection of fiber end-faces using DFS1 Digital FiberScope •• Real-Time OTDR - fault location and splice verification

M710 OTDR with DFS1 Digital FiberScope

The M710 OTDR from AFL combines ease of use (Touch and Test™) and high performance in a rugged, large display package. With single- mode dynamic ranges up to 44 dB and a MM/SM QUAD option, the M710 OTDR is ideal for testing and troubleshooting LAN/WAN, metro and long haul networks. Industry leading dead zones enhance the user’s ability to locate and measure events. The M710 models utilize AFL’s industry leading TruEvent technology to provide a new level of accuracy and reliability in event analysis. Touch and Test simplifies the M710 user experience, minimizes human errors and reduces training time by providing one-touch access to all OTDR test modes, OPM testing, Results Management and Job Creation menus. The M710 allows setting Pass/Fail thresholds to industry standard TIA/ISO values or user defined criteria and will automatically alert users of failing fibers. Touch and Test enables any technician to complete jobs more accurately and in less time, making it the ideal field test tool. *M710 series languages supported: English, Chinese, French, German, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish. Please specify language when ordering.

Specifications a

OTDR MODEL SINGLE-MODE OTDR OPTIONS QUAD OTDR OPTION M710-40 M710-20 M710-21 M710-24 Emitter Type Laser Safety Class Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, IEC 60825-1: 2007-03 Center Wavelengths 1310/1550 nm 1310/1550 nm 1310/1550/1625 nm 850/1300/1310/1550 nm Wavelength Tolerance ±25/25 nm ±25/25 nm ±25/25/10 nm ±25/25/25/25 nm Dynamic Range (SNR = 1) b 44/42 dB 41/39 dB 41/39/39 dB 25/24/40/38 dB c Event Dead Zone 0.8 m d 0.8 m d 0.8 m d 0.8 m d Attenuation Dead Zone 4 m e 4 m e 4 m e 4 m e Pulse Widths 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns; MM 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns; 1, 3, 10, 20 µs 1 µs SM 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns; 1, 3, 10, 20 µs

Range Settings 250 m to 256 km MM 250 m to 64 km SM 250 m to 256 km Sampling Points Max. 64,000 points Minimum Data Point Spacing 0.125 m Group Index of Refraction (GIR) 1.4000 to 1.6000 Distance Uncertainty (m) f ±(1 + 0.0005 % x distance + data point spacing) Linearity g ±0.03 dB/dB ±0.05 dB/dB ±0.05 dB/dB ±0.05 dB/dB Loss Threshold 0.05 dB Loss Resolution 0.01 dB Reflectance Accuracy h ±2 dB Trace File Format SR-4731 (GR-196-CORE Appendix A & B and SR-4731) Trace File Storage Media Internal flash memory USB flash drive (2 USB host ports) Downloadable from OTDR directly to PC Trace File Storage Capacity Internal 1000 fibers Data Transfer to PC USB OTDR Modes Full Auto, Real Time, Expert Tool Free Adapters SC/ST/FC/LC

Notes: a. All specifications alidv at 23°C ±2°C (73.4°F ±3.6°F) unless otherwise specified. b. Longest Range and Pulse Width, 3 minutes Averaging Time, Filter on, Typical. c. 62.5 µm fiber for multimode test. d. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of an unsaturated event with reflection <-45 dB for SM and <-40 dB for MM using a 5 ns pulse width. e. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 dB of backscatter caused by an unsaturated event with reflection <-45 dB for SM and <-40 dB for MM using a 5 ns pulse width. f. Does not include GIR uncertainty. g. Typical. h. For a non-saturated event.

Specificationsa

POWER METER SINGLE-MODE OTDR OPTIONS QUAD OTDR OPTIONS M710-40 M710-20 M710-21 M710-24 Calibrated Wavelengths 850, 980, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm (displays up to 3 simultaneously) 850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm (displays up to 3 simultaneously) Detector Type Filtered InGaAs detector InGaAs 2 mm Measurement Range (dBm) +26 to -50 dBm +3 to -70 dBm Accuracy b ±0.25 Measurement Units dB, dBm, mW Wavelength ID c Yes Set Reference Yes Data Storage Yes Tone Detection 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz

VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR ALL M710 OTDR MODELS Emitter Type Laser Safety Class Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, IEC 60825-1: 2007-03 Wavelength 635 ±20 nm Output Power (nominal) 0.8 mW

GENERAL ALL M710 OTDR MODELS Display 16.51 cm (6.5 in), color, transflective (indoor/outdoor) touch screen display Anti-Reflective (AR) Coating Yes Size 190.5 x 269.2 x 69.8 mm (7.5 x 10.6 x 2.75 in) Weight 2.36 kg ( 5.22 lb) Operating Temperature -10°C to+50°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing) Storage Temperature -20°C to+60°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing) Power Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter Battery Life d, f 13 hours continuous OTDR testing Recharge Time e, f 4 hours

Notes: a. All specifications alidv at 25°C unless otherwise specified. b. Accuracy measured at -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards. c. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with AFL’s Wave ID Series Light Sources. d. Typical, per GR-196-CORE issue 2, depending on display brightness. e. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. f. External battery charger available.

Ordering Information The M710 OTDRs work with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope (the DFS1 includes a software update for the OTDR). The M710 models come with an integrated Visual Fault Locator (VFL, 650 nm), Optical Power Meter (OPM), and a large transflective touch screen display. Each model includes an OTDR, USB Flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and OPM loss reporting, AC adapter a, switchable test port adapters, and cleaning accessories in a soft carry case. When placing an order, select options as follows: Optical Configuration (NN), OTDR port ferrule (F), and Language (LL). Example: The model number M710-21U indicates M710 SM with UPC OTDR port ferrule, and English language option. Language option will be selected during ordering process.

M710 NN F LL

Optical Configuration (NN)

24 = QUAD LR (long range): OTDR Port Ferrule (F) Language (LL) c 850/1300 nm MM and 1310/1550 nm SM U = UPC 01 = English, French, German, 21 = 1310/1550/1625 nm SM A = APC b Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish 20 = 1310/1550 nm SM 08 = English, Traditional and Simplified Chinese 40 = 1310/1550 nm SM

Accessories Custom kits may be created by ordering an M710 OTDR model, a pre-configured accessories kit (M700 - H1) and accessories from the table below. The hard carry case has room for up to 6 Fiber Rings, test leads/jumpers, the DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit, OLS2-Dual or OLS4 optical light source, and cleaning accessories (items must be ordered separately).

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Pre-configured Accessories Kit M700 - H1 Includes hard case with One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC (2.5 mm), One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (1.25 mm), and CleanConnect 500 Hard carry case,M7x0/C SERIES,W/FOAM 1400-01-0090PZ DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit DFS1-00-04XU DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit DFS1-00-04XA DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters DFS1-00-04XN OLS2-Dual laser light source with Wave ID, 1310/1550 nm OLS2-Dual OLS4 integrated LED and laser light source with Wave ID, 850/1300/1310/1550 nm OLS4 Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-M5-150-x1-x2 d Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-L5-150-x1-x2 d Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, 62.5/125 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-M6-150-x1-x2 d Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, single-mode, 150 m FR1-SM-150-x1-x2 d Zippered Jumper Carry Case 1400-01-0086PZ All types of fiber optic cleaning supplies are available. Visit www.AFLglobal.com/Cleaning or call factory for details.

Notes: a. Specify power cord type (country) when ordering an OTDR. One power cord is included with each AC adapter at no charge. b. Available on the SM port for -20, -21, -24 models only. c. When ordering OTDR, indicate language preference for the OTDR Quick Reference Guide. d. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2).

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

DFS1 Digital FiberScope The DFS1 Digital FiberScope supports magnified video inspection of optical fiber connector end-faces during fiber optic cable and connector installation and maintenance. The ergonomically designed hand-held unit illuminates fiber end-faces and delivers magnified images via USB port to AFL’s M-series OTDRs, C-series OTDRs and Certification Testers. FiberScope software displays, labels and stores captured images as part of connector installation and/or maintenance records. DFS1 Digital FiberScope A large adjustment knob permits easy focusing using real-time view. Once focused, a conveniently located trigger button signals the attached display device to capture the image for analysis and archiving. The scope’s ergonomic shape and control locations support comfortable, single-handed operation. The DFS1 is powered through the USB port, eliminating the need Clean connector for an additional battery or AC power supplies. Electronic video inspection eliminates all danger of eye damage from active (lit) fibers carrying either visible or infrared wavelengths. An extensive assortment of adapters supports inspection of a wide range of optical jumper cable connector ferrules and Dirty connector bulkhead adapters. Bulkhead adapter tips are available in multiple lengths as well as 60° angle. Connector adapters are

DFS1 Digital FiberScope with M210 OTDR available for PC, UPC or APC polished ferrules in 1.25 mm, 2.5 mm and other diameters. The DFS1 is available in three Features different kits which provide either PC/UPC adapters, APC •• Ergonomic, hand-held design adapters or no adapters. •• Single-handed operation AFL SimpleView™ Fiber Inspection Software is an application, •• 400x magnification which permits the DFS1 Digital FiberScope to be used with •• Fast, easy focus and display capture Windows® XP or Windows® 7 computers. AFL SimpleView •• Video output via USB port to M- and C-series or user PC software displays a live, high-resolution video image of the end- •• Powered from USB; no batteries required face of an optical fiber on the PC’s display. SimpleView software •• Extensive assortment of interchangeable fiber connector is a free download www.AFLglobal.com. and bulkhead adapter tips •• Adapter tips easily changed; no tools required Applications •• Use AFL SimpleView PC software with DFS1 to inspect •• Ideal for telco, broadband and enterprise applications connectors using a laptop PC •• Optical connector and bulkhead adapter inspection •• Display and analyze fiber end-face quality on C- and M-series •• Visually inspect fiber end-faces for damage or contamination impairing optical transmission •• Generate installation inspection records, associating captured digital photo with fiber ID

DFS1 Digital FiberScope

Specifications a

PARAMETERS VALUE 400X Magnification ~400 µm x 300 µm Field of View 0.5 μm detectable Resolution DFS1 Digital FiberScope with M700 OTDR 0°C to 50°C Operating Temperature -20°C to 70°C Storage Temperature Manual adjustment, 2 mm max travel Focus 35 mm diameter x 175 mm length (without tip) Dimensions 200 g Weight Blue LED Light Source USB port of M-series OTDRs or C-series OTDRS and Certification Testers Power Supply Note: a. All specifications alidv at 23°C ±2°C (73.4°F ±3.6°F) unless otherwise specified.

Ordering Information

DFS1 Digital FiberScope Kit The DFS1 is available in three different kits which provide either PC/UPC adapters, APC adapters, or no adapters. All kits include soft carry case, a storage box to hold up to six adapter tips, FiberScope display software update for M-series OTDRs (M200, M700) or C-series OTDRs and Certification Testers (C840, C850, C860, C880), and a quick reference guide.

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit includes: DFS1-00-04XU (1) DFS1-00-04X0MR DFS1 USB Digital FiberScope (1) DFS1-00-0001MR Universal 1.25 mm male PC adapter tip (1) DFS1-00-0002MR Universal 2.5 mm male PC adapter tip (1) DFS1-00-0003MR SC and FC female bulkhead adapter tip (1) DFS1-00-0004MR LC female bulkhead adapter tip (1) DFS1-04-0001MZ soft carry case for scope and adapters (1) 8500-05-0001MZ One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (1) 8500-05-0002MZ One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (1) 1400-01-0093MZ 6-compartment adapter tip storage box (1) DFS1-001-00 DFS1 software update for M200, M210, M700, C840, C850, C860, C880 DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit includes: DFS1-00-04XA (1) DFS1-00-04X0MR DFS1 USB Digital FiberScope (1) DFS1-01-0002MR Universal 2.5 mm male APC adapter tip (1) DFS1-01-0003MR SC/APC and FC/APC bulkhead adapter tip (1) DFS1-01-0011MR SC/APC bulkhead adapter tip (1) DFS1-04-0001MZ soft carry case for scope and adapters (1) 8500-05-0001MZ One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (1) 1400-01-0093MZ 6-compartment adapter tip storage box (1) DFS1-001-00 DFS1 software update for M200, M210, M700, C840, C850, C860, C880 DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters includes: DFS1-00-04XN (1) DFS1-00-004X0MR DFS1 USB Digital FiberScope (1) Soft carry case for scope and adapters (1) 6-compartment adapter tip box (1) DFS1-001-00 DFS1 software update for M200, M210, M700, C840, C850, C860, C880 DFS1 FiberScope display software update for M200, M210, M700, C840, C850, C860, DFS1-001-00 C880

DFS1 Digital FiberScope

Ordering Information (continued) DFS1 Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Soft carry case for DFS1 Digital FiberScope and adapters DFS1-04-0001MZ 6-compartment adapter tip storage box 1400-01-0093MZ DFS1-00-0001MR 11-compartment adapter tip storage box 1400-01-0094MZ One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC 8500-05-0001MZ One-Click Cleaner LC/MU 8500-05-0002MZ AFL SimpleView PC viewer software Free download from www.AFLglobal.com

DFS1 Adapter Tips

DFS1-00-0002MR The following table identifies commonly required adapter tips. Other adapter tips available. Please consult the factory for additional adapter tips and prices.

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. PC FERRULE CONNECTOR ADAPTER TIPS Universal 1.25 mm tip for PC ferrule connector DFS1-00-0001MR Universal 2.5 mm tip for PC ferrule connector DFS1-00-0002MR Universal 2.0 mm tip for PC ferrule connector DFS1-00-0005MR DFS1-00-0004MR Slim 1.6 mm tip for PC ferrule (termini) DFS1-00-0006MR Slim 1.25 mm probe tip for LuxCis and termini DFS1-00-0038MR Slim 2.5 mm PC ferrule tip for ELIO and termini DFS1-00-0039MR Tip for ELIO 1.25 mm ferrule connector DFS1-00-0008MR SC/PC AND FC/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS Tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0003MR DFS1-00-0013MR Short extended tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0010MR Medium extended tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0011MR Long extended tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0012MR 60° angled tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0013MR 60º angled tip for SC/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0040MR ST/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS Tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0014MR Short extended tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0015MR Medium extended tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0016MR Long extended tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0017MR 60° angled tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0018MR LC/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS Tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0004MR Short extended tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0019MR Medium extended tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0020MR Long extended tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0021MR 60° angled tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0022MR

DFS1 Digital FiberScope

Ordering Information (continued)

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. E2000/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS Short extended tip for E2000/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0023MR Medium extended tip for E2000/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0024MR Long extended tip for E2000/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0025MR MU/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS Tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0026MR Short extended tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0027MR Medium extended tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0028MR Long extended tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0029MR 60° angled tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0030MR MTP/PC MULTI-FIBER ADAPTER TIPS (FERRULE & BULKHEAD) MTP/PC bulkhead adapter extended tip; includes base plus MTP/PC front end tip. DFS1-00-0037MR Test ferrules using adapter tip with bulkhead adapter. Front end tip for MTP/PC ferrule and bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0041MR MTP/PC and MTP/APC bulkhead adapter extended tip kit; includes base plus MTP/PC DFS1-00-0042MR and MTP/APC front end tips. Test ferrules using adapter tip with bulkhead adapter. Multi-row MTP/PC bulkhead adapter extended tip; Includes base plus MTP/PC front DFS1-00-0050MR end tip. Test multi-row MTP/PC ferrules using this adapter tip with multi-row bulkhead adapter MISCELLANEOUS PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS Tip for LEMO 2.0 mm bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0031MR Tip for LX.5/PC bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0032MR Tip for 2.0 mm termini bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0033MR Tip for 1.6 mm termini bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0034MR Tip for ELIO 1.25 mm bulkhead adapter DFS1-00-0036MR APC TIPS Universal 1.25 mm tip for APC ferrule connector DFS1-01-0001MR Universal 2.5 mm tip for APC ferrule connector DFS1-01-0002MR Tip for SC/APC and FC/APC bulkhead adapter DFS1-01-0003MR Tip for SC/APC bulkhead adapter DFS1-01-0011MR Tip for LC/APC bulkhead adapter DFS1-01-0004MR Short extended tip for SC/APC bulkhead adapter DFS1-01-0005MR 60° angled tip for SC/APC bulkhead adapter DFS1-01-0006MR Tip for E2000/APC bulkhead adapter DFS1-01-0008MR Tip for LX.5/APC bulkhead adapter DFS1-01-0009MR MTP/APC bulkhead adapter extended tip kit; includes base plus MTP/APC front end tip. DFS1-01-0010MR Test ferrules using adapter tip with bulkhead adapter. Front end tip for MTP/APC ferrule and bulkhead adapter DFS1-01-0012MR

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

NS and NSR Series Fiber Optic Network Simulators Fiber Optic Network Simulators from AFL are custom built “fiber boxes” intended to duplicate installed fiber optic facilities. Training schools, laboratory testing or field troubleshooting are just few of the many applications for units. Network simulators NSR-Series Rack-mountable Network Simulators may be ordered with customer-specified lengths of multimode or single-mode fiber. Events such as connections, fusion splices and mechanical splices can be added at various points within the fiber to duplicate installed networks. A full range of connector types are available including SC, ST, FC and LC. Angled or non- angled connectors can be specified. Each network simulator includes full documentation for insertion loss, attenuation/km and event location/value. The NS models network simulators are housed in rugged field-portable, bench top cases. The NS models accommodates NS-Series NS Bench Top Network Simulators up to 15 km of optical fiber. The NSR models network simulators are custom built rack- Features mountable fiber boxes. The NSR models are housed in either •• User-specified fiber type 18 or 23-inch rack-mountable box. These network simulators •• User-specified fiber types and lengths can accommodate multiple lengths. •• User-specified events such as mechanical or fusion splices •• OTDR trace provided for documentation Ordering Information •• Variety of connector styles available Contact AFL at (800) 321-5298 or (603) 528-6278 for •• NSR models are Rack-mountable a quote for your custom Network Simulator. •• The NS models are rugged, field-portable •• The NSR models can accommodates up to 100 km of fiber (NSR Models) •• N.I.S.T. Traceable

Applications •• Laboratory testing •• Classroom training •• Field troubleshooting •• OTDR calibration

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

OTDR Fiber Rings Measuring an insertion loss of the near-end and/or far-end connection of a fiber optic link with an OTDR requires a launch and/or receive test cable. A launch cable, which connects the OTDR to the link under test, reveals the insertion loss and reflectance of the near-end connection. A receive cable, which connects to the far-end of the link, reveals the insertion loss and reflectance of the far-end connection. Launch and receive test cables can range from 150 m to 1 km (or longer) in length. Because very long test cables are impractical to transport and use, AFL offers coiled lengths of 50 µm multimode, 62.5 µm multimode, or single-mode fiber packaged in compact rings. Fiber Rings of 150 m of fiber are ideal for premises fiber network test applications. FR1-M6-150-SC-ST Fiber Rings of 500 m and 1 km of single-mode fiber are designed for broadband, long haul fiber network test applications.

Fiber Ring Models CONFIGURATION FIBER TYPE FIBER LENGTH AFL NO. Standard, one fiber Multimode, 50 µm, OM2 150 m (492 ft) FR1-M5-150- x1- x2 Standard, one fiber, Laser Optimized Multimode, 50 µm, OM3 150 m (492 ft) FR1-OM3-150-x1-x2 Standard, one fiber, Laser Optimized Multimode, 50 µm, OM4 150 m (492 ft) FR1-OM4-150-x1-x2 Standard, one fiber Multimode, 62.5 µm 150 m (492 ft) FR1-M6-150- x1- x2 Standard, one fiber Single-mode 150 m (492 ft) FR1-SM-150-y1-y2 Standard, one fiber Single-mode 500 m (1640 ft) FR1-SM-500-y1-y2 Standard, one fiber Single-mode 1000 m (3280 ft) FR1-SM-1000-y1-y2 Standard, one fiber, Bend Insensitive Single-mode, G.657. 150 m (492 ft) FR1-BIF-150-y1-y2 A2 BIF Standard, one fiber, Bend Insensitive Single-mode, G.657. 500 m (1640 ft) FR1-BIF-500-y1-y2 FR1-SM-1000-SC-ST A2 BIF Standard, one fiber, Bend Insensitive Single-mode, G.657. 1000 m (3280 ft) FR1-BIF-1000-y1-y2 A2 BIF x1, x2 — connectors for multimode cables, specify type [ST, SC, ASC (angled SC), FC, AFC (angled FC), LC] y1, y2 — connectors for single-mode cables, specify type [ST, SC, ASC (angled SC), FC, AFC (angled FC), LC] Other connector types, fiber types, and fiber lengths will be quoted upon request.

FR1-SM-150-SC-SC

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. FR00-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 75 OTDR Fiber Rings How to Generate a Baseline Trace Using Fiber Rings •• Use the Fiber Ring as a launch cable. Connect the Fiber Ring between your OTDR and the fiber link under test. This will allow you to measure the loss of the near-end connection. •• Use the Fiber Ring as a receive cable. Connect the Fiber Ring to the far-end connector of your fiber link under test. This will allow you to measure the loss of the far-end connection. •• By using Fiber Rings as both launch and receive cables, as shown in the diagram below, you can measure total insertion loss of the fiber link under test.

Fiber ring - launch cable 2 6 Fiber link under test 7 Fiber ring - receive cable Fiber ring connector

OTDR port 4 Fusion splice OTDR 3 5 8 Near-end connection Far-end connection End of receive cable

Example OTDR Test Configuration with Launch and Receive Cables

OTDR port 1 8 End of receive cable Near-end connection 2 6 Fiber link under test

Fiber ring - launch cable 3 5 Far-end connection 7 Fiber ring - Fusion splice 4 receive cable

OTDR Trace Made using Launch and Receive Cables

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

This portable optical power meter may be used to measure optical power in premises, telco, or broadband fiber optic networks. When used with an LED or laser light source, the OPM1 can also measure the attenuation (insertion loss) of multimode or single-mode cables. With only two controls–ON/OFF and wavelength–the OPM1 is our simplest to use optical power meter. Power is displayed in dBm only - making the OPM1 an ideal meter for fiber optic training courses. Optical power in dBm and the calibration wavelength setting are displayed on an easy-to-read LCD display. The optical input port accepts AFL thread-on style connector adapter caps. Adapter caps are required and must be ordered separately. The OPM1 is fully N.I.S.T. traceable and runs on a standard 9-volt alkaline battery.

Features •• 850, 1300, 1310, 1550 nm •• Premises (Ge) and broadband (InGaAs) models •• Displays optical power (dBm) •• Our simplest to use optical power meter •• N.I.S.T. traceable

Applications •• OPM1-2C for testing multimode and single-mode networks •• OPM1-3C optimized for WAN, CATV, and Telco systems •• Fiber Optic Training courses

Specifications a Calibration Plans

OPTICAL OPM1-2C OPM1-3C AFL recommends annual calibrations on AFL Test and Inspection SPECIFICATIONS products. Prepaid Cal plans offer two annual calibrations at Calibration Wavelengths 850, 1300, 1310, 850, 1300, 1310, 1550, a discounted price, a convenient calibration expiration email 1550 nm 1625 nm Detector Type Germanium (Ge) InGaAs service, express calibration services and access to our product Measurement Range +6 to -60 dBm +6 to -70 dBm knowledge base. Cal Plus plans offer the same services as the Accuracy b ±0.25 dB Cal plans with the addition of a two year extended warranty Measurement Units dBm (three years total coverage). GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Power Typical 60 hours with 9V battery MODEL 2 YR CAL PLAN 2 YR CAL PLUS PLAN Adapter Caps 2.5 mm Universal Included for FC, ST, SC AFL NO. AFL NO. Connector specific adapters available OPM1-2C CAL2-00-OPM1-2 CAL2-01-OPM1-2 Operating Temperature -10 °C to 50 °C OPM1-3C CAL2-00-OPM1-3 CAL2-01-OPM1-3 Relative Humidity 0 to 95 % (non-condensing) Storage Temperature -30 °C to 60 °C Size (H x W x D) 14.0 x 8.1 x 3.8 cm (5.5 x 3.2 x 1.5 in) Weight 0.26 kg (0.58 lb)

Note: a. All specifications alidv at 25°C unless otherwise specified. b. Accuracy measured at 25ºC and -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.

Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. FC adapter 8800-00-0200 SC adapter 8800-00-0209 ST® adapter 8800-00-0202 LC adapter 8800-00-0225

* See www.AFLglobal.com for full list of adapter caps

Ordering Information

INCLUDES AFL NO. Protective rubber boot, 9V battery, manual, 2.5 mm Univer- All OPM1 models sal Adapter cap and carrying case.

Optical power meters and optical light sources can be packaged together as a kit.

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

OPM4-FTTx PON Power Meter

AFL’s OPM4-FTTx measures downstream signals in FTTH and other passive optical networks (PON) that use 1490 nm for data and 1550 nm for video traffic. Equipped with PON specific wavelength filters and a dual photo detector, the OPM4-FTTx can separately and simultaneously measure 1490 and 1550 nm power at the ONT or other points in an FTTx PON. Measurements are clearly visible on the dual-wavelength display – even in direct sunlight. Visual Fault Locator (VFL) - 650 nm (red) standard on all OPM4-FTTx units. A majority of fiber failures occur in the first few meters of the fiber – at connection points. The integrated VFL allows technicians to quickly perform short-range fault location and connectivity testing without extra tools. The power meter and VFL ports accept thread-on style adapter caps and are compatible with angled or non-angled connectors. The OPM4-FTTx offers an automatic power shut-off feature, long battery life from standard AA alkaline batteries, and is fully N.I.S.T. traceable.

Features •• BPON, GPON, and EPON compatible •• Simultaneous power measurement at 1490 and 1550 nm •• Power shown in units of dBm or µW •• Comparison of power levels in dB •• Integrated VFL •• Auto power shut-off feature •• Dual-wavelength, sunlight readable LCD display •• Compatible with APC or UPC connectors •• Standard alkaline AA batteries •• Handheld, rugged, lightweight •• N.I.S.T traceable

Applications •• ONT splitter installation testing •• Designed for rapid ONT troubleshooting •• Supports BPON, EPON, and GPON configurations •• Fault-locating drop cables and F2 fibers from FDH to ONT

Specifications a Ordering Information

POWER METER INCLUDES AFL NO. Calibrated Wavelengths 1490 nm, 1550 nm OPM4-FTTx PON power meter, 2 AA batteries, protective OPM4-FTTx Signal Format CW or downstream BPON, GPON, or EPON rubber boot, SC adapter for power meter port, 2.5 mm Detector Type Filtered InGaAs universal adapter for VFL port, user’s guide, and carry case Measurement Range +10 to -50 dBm @ 1490 nm; +20 to -50 dBm @ 1550 nm Accessories Accuracy b ±0.5 dB (±0.35 dB typical) Resolution 0.01 dB DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Measurement Units dB, dBm, μW FC adapter 8800-00-0200 VFL LASER SC adapter 8800-00-0209 Output Power (typical) 0.8 mW ST® adapter 8800-00-0202 Wavelength (nominal) 650 nm LC adapter 8800-00-0225 Safety Class II, FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 & 1040.11, IEC 60825- 1: 2007-3 Calibration Plans GENERAL Power 2 AA batteries AFL recommends annual calibrations on AFL’s Test and Inspection Battery Life (typical) Power meter - 100 hours; Power meter (backlight on) products. Prepaid Cal plans offer two annual calibrations at - 16 hours; a discounted price, a convenient calibration expiration email Power meter and VFL - 6 hours; Power meter (backlight on) and VFL - 5 hours service, express calibration services and access to our product Operating Temperature -10°C to 50°C, 90 % RH (non-condensing) knowledge base. Cal Plus plans offer the same services as the Storage Temperature -30°C to 60°C, 90 % RH (non-condensing) Cal plans with the addition of a two year extended warranty Size (H x W x D) 14.0 x 8.1 x 3.8 cm (5.5 x 3.2 x 1.5 in) (three years total coverage). Weight 0.26 kg (0.58 lb) MODEL 2 YR CAL PLAN 2 YR CAL PLUS PLAN Notes: AFL NO. AFL NO. a. All specifications alidv at 25°C unless otherwise specified. OPM4-FTTH CAL2-00-OPM4-FTTH CAL2-01-OPM4-FTTH b. At calibration power levels of approximately -5 dBm for 1550 nm and -10 dBm for 1490 nm.

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

OPM5 and OPM4 Optical Power Meters

Features •• Rugged, dependable, tools backed with 5-Year Warranty •• Single-mode and multimode applications •• Wave ID supports testing up to three wavelengths simultaneously •• Field swappable connector adapters provide flexibility •• Large display visible in direct sunlight. Backlight for dim conditions •• Stores optical reference at each calibrated wavelength •• Detection of multiple test tones for fiber identification •• Equipped with five-minute auto-off feature •• Long battery life from globally available 2 x AA (Mignon) batteries •• Fully N.I.S.T. traceable.

Applications •• Passive Optical Networks (PON) testing •• Save test data for Report Generation (OPM5)

OPM5 Optical Power Meter •• OPM(5/4)-4D (Filtered-InGaAs) for high power (+26 dBm) CATV Broadband networks or DWDM system applications •• OPM(5/4)-3D (InGaAs) for Telecommunications networks •• OPM(5/4)-2D (Ge) for Premises LAN/WAN multimode or single-mode networks •• OPM4-1D (Silicon) for multimode / plastic optical fiber applications

With more than 25 years of experience in the optical testing industry and thousands of units in use around the world, AFL is a trusted supplier of optical power meters. Backed by 5-year product warranties, these are the quality products you can trust.

Designed for use in outside plant environments •• Splash resistant controls •• Withstands one-meter drop test •• Controls designed for easy operation with gloves •• Field swappable optical adapters allow access for cleaning optical port and supports multiple connector styles •• Efficient design provides long test time from globally available AA batteries

OPM5 with Data Storage of Test Results File Management system allows technicians to organize test results into multiple files OPM4 Optical Power Meter and transfer stored results via USB to a PC for analyzing, generating reports, and printing. The supplied powerful PC Analysis and Reporting Tool (TRM® 2.0) allows users to apply industry-standards-based rules to test results and create comprehensive certification reports. Users can generate network Pass/Fail results demonstrating compliance to industry standards and illustrate headroom.

Specificationsa

OPTICAL MODEL OPM5-4D, OPM4-4D OPM5-3D, OPM4-3D OPM5-2D, OPM4-2D OPM4-1D Calibrated Wavelengths 850, 980, 1300, 1310, 1490, 850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550 nm 650, 660, 780, 850 nm 1550, 1625 nm 1625 nm Detector Type Filtered InGaAs InGaAs Germanium (Ge) Silicon (Si) Measurement Range +26 to -50 dBm +10 to -75 dBm +6 to -60 dBm +6 to -70 dBm Tone Detect Range +6 to -30 dBm +10 to -50 dBm +6 to -50 dBm +6 to -45 dBm +6 to -25 dBm for 850 nm +10 to -45 dBm for 850 nm +6 to -45 dBm for 850 nm Wavelength ID Range +6 to -30 dBm +10 to -50 dBm +6 to -50 dBm — +6 to -25 dBm for 850 nm +10 to -45 dBm for 850 nm +6 to -45 dBm for 850 nm Accuracy b ±0.25 dB Resolution 0.01 dB Measurement Units dB, dBm, μW

GENERAL Power 2 x AA batteries, accepts standard mini-USB power adapter Adapter Caps Order with one: 1.25 mm Universal, 2.5 mm Universal, FC, SC, ST, LC. Other connector adapters available Battery Life 300 hours Operating Temperature -10 °C to 50 °C, 90 % RH (non-condensing) Storage Temperature -30 °C to 60 °C, 90 % RH (non-condensing) Size (H x W x D) 14.0 x 8.1 x 3.8 cm (5.5 x 3.2 x 1.5 in) Weight 0.26 kg (0.58 lb) Notes: a. All specifications alidv at 25°C unless otherwise specified. b. Accuracy measured at 25 ºC and -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.

Ordering Information All OPM models include optical power meter, 2 AA batteries, protective rubber boot, customer specified adapter cap, and carry case. OPM5 models also include TRM® 2.0 software (Basic License). Quick Ref Guides (PDF format) are available in Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Turkish on www.AFLglobal.com/OPMQRG.

When placing an order, select OPM M N CC options as follows: Model Number (M) Connector (CC) •• Model Number (M), M = 5, 4 CC = FC, SC, ST, LC, 2.5 mm, 1.25 mm (ONE ONLY!) •• Detector Type (N), Detector Type (N) •• Connector Configuration (CC) N = 4, 3, 2, 1

MODEL CALIBRATED WAVELENGTHS (nm) DETECTOR TYPE MEASUREMENT PC SOFTWARE 650 660 780 850 980 1300 1310 1490 1550 1625 RANGE (dBm) OPM5-4D InGaAs +26 to -50 TRM 2.0 OPM5-3D InGaAs +10 to -75 TRM 2.0 OPM5-2D Germanium +6 to -60 TRM 2.0 OPM4-4D InGaAs +26 to -50 OPM4-3D InGaAs +10 to -75 OPM4-2D Germanium +6 to -60 OPM4-1D Silicon +6 to -70

OPM Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. ADAPTER CAPS 2.5 mm Universal (accepts FC, SC, and ST ferrules) 8800-00-0214 1.25 mm Universal (accepts LC and MU ferrules) 8800-00-0224 FC 8800-00-0200 SC 8800-00-0209 ST® 8800-00-0202 LC simplex/duplex 8800-00-0225 E-2000 8800-00-0221 MU simplex 8800-00-0226 2.5 mm open Universal. Accepts SC duplex, OptiTap connector for measuring optical power. 8800-00-0219 SMA 8800-00-0203 D4 8800-00-0201 Biconic 8800-00-0204 DIN 47256 8800-00-0211 Radiall PFO/VFO 8800-00-0212 ADAPTERS FOR PLASTIC OPTICAL FIBER (POF) 1000 mm bare fiber (plastic) 8800-00-0223 HP-HFBR-45XX POF Universal 8800-00-0271PR USB CABLE USB Cable: PC (USB-A) to OPM (USB-MINI B): OPM5 MODEL OPM4 MODEL 6000-00-0024MR •• Connect OPM to PC for data upload to TRM ® 2.0 Connect to PC and External power External power only •• External Power for OPM (when used with customer supplied USB-A power source)

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator

The VOA6-SM is a rugged, lightweight variable optical attenuator that is ideal for use in a wide range of single-mode fiber link certification and engineering test applications. Managers will appreciate its simplicity, which minimizes training requirements and speeds deployment. Field technicians will appreciate the simple thumbwheel attenuation control, which allows precise, one-hand operation. Engineers will appreciate the accuracy and return loss performance of the VOA6-SM. The VOA6-SM is a two-port passive optical device that, when inserted in an optical link, allows a technician to perform several important certification tasks. For example, when the fixed output level of a laser transmitter is too high for downstream devices, the VOA6-SM can be used to determine the amount of fixed attenuation required to match power levels. Alternately, during activation and certification of a new circuit, the VOA6-SM can be used to vary the amount of link loss and determine the optical headroom of the circuit. The 45 dB optical return loss of the VOA6-SM makes it ideal for use with sensitive DFB laser transmitters and other devices that can be degraded or damaged by reflected power. The VOA6-SM is calibrated at key FTTx wavelengths including 1310, 1490, 1550 and 1625 nm and can be used in the calibration, engineering and production test lab as well as in the field. Its rugged construction ensures many years of service. The VOA6-SM operates on an internal Li-Ion battery and includes a 10-minute auto power down and 60-second backlight power off capabilities. An AC adapter and battery charger is standard with every unit.

Features •• 9 µm /125 µm fiber applications •• 2 dB to 60 dB attenuation •• Thumbwheel for one-handed operation •• Maintains attenuation setting with power on/off. •• Calibrated for key FTTx wavelengths •• 45 dB return loss for use with DFB Lasers

Applications •• BER testing •• System tolerance to signal attenuation •• New equipment turn-ups •• Simple to operate lab attenuator •• Validate link budgets and optical margin •• Determine optical pad value •• Characterize optical components, modules, and systems

Specifications a Ordering Information OPTICAL VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator comes with a protective Fiber Type 9/125 µm single-mode rubber boot, AC adapter, Li-Ion battery, battery charger and a Wavelength Range 1260 – 1650 nm soft carry case. Calibrated Wavelengths 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Measurement Range 2 – 60 dB VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator VOA6-SM-FC Insertion Loss 2 dB (max) Resolution 0.05 dB Linearity ±0.5 dB Accessories and Connector Adapters Repeatability ±0.2 dB DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Accuracy ±0.8 dB FC Connector (order 2) 2900-FT-LS-FC MR Setting Type Continuous over entire range SC Connector (order 2) 2900-FT-LS-SC MR Function Bi-directional ST Connector (order 2) 2900-FT-LS-ST MR Return Loss b 45 dB Protective Rubber Boot 1400-10-0220PZ Max Input +20 dBm Carry Case 1400-01-0087PZ GENERAL One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC 8500-05-0001MZ Connector Adapters FC/PC standard Cletop-SB 8500-10-0016MZ SC/PC, ST/PC (available – switchable) Visual Fault Identifier, 650 nm HiLite Battery Li-Ion rechargable Battery Life c 100 hrs * VOA6-SM Attenuator has two ports. Order connector adapters in pairs Auto-Off Feature 10 min Operating Temperature -10 °C to 55 °C (14 °F to 131 °F) Storage Temperature -40 °C to 70 °C (-40 °F to 158 °F) Humidity 0 % to 90 % (non-condensing) Dimensions 210 x 115 x 55 mm (8.27 x 4.53 x 2.17 in) Weight 450 g (1.0 lb)

Notes: a. All specifications alidv at 23 °C ±2 °C (73.4 °F ±3.6 °F) unless otherwise specified. b. Typical. c. Unit powered off in between level changes. Typical time spent changing level <20 minutes per hour.

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM

Features •• OTDR dynamic range: 22 dB (MM), 26 dB (SM) •• Inspection capable with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope •• Integrated OPM, OLS, and VFL (650 nm) •• Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time OTDR test modes •• Touch and Test™ user interface •• Automatic Pass/Fail analysis (TIA/ISO/EN) •• Internal (1000s tests) and USB storage •• Wave ID detect if used with Wave ID series light sources •• >8 hours battery life or AC power ® C850 Compact QUAD OTDR •• TRM 2.0 reporting software •• Available in seven languages

Applications •• Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing of premise networks •• Bi-directionally measure loss and length of fiber links •• Perform Pass/Fail Event and Link measurements •• Certify fibers using ass/FailP criteria of industry standards, applications and user-defined limits C850 OTDR with DFS1 Digital FiberScope •• Create professional certification reports

The C850 Certification OTDR from AFL combines ease of use (Touch and Test™) and multiple functionality in a hand-held test set designed for testing and inspecting multimode and single-mode fibers. The C850 integrates an OTDR with Optical Light Sources (OLS), an Optical Power Meter (OPM), Visible Fault Locator (VFL) and inspection capability for testing and troubleshooting enterprise networks. OTDR Auto modes, OPM Wave ID, and Pass/Fail thresholds simplify the user experience, reduce training time and testing errors enabling even novice users to get the job done quickly and accurately. The C850 OTDR combines ease-of-use and functionality for performing OTDR and loss testing of optical fibers in enterprise networks (campus and buildings). OTDR and OPM test results for the same fibers are stored in logical job folders by cables allowing for easy review, selection, maintenance, and report generation using supplied Windows® compatible software. The C850 OTDR can be used in pairs or with a C840 to perform Tier 1 dual-wavelength, two fiber bi-directional tests. Loss and length can be measured and compared to ISO/TIA/EN or User standards or applications to provide Pass/Fail feedback regarding the fibers ability to meet the acceptance criteria to be certified. The C850 supports visual inspection per IEC 61300-3-35 using the DFS1 Digital FiberScope allowing users the ability to view and document connector end-face images with their OTDR traces and loss results. Thousands of OTDR test results may be saved as standard .SOR files, which can be stored internally or on the supplied USB drive. Test results are transferable via a USB cable or USB drive to a computer for viewing, printing, and analyzing with the supplied Windows® compatible software - TRM® 2.0 (Test Results Manager). Acceptance reports generated using TRM can include OTDR traces with summary and event information with or without Pass/Fail indication, Event maps, and end-face images.

Specifications a

OTDR MULTIMODE SINGLE-MODE POWER METER Emitter Type Laser Calibrated Wavelengths 850, 1300 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm Safety Class Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, Detector Type InGaAs 2 mm IEC 60825-1: 2007-03 Measurement Range +6 to -60 dBm Center Wavelengths 850/1300 nm 1310/1550 nm Accuracy h ±0.25 Wavelength Tolerance ±20/30 nm ±20/30 nm Measurement Units dB, dBm, mW Dynamic Range (SNR = 1) 22 dB 26 dB Wavelength ID j Yes (to -47 dBm) b Event Dead Zone 1.5 m Set Reference Yes Attenuation Dead Zone c 9 m Data Storage Yes Pulse Widths n 10, 30, 100, 300 ns; 1, 3, 10 µs Tone Detection Yes (to -47 dBm) Range Settings 250 m to 64 km 250 m to 208 km GENERAL Sampling Points Up to 16,000 Test Modes OTDR (Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time), Auto Test, Minimum Data Point Spacing 0.25 m OPM, OLS, VFL, DFS Trace File Format SR-4731 (GR-196-CORE Appendix A, B; SR-4731) Group Index of Refraction 1.4000 to 1.6000 (GIR) Length Measurement Range 5 km (MM); 200 km (SM) Distance Uncertainty (m) d ±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing) Data Storage Internal flash memory Linearity e ±0.05 dB/dB USB flash drive (2.0) Loss Threshold 0.05 dB Downloadable from unit directly to PC Loss Resolution 0.01 dB Data Storage Capacity Internal >1000 fibers Reflectance Accuracy f ±2 dB Data Transfer to PC USB VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR Tool Free Adapters Modular cleanable SC/ST/LC Emitter Type Laser Size 27.4 x 19.3 x 7.1 cm Safety Class Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, (10.8 x 7.6 x 2.8 in) IEC 60825-1: 2007-03 Weight 2.3 kg ( 5 lb) Wavelength 650 nm ±20 nm Operating Temperature -10°C to +50°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing) Output Power (nominal) 0.8 mW Storage Temperature -20°C to +60°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing) LIGHT SOURCE MULTIMODE PORT SINGLE-MODE PORT Power Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter Available Wavelengths 850/1300 nm 1310/1550 nm Battery Life k, m >8 hours continuous testing (nominal) Recharge Time l, m 4 hours Emitter Type LED Laser Display 16.51 cm (6.5 in), Safety Class Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, color, transflective IEC 60825-1: 2007-03 Output Power >-20 dBm, 62.5 µm MM g 0 dBm, 9 µm SM Stability (after 15-minute ±0.1 dB over 1 hour ±0.07 dB over 1 hour warm-up) ±0.15 dB over 8 hours Wave ID Transmit Yes Tone Generation 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz

Notes: a. All specifications alidv at 25°C unless otherwise specified. g. Output power will be approximately 3 dB less if a 50 µm mandrel-wrapped b. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of a reflective jumper is used instead of a 62.5 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper. spike caused by a -45 dB event using 10 ns pulse width. h. Accuracy measured at -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards. c. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 dB of j. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with Wave ID backscatter caused by a -45 dB event using 10 ns pulse width. Series Light Sources. d. Does not include GIR uncertainty. k. Typical, depending on display brightness. e. Typical. l. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. f. For a non-saturated event. m. External battery charger available. n. 3 µs not available at 850 nm. 10 µs not available at 850/1300 nm.

The C850 OTDR kits and options allow users to buy the test equipment functionality needed today and grow to meet the demands of certification testing. The C850 combined with an OLS optical light source will allow users to test and generate detailed reports with both OTDR and Loss results shown for each fiber and in charts by cable. Users can add a C840 or another C850 to perform Certification testing. Two C850s or a C840 Tester and C850 can be used together to perform Tier 1 dual wavelength MM (850/1300 nm) and SM (1310/1550 nm) auto tests of one or two fibers in one or both directions as well as measure both loss and length of the fibers and compare to industry standards (TIA/ISO/EN), applications and user-defined threshold values to certify the fibers. The C850 OTDR and C840 Certification Tester work with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope.

Ordering Information When placing an order, select options as follows: Model, Optical Configuration, Language, and Case. Example: C850 — 100 — LP1 — H2

C850 NNN LLL CC

Model Case (CC) C850 S1 = Soft case H1 = Hard case and soft case with cleaning Optical Configuration (NNN) accessories 100 = QUAD 850/1300 nm MM and 1310/1550 nm SM

Language (LLL) LP1 = Language: English, French German, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish

Specify Language when ordering a C850 to indicate language preference of OTDR Quick Reference Guide. Specify power cord type (country) when ordering a C850. One power cord is included with each AC adapter at no charge. Additional power cords may be purchased separately.

Ordering Information (continued) Each C850 kit includes the C850 QUAD OTDR with integrated OLS, OPM, VFI, USB Flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and certification or OPM loss reporting, AC adapter, switchable test ports adapters and accessories (see table below). The C850 hard carry case kit has room for up to 6 Fiber Rings, jumpers in a jumper carry case, and the DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit (accessory items must be ordered separately).

ADAPTERS CARRY CASE AND ACCESSORIES CLEANING PRODUCTS AFL NO. OTDR/OLS OPM VFI Soft case One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm SC, ST, LC SC, 2.5 mm, 1.25 mm 2.5 mm 1.25 mm C850-100-LP1-S1 Soft and hard cases One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm SC, ST, LC SC, 2.5 mm, 1.25 mm 2.5 mm 1.25 mm C850-100-LP1-H1 One-Click Cleaner LC, 1.25 mm CleanConnect 500

C850—100—LP1—H1 Kit Contents OTDR, Inspection, and Cleaning Accessories ITEM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION AFL NO. C850 QUAD OTDR/Auto Test Certification Tester DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit DFS1-00-04XU Adapters OTDR and OLS ports — SC, ST, LC DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit DFS1-00-04XA OPM port — SC, 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters DFS1-00-04XN VFI port — 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal Fiber Ring, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-M5-150-x1-x2 a Miscellaneous Mandrel — 62.5 µm, 3 mm jacket and 50 µm, 3 mm jacket Fiber Ring, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-L5-150-x1-x2 a Accessories Stylus pen for touch screen Fiber Ring, 62.5/125 mm multimode, 150 m FR1-M6-150-x1-x2 a USB thumb drive, 1G; USB to mini-USB cable Fiber Ring, single-mode, 150 m FR1-SM-150-y1-y2 a Small plastic parts box (2) to store adapter caps and mandrels Wet Cleaning Kit (shown) for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors 8500-20-0900 AC adapter (1), specify country of use Dry Cleaning Kit 8500-20-0901 Cleaning One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans) 8500-05-0001MZ Accessories One-Click Cleaner LC/MU, 1.25 mm One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans) 8500-05-0002MZ CleanConnect 500 One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans) 8500-05-0005MZ Cases Hard transit case — holds C850, and above accessories One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans) 8500-05-0006MZ Soft case for C850 One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) 8500-05-0007MZ Report Software PC software Zippered Jumper Carry Case 1400-01-0086PZ

a. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2, y1,y2).

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit

Features •• OTDR dynamic range: 22 dB (MM); 26 dB (SM) •• Inspection capable with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope •• Integrated OPM, OLS, and VFL (650 nm) •• OLS sources: LED - 850/1300 nm; Laser - 1310/1550 nm •• Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time OTDR test modes •• >8 hours battery life or AC power •• Touch and Test™ user interface; TRM® reporting software •• Automatic Pass/Fail analysis (TIA/ISO/EN) •• Internal (1000s tests) and USB storage •• Wave ID detect if used with Wave ID series light sources •• Available in Seven languages

Applications •• Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing of premise networks •• Bi-directionally measure loss and length of fiber links •• Perform Pass/Fail Event and Link measurements using OTDR •• Measure loss and length of fiber links •• Certify SM and MM fibers using ass/FailP criteria of industry standards, applications and user-defined thresholds •• Create professional certification reports C860 with DFS1 Digital FiberScope

The C860 QUAD Certification and OTDR Test Kit from AFL includes one hand-held C840 QUAD OLTS Tester and one C850 QUAD OTDR/ OLTS with built-in auto test functionality. With this kit, technicians can troubleshoot and perform both Tier 1 and Tier 2 certification tests of MM and SM fiber networks, store results and create professional test reports. The C850 is both a QUAD Certification Tester and full-featured QUAD OTDR in a compact case with a large transflective touch screen display suitable for both indoor and outdoor operation. The C850 features single-mode and multimode OTDR, Optical Light Sources (OLS), Visual Fault Locator (VFL, 650 nm), and an Optical Power Meter (OPM). As an OTDR, the C850 supports Full Auto, Expert (manual) and Real-Time test modes, simultaneous dual and single wavelength testing, and Event and Pass/Fail analysis based on default or user-defined thresholds. The C840 QUAD Certification Tester includes VFL, OPM, and both single-mode (1310/1550 nm) and multimode (850/1300 nm) OLS. The C840 may be used alone as a traditional power meter or light source to measure fiber loss or as a visual fault locator to find fiber breaks. The C860 kit combines ease of use (Touch and Test™) with multiple functionality and supports visual inspection per IEC 61300-3-35 using the DFS1 Digital FiberScope allowing users the ability to view and document connector end-face images with their OTDR traces and loss results. Thousands of test results may be stored internally or on the supplied USB drive. Test results are transferable via a USB cable or USB drive to a computer for viewing, printing, and analyzing with the supplied Windows® compatible software - TRM® (Test Results Manager). Acceptance reports generated using TRM can include OTDR traces with summary and event information with or without pass/fail indication, Event maps, and end-face images.

Specifications a

OTDR MULTIMODE SINGLE-MODE POWER METER Emitter Type Laser Calibrated Wavelengths 850, 1300 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm Safety Class Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, Detector Type InGaAs 2 mm IEC 60825-1: 2007-03 Measurement Range +6 to -60 dBm Center Wavelengths 850/1300 nm 1310/1550 nm Accuracy h ±0.25 Wavelength Tolerance ±20/30 nm ±20/30 nm Measurement Units dB, dBm, mW Dynamic Range (SNR = 1) 22 dB 26 dB Wavelength ID j Yes (to -47 dBm) Event Dead Zone b 1.5 m Set Reference Yes Attenuation Dead Zone c 9 m Data Storage Yes Pulse Widths 10, 30, 100, 300 ns; 1, 3, 10 µs Tone Detection Yes (to -47 dBm) Range Settings 250 m to 64 km 250 m to 208 km Sampling Points Up to 16,000 GENERAL C850 OTDR C840 TESTER Minimum Data Point Spacing 0.25 m Group Index of Refraction 1.4000 to 1.6000 Test Modes OTDR (Full Auto, Expert, Auto Test, (GIR) Real-Time), Auto Test, OPM, OLS, VFL, DFS OPM, OLS, VFL, DFS Distance Uncertainty (m) d ±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing) Trace File Format SR-4731 (GR-196-CORE N/A e Linearity ±0.05 dB/dB Appendix A, B; SR-4731) Loss Threshold 0.05 dB Length Measurement Range 5 km (MM); 200 km (SM) Loss Resolution 0.01 dB Data Storage Internal flash memory Reflectance Accuracy f ±2 dB USB flash drive (2.0) VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR Downloadable from unit directly to PC Emitter Type Laser Data Storage Capacity Internal >1000 fibers Safety Class Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, Data Transfer to PC USB IEC 60825-1: 2007-03 Tool Free Adapters Modular cleanable SC/ST/LC Wavelength 650 ±20 nm Size 27.4 x 19.3 x 7.1 cm 23 x 11 x 7 cm Output Power (nominal) 0.8 mW (10.8 x 7.6 x 2.8 in) (8.8 x 4.3 x 2.8 in) Weight 2.3 kg ( 5 lb) 0.9 kg (2 lb) Operating Temperature -10 °C to +50 °C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing) LIGHT SOURCE MM PORT SM PORT Storage Temperature -20 °C to +60 °C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing) Available Wavelengths (nom.) 850/1300 nm 1310/1550 nm Power Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter Emitter Type LED Laser Battery Life k, m >8 hours continuous testing Safety Class Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, Recharge Time l, m 4 hours IEC 60825-1: 2007-03 Output Power >-20 dBm, 62.5 µm MM g 0 dBm, 9 µm SM Display 16.51 cm (6.5 in), 8.9 cm (3.5 in), color, color, transreflective transreflective Stability (after 15 minutes ±0.1 dB over 1 hour ±0.07 dB over 1 hour warm up) ±0.15 dB over 8 hours Wave ID Transmit Yes Tone Generation 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 KHz, 2 kHz

Notes: a. All specifications alidv at 25 °C unless otherwise specified. g. Output power will be approximately 3 dB less if a 50 µm mandrel-wrapped b. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of a reflective jumper is used instead of a 62.5 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper. spike caused by a -45 dB event using 10 ns pulse width. h. Accuracy measured at 25 ºC and -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards. c. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 dB of j. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with Wave ID backscatter caused by a -45 dB event using 10 ns pulse width. Series Light Sources. d. Does not include GIR uncertainty. k. Typical, depending on display brightness. e. Typical. l. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. f. For a non-saturated event. m. External battery charger available.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C860-00-2000 Revision 1L, 2014-10-24 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 91 C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit The C840 and C850 can be used together to perform Tier 1 dual wavelength MM (850/1300 nm) and SM (1310/1550 nm) auto loss tests of one or two fibers in one or both directions as well as measure both loss and length of the fibers and compare to industry standards (TIA/ISO/EN), applications and user- defined thresholds values to certify the fibers. Either unit can be identified as the Main or Remote. The user may test two fibers at two wavelengths bi-directionally and store the results into the main unit. Featuring rich file naming, the Job setup wizard allows the user to define both the cable and fiber end locations, creating easily identifiable trace files, which are managed into Job and Cable folders. The C850 OTDR and C840 Certification tester work with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope.

Ordering Information When placing an order, select options as follows: Model, Optical Configuration, Language, and Case. Example: C860 — 100 — LP1 — H1

C860 NNN LLL CC

Model Case (CC) C860 H1 = Hard and soft case with SC-LC cleaning accessories Optical Configuration (NNN) 100 = QUAD 850/1300 nm MM and 1310/1550 nm SM Language (LLL) LP1 = Language: English, French, German, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish

Specify Language when ordering a C860 Kit to indicate language preference of OTDR Quick Reference Guide. Specify power cord type (country) when ordering a C860 Kit. One power cord is included with each AC adapter at no charge. Additional power cords may be purchased separately.

Ordering Information (continued) Each kit includes one compact C850 QUAD OTDR/OLTS, one hand-held C840 QUAD Certification Tester, USB Flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and certification or OPM loss reporting, (2) AC adapters, switchable test ports adapters, and accessories (see below). The C860 hard carry case kit has room for up to 6 Fiber Rings, jumpers in a jumper carry case, and the DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit (accessory items must be ordered separately).

CARRY CASE ADAPTERS CLEANING PRODUCTS AFL NO. OTDR/OLS OPM VFI Soft (C850) and hard SC, ST, LC SC, 2.5, 1.25 mm 2.5, 1.25 mm One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5mm C860-100-LP1-H1 cases One-Click Cleaner LC, 1.25 mm CleanConnect 500

C860—100—LP1—H1 OTDR, Inspection, and Cleaning Accessories ITEM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION AFL NO. C850 QUAD OTDR/Auto Test Certification Tester DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit DFS1-00-04XU C840 QUAD Auto Test Certification Tester DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit DFS1-00-04XA Adapters OTDR and OLS ports — SC, ST, LC DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters DFS1-00-04XN OPM ports — SC, 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal Fiber Ring, 1 fiber, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-M5-150-x1-x2 a VFI ports — 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal Fiber Ring, 1 fiber, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-L5-150-x1-x2 a Miscellaneous Mandrels (2) 62.5 µm, 3 mm jacket Fiber Ring, 1 fiber, 62.5/125 mm multimode, 150 m FR1-M6-150-x1-x2 a Accessories and (2) 50 µm, 3 mm jacket Fiber Ring, 1 fiber, single-mode, 150 m FR1-SM-150-y1-y2 a Stylus pens for touch screen. USB thumb drive, 1G. Wet Cleaning Kit (shown) for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors. 8500-20-0900 USB to mini-USB cable Dry Cleaning Kit 8500-20-0901 Small plastic parts box (2) to store adapter caps and mandrels One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans) 8500-05-0001MZ AC adapter (2), specify country of use One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans) 8500-05-0002MZ Cleaning (2) One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm; One-Click Cleaner LC/ One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans) 8500-05-0005MZ Accessories MU, 1.25 mm (H2 kit only); CleanConnect 500 One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans) 8500-05-0006MZ Cases Hard transit case — holds C850, C840, and above accessories Soft case for C850 One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) 8500-05-0007MZ Report Software PC software and user guide Zippered Jumper Carry Case 1400-01-0086PZ

Notes: a. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2, y1,y2).

FIBER SYS YES TEM NO S International Sales and Service Contact Information

ISO9001 CERTIFIED Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

Features •• Hand-held, 0.9 kg (2 lb) •• Inspection capable with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope •• Integrated OPM, OLS, and VFL (650 nm) •• OLS sources: LED - 850/1300 nm; Laser - 1310/1550 nm •• Dual-wavelength certification Pass/Fail •• Two fibers bi-directional and single fiber testing •• >8 hours battery life or AC power •• Touch and Test™ user interface •• TRM® (Test Results Manager) reporting software •• Internal (1000s tests) and USB storage •• USB host and function ports •• Available in seven languages

Applications •• Tier 1 testing of premise networks •• Bi-directionally measure loss and length of fiber links •• Save time simultaneously testing two fibers at two avelengthsw •• Verify polarity •• Certify SM and MM networks to industry standards (ISO/TIA/EN) and applications •• Find faults using integrated Visual Fault Locator •• Create and test to user defined rules •• Review Pass/Fail feedback after each test C860 with DFS1 Digital FiberScope •• Review fibers by cable and retest fiber pairs if needed •• Create professional certification reports

Combining two C840 Certification Testers, the C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit from AFL is designed for testing and troubleshooting both multimode and single-mode fiber links. Each tester includes an integrated Visual Fault Locator (VFL, 650 nm), both single-mode (Laser 1310/1550 nm) and multimode (LED 850/1300 nm) Optical Light Sources (OLS), and an Optical Power Meter (OPM). Each tester may be used alone as a traditional power meter, light source, or visual fault locator. In Auto Test mode, the user may perform certification tests to one of the industry cabling standards (TIA, ISO, EN), one or more application standards, or a user-defined loss/length limit. Certification reports may be generated based on the selected standards and rules using PC reporting software. The transflective touch-screen display of the C840 tester is suitable for both indoor and outdoor operation. The C840 supports visual inspection per IEC 61300-3-35 using the DFS1 Digital FiberScope allowing users the ability to view and document connector end-face images. Thousands of test results may be stored internally for transfer to a computer via a USB cable or a standard USB drive for viewing, printing, and analyzing with the supplied Windows® compatible software - TRM® (Test Results Manager). Acceptance reports generated using TRM can include certification reports and end-face images.

Ordering Information Each C880 kit or C840 kit includes two (2) C840s or one (1) C840 Tester respectively, USB flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and certification or OPM loss reporting, AC adapters (two (2) with C880 kit, one (1) with C840 kit), switchable test ports adapters, and accessories (see table below). CARRY CASE TEST CORDS a ADAPTERS CLEANING PRODUCTS AFL NO. OLS OPM VFI SC, ST, LC SC, 2.5, 1.25 mm 2.5, 1.25 mm One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm Soft case SC/LC C880-100-LP1-S1 One-Click Cleaner LC, 1.25 mm Soft case SC/ST SC, ST, LC SC, 2.5, 1.25 mm 2.5, 1.25 mm One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm C880-100-LP1-S2 Soft case — SC, ST, LC SC, 2.5, 1.25 mm 2.5, 1.25 mm One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm C840-100-LP1-S1

The C840 Certification Tester works with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope. When placing an order, select options as follows: Model, Optical Configuration, Language, and Case. Example: C880 — 100 — LP1 — S1

C880 NNN LLL CC

Case (CC) Model S1 = Soft case for C840 (two units) with SC-LC C880 test and cleaning accessories S2 = Soft case for C840 (two units) with SC-ST Optical Configuration (NNN) test and cleaning accessories 100 = QUAD 850/1300 nm MM Language (LLL) and 1310/1550 nm SM LP1 = Language: English, French, German, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish

C880—100—LP1—S1 (or S2) C880 Kit Contents Inspection and Cleaning Accessories ITEM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION AFL NO. C840 QUAD Auto Test Certification Tester (2 ea) DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit DFS1-00-04XU Adapters OLS Ports — SC, ST, LC DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit DFS1-00-04XA OPM port — SC, 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters DFS1-00-04XN VFI port — 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal Wet Cleaning Kit (shown) for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors 8500-20-0900 Jumpers (12) 2 m (62.5 mm, 50 mm, SM) Dry Cleaning Kit 8500-20-0901 Miscellaneous Mandrels (2) — 62.5 mm, 3 mm jacket One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans) 8500-05-0001MZ Accessories Mandrels (2) — 50 mm, 3 mm jacket One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans) 8500-05-0002MZ Stylus pens for touch screen One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans) 8500-05-0005MZ USB flash drive -1G, USB to mini-USB cable One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans) 8500-05-0006MZ AC adapters (2), specify country of use One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) 8500-05-0007MZ Cleaning (2) One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm (S1 and S2 kit) Accessories One-Click Cleaner LC/MU, 1.25 mm (S1 kit only) Cases Soft case (2) Report Software PC software and user guide

Notes: a. (4) each - 2 m (62.5µm, 50 µm, SM).

Specifications a

POWER METER GENERAL Auto Test Wavelengths 850/1300 nm (MM), 1310/1550 nm (SM) Test Modes Auto Test, OPM, OLS, VFL, DFS Detector Type InGaAs 2 mm Length Measurement Range 5 km (MM); 200 km (SM) Measurement Range +6 to -60 dBm Data Storage Internal flash memory Accuracy b ±0.25 USB flash drive (2.0) Measurement Units dB, dBm, mW Downloadable from unit directly to PC Wavelength ID c Yes (to -47 dBm) Data Storage Capacity Internal >1000 fibers Set Reference Yes Data Transfer to PC USB Data Storage Yes Tool Free Adapters Modular cleanable SC/ST/LC Tone Detection Yes (to -47 dBm) Size 23 x 11 x 7 cm (8.8 x 4.3 x 2.8 in) Weight 0.9 kg (2 lb) Operating Temperature -10°C to +50°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing) LIGHT SOURCE MULTIMODE PORT SINGLE-MODE PORT Available Wavelengths 850/1300 nm (nominal) 1310/1550 nm (nominal) Storage Temperature -20°C to +60°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing) Emitter Type LED Laser Power Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter e, g Safety Class Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, Battery Life >8 hours continuous testing IEC EN60825-1: 2007-03 Recharge Time f, g 4 hours Output Power >-20 dBm, 62.5 µm MM d 0 dBm, 9 µm SM Display 8.9 cm (3.5 in), color, transreflective Stability (after 15- ±0.1 dB over 1 hour ±0.07 dB over 1 hour minute warm-up) ±0.15 dB over 8 hours Wave ID Transmit Yes Tone Generation 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 KHz, 2 kHz

VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR Emitter Type Laser Safety Class Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, IEC 60825-1: 2007-03 Wavelength 650 ±20 nm Output Power (nominal) 0.8 mW

Notes: a. All specifications alidv at 25°C unless otherwise specified. b. Accuracy measured at -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards. c. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with Wave ID Series Light Sources. d. Output power will be approximately 3 dB less if a 50 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper is used instead of a 62.5 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper. e. Typical, depending on display brightness. f. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. g. External battery charger available.

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

Fiber Optic Cable

Connector Specifications

PARAMETER CONNECTOR SC FC ST LC MTP MT-RJ MU Single-mode Assemblies Image

Ultra Angle Ultra Angle Ultra Angle Ultra Angle Flat Angle Ultra Angle Ultra Angle Insertion loss (dB) Maximum 0 2. 0 .25 0 .2 0 .25 0 .2 — 0 2. 0 25. — 0 .75 0 .5 — 0 25. — Typical 0 15. 0 .2 0 .25 0 .2 0 .15 — 0 15. 0 15. — 0 .35 0 .25 — 0 2. — Return Loss (dB) Minimum -55 dB -65 dB -55 dB -65 dB -55 dB — -55 dB -65 dB — -55 dB -35 dB — -55 dB — Temp Range (°C) -40 to +85 -40 to +85 -40 to +85 -40 to +85 -40 to +75 -40 to +75 -40 to +85 Durability Cycles 500 500 500 500 200 200 500

Multimode Assemblies Insertion loss (dB) Maximum 0 .5 — 0 .5 — 0 .5 — 0 5. — 0 75. — 0 .5 — 0 5. — Typical 0 .25 — 0 .25 — 0 .25 — 0 25. — 0 35. — 0 .25 — 0 25. — Return Loss (dB) Minimum -30 dB — -30 dB — -30 dB — -30 dB — -30 dB — -20 dB — -20 dB — Temp Range (°C) -40 to +85 -40 to +85 -40 to +85 -40 to +85 -40 to +75 -40 to +75 -40 to +85 Durability Cycles 500 500 500 500 200 200 500 Cable Options Simplex/Duplex Simplex/Duplex Simplex/Duplex Simplex/Duplex Bare Ribbon Bare Ribbon 900 µm 900 µm 900 µm 900 µm 900 µm Jacketed Ribbon Jacketed Ribbon 2 0. mm 1 .6 mm 1 .6 mm 1 .6 mm 1 6. mm 8-12 Fiber Count Dual Link 2 .0 mm 2 .0 mm 2 .0 mm 2 0. mm Zipcord 2 .4 mm 2 .4 mm 2 .4 mm 3 .0 mm 3 .0 mm 3 .0 mm Applications Telephony Telephony Telephony Telephony Telephony Telephony Telephony CATV/Broadband CATV/Broadband CATV/Broadband CATV/Broadband CATV/Broadband CATV/Broadband CATV/Broadband Telco Backplanes Telco Backplanes Telco Backplanes Telco Backplanes Telco Backplanes Telco Backplanes Telco Backplanes LAN/WAN LAN/WAN LAN/WAN LAN/WAN LAN/WAN LAN/WAN LAN/WAN

TRUNK H & A C SS T E A M P B E L L

B E S

A Fiber OpticC Cable

Simplex Cable Assemblies Simplex cable assemblies are offered with a variety of combinations . Connectors include SC, FC, ST, LC and MU . 3 .0 mm, 2 .0 mm, 1 .6 mm, and 900 μm simplex cables in riser and plenum are available .

Features • 3 0. mm, 2 .0 mm, 1 .6 mm, and 900 μm cable diameter available • RoHS compliant – Riser, Plenum, and LSZH rated cables available • Cable compliant with Telcordia® GR-409 • Connectors compliant with Telcordia GR-326

Applications • Building interconnections (campus LAN) • Trunking lines direct to telecommunications closet • Fiber patch panels within communications closets • Links between electronic equipment and fiber patch panels

Cable Components

Ordering Information

ASC ASC RS 001 Q 0010

Connector End A Connector End B Cable Type Fiber Count Fiber Type Cable Length (meters) Single-mode Single-mode RS = 3 0. mm Riser 001 = 1 Q = Single-mode 0010 = 10 meters ASC = Angle SC ASC = Angle SC PS = 3 0. mm Plenum R = Multimode 50/125 (specify length) AFC = Angle FC AFC = Angle FC RM = 1 6. m Riser 2 = Multimode 62 .5/125 ALC = Angle LC ALC = Angle LC PM = 1 6. mm Plenum L = 10G Laser Link 300 USC = Ultra SC USC = Ultra SC RT = 2 0. mm Riser UFC = Ultra FC UFC = Ultra FC PT = 2 0. mm Plenum UST = Ultra ST UST = Ultra ST JH = 900 µm ULC = Ultra LC ULC = Ultra LC UMA = Ultra MU UMA = Ultra MU UMJ = Ultra MU-J UMJ = Ultra MU-J XXX = No connector Multimode PSC = SC MM Multimode PFC = FC MM PSC = SC MM PLC = LC MM PFC = FC MM PST = ST MM PLC = LC MM PST = ST MM XXX = No connector

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 © 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00102, Revision 2, 5.19.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 98 Bend Insensitive Cable Assemblies AFL’s single-mode bend insensitive cable assemblies enable tight bend radii and routing to minimize signal loss due to high traffic and/or densely packed patch panel routing installations . Available in simplex, duplex, quad (4 fiber) and octo (8 fiber) cable configurations, either ultra or angled polished interfaces can be requested, thereby meeting low insertion loss and high return loss system requirements . Various standard connector interface options are available and meet Telcordia® GR-326 performance requirements .

Specifications Applications PARAMETER VALUE • Service provider networks Insertion Loss max 0 .25 dB • Central office and equipment buildings typical 0 .15 dB • CATV carrier video systems Return Loss max -65 dB (APC), -55 dB (UPC) typical -68 dB (APC), -58 dB (UPC) Cable Bend Radius minimum < 15 mm Features Durability 200 cycles CONNECTORS Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C • Ceramic ferrule utilized for precision Storage Temperature -40°C to +85°C fiber alignment • Ribbed boot design on SC insures Ordering Information protected cable bending SIMPLEX CABLE ASSEMBLIES, DUPLEX DUAL-LINK CABLE ASSEMBLIES, • 40 degree LC boot option allows guided 2 MM JACKET DIAMETER 3.2 MM JACKET DIAMETER cable routing in DMX and DMXtend DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. system applications USC-USC C063770B-XXXX USC-USC C141246B-X • Meets connector interface specifications ULC-ULC C213707B-XXXX ULC-ULC CS000813B-XXXX of EIA .TIA-455 (FOCIS) ASC-ASC C202687B-XXXX USC-ULC CS000812B-XXXX UFC-UFC C185200B-XXXX USC-UFC C124414B-XXXX • All component materials are compliant AFC-AFC C202691B-XXXX to UL94 V-0 USC-ULC C213712B-XXXX QUAD 4-FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, • Premium performance at standard USC-ASC C202702B-XXXX 4.7 MM JACKET DIAMETER USC-UFC C167091B-XXXX grade prices DESCRIPTION AFL NO. USC-AFC C202705B-XXXX USC-USC C183518B-XXXX • Color-coded blue cable jacket identifies ASC-AFC C202696B-XXXX ULC-ULC CS000818B-XXXX enhanced performance USC-ULC (40° LC boot) CS001104B-XXXX USC-ULC CS000661B-XXXX • Tested in accordance with XXXX = Length (meters) USC-UFC C178379B-XXXX Telcordia GR-326, issue 3 specifications Example: 0010 = 10 CABLE OCTO 8-FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, • Fujikura fiber enables tight bend radius 5.2 MM JACKET DIAMETER control and low loss DESCRIPTION AFL NO. USC-USC CS000619B-XXXX • Long term performance at a ULC-ULC CS00815B-XXXX bend radius <15 mm USC-ULC CS000814B-XXXX • Simplex, Duplex Dual-link, Quad and 8-fiber cable constructions are RoHS compliant • Cable constructions meet or exceed Telcordia GR-409

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00043, Revision 5, 5.19.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 99 Two-Fiber Cable Assemblies Zipcord, Dual-Link and Ribbon cables are used to meet the requirements for two-fiber cable assemblies, utilizing SC, FC, ST, LC, MU and MT-RJ connectors .

Features Applications • Flexible, 2-fiber design • FDDI, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, ATM and • RoHS compliant – Riser, Plenum and Fiber Channel protocols LSZH rated cables available • Communications closet to wall outlet • Cable compliant with Telcordia® GR-409 • Wall outlet to desk • Connectors compliant with • Interconnect and cross-connect Telcordia GR-326 applications

Cable Components

Ordering Information

UST UST RD 002 Q 0010

Connector End A Connector End B Cable Type Fiber Count Fiber Type Cable Length (meters) Single-mode Single-mode RZ = 3 .0 mm Riser Zipcord 002 = 2 Q = Single-mode XXXX (specify length) ASC = Angle SC ASC = Angle SC PZ = 3 .0 mm Plenum Zipcord ITU-T G 652D. 0010 = 10 meters AFC = Angle FC AFC = Angle FC R20Z = 2 .0 mm Riser Zipcord X = Single-mode ITU-T G 657A. BIF USC = Ultra SC USC = Ultra SC P20Z = 2 .0 mm Plenum Zipcord 2 = Multimode UFC = Ultra FC UFC = Ultra FC R16Z = 1 .6 mm Riser Zipcord 62 .5/125 µm OM1 UST = Ultra ST UST = Ultra ST P16Z = 1 .6 mm Plenum Zipcord R = Multimode ULC = Ultra LC ULC = Ultra LC RD = Riser Dual Link 50/125 µm OM2 USF = Ultra SC Duplex USF = Ultra SC Duplex PD = Plenum Dual Link L = Multimode UDL = Ultra LC Duplex UDL = Ultra LC Duplex 50/125 µm OM3/10G SJF = MT-RJ Female SJF = MT-RJ Female SJM = MT-RJ Male SJM = MT-RJ Male XXX = No connector Multimode PSC = SC MM Multimode PFC = FC MM PSC = SC MM PLC = LC MM PFC = FC MM PST = ST MM PLC = LC MM PSF = SC Duplex MM PST = ST MM PDL = LC Duplex MM PSF = SC Duplex MM PJF = MT-RJ Female MM PDL = LC Duplex MM PJM = MT-RJ Male MM PJF = MT-RJ Female MM NOTES: 1 . Refer to Connector Specifications page . PJM = MT-RJ Male MM XXX = No connector * Single connector options, quantity two per end . Duplex connectors are assembled with removable clip .

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

B E S

A Fiber OpticC Cable

LC Uniboot Cable Assemblies AFL’s LC Uniboot terminated cable assemblies offer a more compact design when compared to traditional duplex zipcord assemblies . These assemblies contain two LC connectors encased in a common housing with one boot, terminated on a single, round, two-fiber cable . Utilizing AFL’s DUAL-Link 2 .8 mm premise cable, LC Uniboot assemblies condenses the cable management to half the space used by regular zipcord assemblies . AFL’s LC Uniboot cable assemblies offer the best solution for high-density applications .

Cable Components

Features • LC duplex connector uses a single housing and single boot • 2 8. mm DUAL-Link cable; Riser, Plenum, and LSZH rated cables available • RoHS compliant • Connectors compliant with Telcordia® GR-326, TIA/EIA-604-10A(FOCIS 10) • Cable compliant with Telcordia GR-409 Specifications Applications PARAMETER VALUE Insertion Loss (typical) 0 .15 dB (SM/MM) • Private networks Return Loss (typical) -55 dB (SM), -30 dB (MM) • Data centers Durability 500 cycles • High density applications Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C • Interconnect and cross-connect Ferrule Zirconia • Premise installations Ordering Information:

LC Uniboot to LC Uniboot, 2.8 mm Riser DUAL-Link Cable FIBER TYPE AFL NO. 62 .5/125 µm (OM1) CS007814-XXXX 50/125 µm (OM2) CS008116-XXXX 50/125 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) CS007783-XXXX 50/125 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) CS009233-XXXX Single-mode CS009234-XXXX

XXXX = Length (meters) Example: 0010 = 10

Contact AFL Customer Service for information regarding plenum and LSZH rated assemblies .

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc . www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 © 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00082, Revision 1, 5.19.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 101 Quad Cable Assemblies Quad cable assemblies are available in a wide variety of configurations, to fit exact application needs . These assemblies are offered using four 900um coated fibers in one circular cable, featuring a 4 .8mm outer diameter .

Features • 4 8mm. cable diameter allows flexibility and easy routing • RoHS compliant - Riser, Plenum, and LSZH rated cables available • 900um tight buffered fibers allow direct termination (no furcation needed) • Cable tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-A/GR-409-CORE • Connectors compliant with Telcordia GR-326

Applications Cable Components • Loaded Panels • Communications cables with both send- and-receive in a single unit • Routing between communications closets and equipment rooms • Intrabuilding backbones

Ordering Information

ASC ASC RQ 004 Q 0010 NF

Connector End A Connector End B Cable Type Fiber Count Fiber Type Cable Length Leg Diameter (meters) Single-mode Single-mode RQ = Quad Riser 004 = 4 Q = Single-mode NN = Non-furcated, both ends 900µm ASC = Angle SC ASC = Angle SC PQ = Quad Plenum ITU-T G 652D. XXXX (specify length) FF = Furcated both ends AFC = Angle FC AFC = Angle FC X = Single-mode 0010 = 10 meters ITU-T G .657A BIF NF = 900µm end A, USC = Ultra SC USC = Ultra SC 2 = Multimode Furcated end B UFC = Ultra FC UFC = Ultra FC 62 5/125µm. OM1 UST = Ultra ST UST = Ultra ST R = Multimode ULC = Ultra LC ULC = Ultra LC 50/125µm OM2 USF = Ultra SC Duplex USF = Ultra SC Duplex L = Multimode UDL = Ultra LC Duplex UDL = Ultra LC Duplex 50/125µm OM3/10G SJF = MT-RJ Female SJF = MT-RJ Female SJM = MT-RJ Male SJM = MT-RJ Male XXX = No connector Multimode PSC = SC MM Multimode PFC = FC MM PSC = SC MM PLC = LC MM PFC = FC MM PST = ST MM PLC = LC MM PSF = SC Duplex MM PST = ST MM PDL = LC Duplex MM PSF = SC Duplex MM PJF = MT-RJ Female MM PDL = LC Duplex MM PJM = MT-RJ Male MM PJF = MT-RJ Female MM PJM = MT-RJ Male MM XXX = No connector NOTES: 1 . Refer to Connector Specifications page . 2 . Duplex connectors are assembled with removable clip .

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00098, Revision 2, 5.19.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 102 Circular Premise Cable (CPC) Assemblies High-fiber count Circular Premise Cable (CPC) assemblies provide safe and cost effective installation for many applications . These assemblies help eliminate labor-intensive field termination, yet guarantee reliable performance . Featuring a unified construction for easy fiber identification and rapid installation, these assemblies are built to exceed all TIA and Telcordia® requirements .

Features Applications • 6-144 fibers with aramid yarn • Head-end termination to reinforcement for rugged protection a fiber "backbone" • Highly flexible for ease of routing • Termination of fiber rack systems • RoHS compliant - Riser, Plenum and • Multi-floor deployment where select LSZH rated cables available fibers are used at each floor • Pre-installed pulling eye kits available • Intrabuilding "backbones" on certain products • 1 meter standard breakout (other lengths are custom) • 900 µm tight buffered fibers allows direct termination; 2 .0 mm furcation available • Cable tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-A/GR-409-CORE • Telcordia GR-326 compliant connectors Ordering Information

ASC ASC RC 012 Q 0010 NN

Connector End A Connector End B Cable Type Fiber Count Fiber Type Cable Length (meters)

Single-mode Single-mode RC = Riser (CPC) 006 = 6 Q = Single-mode XXXX (specify length) ASC = Angle SC ASC = Angle SC PC = Plenum (CPC) 012 = 12 ITU-T G 652D. 0010 = 10 meters AFC = Angle FC AFC = Angle FC 024 = 24 X = Single-mode ITU-T G 657A. BIF USC = Ultra SC USC = Ultra SC 036 = 36 Leg Diameter 2 = Multimode N = 900 µm End A / XXX End B UFC = Ultra FC UFC = Ultra FC 048 = 48 62 5/125. µm OM1 NN = 900 µm End A and B UST = Ultra ST UST = Ultra ST 072 = 72 R = Multimode ULC = Ultra LC ULC = Ultra LC 096 = 96 50/125 µm OM2 F = Furcated End A / XXX End B XXX = No connector 144 = 144 L = Multimode FF = Furcated Ends A and B Multimode 50/125 µm OM3/10G FN = Furcated Ends A / 900 µm End B PSC = SC MM Multimode NF = 900 µm End A / Furcated Ends B PFC = FC MM PSC = SC MM PLC = LC MM PFC = FC MM PST = ST MM PLC = LC MM PST = ST MM XXX = No connector

NOTES: 1 . Refer to Connector Specifications page . 2 . Duplex SC and LC available

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

TRUNK H & A C SS T E A M P B E L L

B E S

A C

Sub-Unitized MicroCore® Trunk Cable Assemblies Sub-unitized MicroCore trunk cable assemblies provide high performance for premise installations where space is a premium . The small diameter, sub-unitized design offers twelve 250 µm colored fibers per tube, with aramid strength members enclosed by a PVC jacket, enabling high density architecture . The cable allows quick and efficient termination of MTP connectors, as well as, breakout capability to single fiber connectors .

Specifications SINGLE-MODE ASSEMBLIES MULTIMODE ASSEMBLIES LC SC MTP Features LC SC MTP PARAMETER ULTRA ANGLED ULTRA ANGLED ANGLED (LOW LOSS) • Sub-unitized design, with (12) 250 µm Insertion Loss (Typical dB)*** 0 .15 0 .15 0 .15 0 .15 0 .35 0 15. 0 15. 0 .15 colored fibers per tube Insertion Loss (Maximum dB) 0 .3 0 .3 0 .3 0 .3 0 .75 0 5. 0 5. 0 .2 • 12, 24, and 72 fiber counts (SM or 50 Return Loss (Typical dB)*** -60 -70 -60 -70 -65 -35 -35 -30 Return Loss (Minimum dB) -55 -65 -55 -65 -55 -30 -30 -20 µm LOMMF) with active part numbers Temperature Range (°C) -40 to -40 to -40 to -40 to -40 to -40 to -40 to -40 to • Small diameter provides superior bend +85 +85 +85 +85 +75 +85 +85 +75 performance Durability Cycles 500 500 500 500 200 500 500 200 • Standard 2 .0 mm zipcord furcation for *** Typical values based on equal quality connectors . single fiber connectors • One meter standard breakout Ordering Information – MTP-MTP Assemblies (Female MTPs on both ends – no pins) • Cable jackets & connector housings color-coded for easy identification (Polarity: Key Up/Key Up, Straight Through) FIBER COUNT FIBER PULLING EYE AFL NO. • Sub-unit legs identified for ease of 12 Single-mode No CS009980-XXXX channel routing/traceability 12 Single-mode Yes CS009981-XXXX • Cable tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 24 Single-mode No CS009984-XXXX 568-A/GR-409-CORE 24 Single-mode Yes CS009985-XXXX ® 72 Single-mode No CS009996-XXXX • Telcordia GR-326 compliant connectors 72 Single-mode Yes CS009997-XXXX 12 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No CS010649-XXXX Applications 12 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes CS010650-XXXX 24 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No CS003700-XXXX • Data center systems wiring 24 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes CS009912-XXXX • MTP-MTP or MTP-Fanouts, and Single 72 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No CS003720-XXXX Fiber Connector Terminations 72 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes CS010016-XXXX • Head-end termination to a fiber 12 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No CS008420-XXXX 12 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes CS010165-XXXX "backbone" 24 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No CS010100-XXXX • Termination of fiber rack systems 24 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes CS010066-XXXX • Multi-floor deployment where select 72 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No CS010101-XXXX fibers are used at each floor 72 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes CS010067-XXXX NOTE: XXXX is length in meters . • Intrabuilding "backbones" Contact AFL Customer Service for additional polarity schemes available .

continued on next page

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

B E S

A C

Sub-Unitized MicroCore® Trunk Cable Assemblies

Ordering Information – MTP Fanout Assemblies (Male MTPs — Duplex Connectors)

AFL NO. FIBER PULLING MALE MTP-LC COUNT FIBER EYE DUPLEX MALE MTP-SC DUPLEX 12 Single-mode No CS009521-XXXX CS010020-XXXX 12 Single-mode Yes CS0010017-XXXX CS010021-XXXX 24 Single-mode No CS003796-XXXX CS010022-XXXX 24 Single-mode Yes CS010018-XXXX CS010023-XXXX 72 Single-mode No CS003811-XXXX CS010024-XXXX 72 Single-mode Yes CS010019-XXXX CS010025-XXXX 12 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No CS011510-XXXX CS010030-XXXX 12 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes CS010027-XXXX CS010031-XXXX 24 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No CS003795-XXXX CS010032-XXXX 24 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes CS010028-XXXX CS010033-XXXX 72 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No CS003810-XXXX CS010034-XXXX 72 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes CS010029-XXXX CS010035-XXXX 12 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No CS009519-XXXX CS010073-XXXX 12 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes CS010068-XXXX CS010074-XXXX 24 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No CS010069-XXXX CS010075-XXXX 24 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes CS010070-XXXX CS010076-XXXX 72 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No CS010071-XXXX CS010077-XXXX 72 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes CS010072-XXXX CS010078-XXXX

Ordering Information – LC and SC Trunk Assemblies (Duplex LC and SC Connectors)

AFL NO. FIBER PULLING LC DUPLEX- LC DUPLEX- SC DUPLEX- COUNT FIBER EYE LC DUPLEX SC DUPLEX SC DUPLEX 12 Single-mode No CS010036-XXXX CS010038-XXXX CS010042-XXXX 12 Single-mode Yes CS010037-XXXX CS010039-XXXX CS010043-XXXX 24 Single-mode No CS004602-XXXX CS007203-XXXX CS007201-XXXX 24 Single-mode Yes CS004603-XXXX CS007204-XXXX CS007202-XXXX 72 Single-mode No CS004618-XXXX CS010040-XXXX CS010044-XXXX 72 Single-mode Yes CS004619-XXXX CS010041-XXXX CS010045-XXXX 12 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No CS010046-XXXX CS010048-XXXX CS010052-XXXX 12 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes CS010047-XXXX CS010049-XXXX CS010053-XXXX 24 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No CS004608-XXXX CS007221-XXXX CS007219-XXXX 24 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes CS004609-XXXX CS007222-XXXX CS007220-XXXX 72 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No CS004624-XXXX CS010050-XXXX CS010054-XXXX 72 50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes CS004625-XXXX CS010051-XXXX CS010055-XXXX 12 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No CS010079-XXXX CS010085-XXXX CS010091-XXXX 12 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes CS010080-XXXX CS010086-XXXX CS010092-XXXX 24 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No CS010081-XXXX CS010087-XXXX CS010093-XXXX 24 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes CS010082-XXXX CS010088-XXXX CS010094-XXXX 72 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No CS010083-XXXX CS010089-XXXX CS010095-XXXX 72 50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes CS010084-XXXX CS010090-XXXX CS010096-XXXX NOTE: XXXX is length in meters .

© 2010, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00105, Revision 5, 5.18.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 105 SC Angled Pigtail Assemblies AFL single-mode SC Angled Pigtail Assemblies are designed to meet stringient performance requirements of the latest FTTH (Fiber to the Home) applications . Available in either simplex (one fiber) or duplex zipcord (two fiber) construction, the SC angled connector guarantees the high performance return loss required of video signals . Assemblies are tested and qualified to Telcordia® GR-326, Issue 3 requirements and meet all EIA .TIA 455-3 (FOCIS 3) interface standards for SC connectors . The assemblies are provided in easy-to-install disposable packaging reels up to 300 feet, in 50-foot increments .

Specification Ordering Information

Applications PARAMETER VALUE RISER GRADE, SINGLE-ENDED, 3 MM • Multi-Dwelling Unit (MDU) drop cables Insertion loss maximum 0 .25 dB AFL NO. for FTTH systems typical 0 .15 dB LENGTH DUPLEX (FEET) SIMPLEX ZIPCORD • CATV Video systems Return Loss maximum -65 dB typical -68 dB 50 CS000686-0050 CS000688-0050 • LAN Networks Durability 200 cycles 100 CS000686-0100 CS000688-0100 Operating Temperature -40°C to + 85°C 150 CS000686-0150 CS000688-0150 Features Storage Temperature -40°C to + 85°C 200 CS000686-0200 CS000688-0200 250 CS000686-0250 CS000688-0250 CONNECTORS: 300 CS000686-0300 CS000688-0300 • Tested in accordance with Telcordia Cable Components GR-326, issue 3 specifications PLENUM GRADE, SINGLE-ENDED, 3 MM • Meets SC interface specifications of Simplex AFL NO. EIA .TIA-455-3 (FOCIS 3) LENGTH DUPLEX • All component materials are compliant (FEET) SIMPLEX ZIPCORD to UL94 V-0 50 CS000698-0050 CS000700-0050 100 CS000698-0100 CS000700-0100 • Ceramic ferrule utilized for precision 150 CS000698-0150 CS000700-0150 fiber alignment 200 CS000698-0200 CS000700-0200 • Keyed push-pull latching mechanism 250 CS000698-0250 CS000700-0250 • Connector housings are color coded 300 CS000698-0300 CS000700-0300 (Green) for APC identification and -65 dB return loss PLENUM-RISER GRADE, SINGLE-ENDED, 3MM Duplex Zipcord AFL NO. CABLE: LENGTH DUPLEX • Cable constructions meet or exceed (FEET) SIMPLEX ZIPCORD Telcordia GR-409 50 CS000704-0050 CS000706-0050 • 3 .0 mm cable diameter available in 100 CS000704-0100 CS000706-0100 Riser and Plenum grade 150 CS000704-0150 CS000706-0150 • Simplex and Duplex zipcord cable 200 CS000704-0200 CS000706-0200 construction, RoHS compliant 250 CS000704-0250 CS000706-0250 • Cable manufactured using Corning 300 CS000704-0300 CS000706-0300 SMF-28e single-mode fiber

Duplex Single-Jacket

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00101, Revision 2, 5.19.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 106 Node Cable Assemblies AFL’s Node Cable Assemblies are factory tested to meet stringent installation performance demands . These assemblies make splicing from an optical node to a closure fast, easy and reliable . This connection is critical to the installation and requires an environmental seal between the cable and the node housing . AFL’s assembly comes with node fitting pre-installed on the cable, featuring an anti-twist design enabling easy mounting without twisting the cable . The mounting thread is an industry standard size of 5/8-24 UNEF . AFL’s Node assembles feature loose-tube outdoor cable with a water-blocked cable design . An assortment of industry standard connector styles are available such as SC/APC, SC/UPC, FC/APC, FC/UPC, LC/UPC, and MPO . Standard or custom breakout lengths are available with Features standard fiber counts of 1 thru 12 terminations (>12 fibers also available), with all fibers • Field proven, durable, connecting hardware color coded for quick/easy fiber identification . • High-quality optical terminations Specifications meet all geometric and optical PARAMETER VALUE performance requirements Operating Temperature °F (°C) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70) • Ordering flexibility; available in standard Storage Temperature °F (°C) -58 to 158 (-50 to 70) and custom lengths and connector counts Crush Resistance lbs (kg) 1000 (453 5. kg) Impact Resistance 25 lbs @ 2 .2 lbs per foot (11 .25 kg @ 0 .99 kg) • Mini-central core type cable ≤12 fibers; Flexing 25 lbs @ 5 in . (11 .25 kg @ 12 7. kg) stranded cable >12 fibers Fiber Core Diameter (microns) 8 3. Maximum Insertion Loss (dB) 0 25. (UPC), 0 .35 (APC), 0 .5 (MPO) • Installed hard-line entry connector UPC Return Loss (dB) -55 with anti-twist design APC Return Loss (dB) -65 Outer Jacket Material Riser-rated PU / PE • Individualized serial numbers Finish Alumnium, Anodized for easy identification Cable Pullout Tensile Strength lbs (kg) 247 (112 04). • SC/UPC, FC/UPC, SC/APC, FC/APC, Entry Threads in . 0 625. x 24 Dimensions in . (cm) 4 25. long x 0 .875 diameter (10 8. x 2 22). LC/UPC, and MPO • Rugged polyurethane riser-rated indoor/ COLOR FURCATION - FIBER NUMBER REFERENCE 1 Blue 4 Brown 7 Red 10 Violet outdoor loose tube single-mode uniflex 2 Orange 5 Slate 8 Black 11 Rose cable; armored polyethylene jacket or 3 Green 6 White 9 Yellow 12 Aqua heavy duty polyurethane uniflex GROMMET SPECIFICATIONS - STANDARD D • 900 µm or 2 .0 mm / 3 .0 mm Inner Diameter 0 .375" upjacketed color-coded furcation, Active Pull Test 35 lbs breakout length 1 meter Overall length 45 mm Hex Nut Size 7/8" Length from Hex Nut to end of front body 6 mm Material Aluminum, Anodized Ordering Information

ASC XXX NC 012 Q 0010 N

Connector End A Connector End B Cable Type Fiber Count Fiber Type Cable Length (meters) Leg Diameter N = 900 µm End A Single-mode Single-mode NC = Uni-Flex 002 = 2 MPO (only) Q = Single-mode XXXX (specify length) F = 2 .0 mm Furcated ASC = Angle SC XXX = No connector AN = Armored PE 004 = 4 008 = 8 0010 = 10 meters End A AFC = Angle FC HD = Heavy Duty 006 = 6 012 = 12 M = 3 .0 mm Furcated USC = Ultra SC Uniflex 008 = 8 (Higher fiber End A 010 = 10 UFC = Ultra FC counts available 012 = 12 UST = Ultra ST upon request) ULC = Ultra LC MPO = Angle MPO

AFL’s LightLink Fiber Receiver Service (Node Service) cable assemblies are factory tested to meet stringent installation performance demands . These assemblies make splicing from an optical node to a closure fast, easy and reliable . This connection is critical to the installation and requires an environmental seal between the cable and the node housing . AFL’s assembly comes with this node fitting pre-installed on the cable, featuring an anti-twist design enabling easy mounting without twisting the cable . The mounting thread is an industry standard size of 5/8-24 UNEF . Features AFL’s FRSC assembles feature loose-tube outdoor cable with a water-blocked cable • Field proven, durable design . An assortment of industry standard connector styles are available such as connecting hardware SC/APC, SC/UPC, FC/APC, FC/UPC, and LC/UPC . Standard or custom breakout lengths • High quality optical terminations meet are available with fiber counts of 1 thru 12 terminations, with all fibers color coded all geometric and optical performance for quick/easy fiber identification . requirements • Ordering flexibility; available in standard Fiber Receiver Service Cable with Armored PE Jacket and custom lengths and connector counts Specifications • Mini-central core type cable PARAMETER VALUE • Installed hard-line entry connector Operating Temperature °F (°C) -40 to 158 (-40 to 70) • Gel-filled cable Storage Temperature °F (°C) -58 to 158 (-50 to 70) Crush Resistance lbs . (kg) 1000 (453 5. kg) • Individualized serial numbers Impact Resistance 25 lbs . @ 2 .2 lbs . per foot (11 25. kg @ 0 .99 kg) • SC/UPC, FC/UPC, SC/APC, FC/APC, Flexing 25 lbs . @ 5 in . (11 .25 kg @ 12 .7 kg) LC/UPC Fiber Core Diameter (microns) 8 3. Maximum Insertion Loss (dB) 0 25. (UPC), 0 .35 (APC) • Two to twelve fiber counts available UPC Return Loss (dB) -55 APC Return Loss (dB) -65 Outer Jacket Material Riser-rated PVC Finish Nickel-tin plated brass Cable Pullout Tensile Strength lbs . (kg) 247 (112 04). Entry Threads in . 0 625. x 24 Dimensions in . (cm) 4 25. long x 0 .875 diameter (10 8. x 2 22).

Fiber Receiver Service Cable with Non-Armored All-Dielectric UniFlex™

Features • Polyurethane riser rated indoor/outdoor • Flexible bend radius of 19cm for loose tube single-mode cable installation and 10cm for operation • Polyurethane jacket reinforced with • Variety of single-mode connector styles aramid yard for exceptional durability (not available in multimode) • Easy installation • Cable cut and terminated to custom lengths • Design eliminates movement of cable components • Connector ends clearly labeled for quick identification • 900µm or 2 .4mm upjacketed color-coded legs, 2 .0mm LC • Available in fiber counts from 2-12 fibers • Breakout length 1 meter • Ultra Polish available for all connector • Available in single-mode pigtails types • Pulling strength in excess of 150 lbs . • Angle Polish available on FC and SC • Anti-twist crimp connectors

Specifications COLOR FURCATION - FIBER NUMBER REFERENCE GROMMET SPECIFICATIONS - STANDARD D 1 Blue 4 Brown 7 Red 10 Violet Inner Diameter 0 375”. 2 Orange 5 Slate 8 Black 11 Rose Active Pull Test 35 lbs . 3 Green 6 White 9 Yellow 12 Aqua Overall length 45mm Hex Nut Size 7/8” Length from Hex Nut 6mm to end of front body Material Aluminum Gold Anodized

Ordering Information

ASC XXX NC 012 Q 0010 N

Connector End A Connector End B Cable Type Fiber Count Fiber Type Cable Length (meters) Leg Diameter N = 900µm End A Single-mode Single-mode NC = Uni-Flex 002 = 2 Q = Single-mode XXXX (specify length) F = Furcated End A ASC = Angle SC XXX = No connector AN = Armored PE 004 = 4 0010 = 10 meters AFC = Angle FC 006 = 6 USC = Ultra SC 008 = 8 UFC = Ultra FC 010 = 10 UST = Ultra ST 012 = 12 ULC = Ultra LC

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00086, Revision 1, 1.25.12 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 109 Loose Tube & Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube Cable Assemblies High fiber count Loose Tube & Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube Cable assemblies provide a safe and proven method of utilizing preterminated connector technology for outside plant applications . These assemblies help control cost by eliminating labor- intensive field termination and provide the same factory terminated reliability the industry has trusted for many years . Cable assemblies are available in Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube, suitable for use in both indoor and outdoor applications . Each unit is manufactured to exceed all TIA and Telecordia requirements .

Features

Applications • Fiber counts from 6 to 144 fibers • 1 meter standard breakout length • Available with ST, SC, FC, and LC • 2 .4mm standard furcation for • Outdoor Cabinets connectors single-mode SC, FC, and ST • External-Building Runs • Pigtail assemblies, standard • 1 .6mm standard furcation for LC • Vaults configuration (nonstandard • UV resistant outer jacket • CEV’s configurations available) • Gel-filled loose buffer tubes (RL), • ST, SC, FC and LC connectors available Gel-filled LooseTube (LT) in both single-mode and multimode • Meets Telcordia GR-20-CORE • Pre-installed pulling eye kits available

Specifications

Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube Cable Components Temperature Range PARAMETER VALUE Riser Rated stranded design loose tube PVC jacketPVC jacket Operating -40°C to +70°C strengthstrength member member cable is moisture and U V. . resistant, S-Z Storage -40°C to +75°C binder binder Installation 0°C to +70°C stranded for easy mid-span access, UL-listed dry waterdry blockingwater blocking system system type OFNR (UL1666) riser-rated, and can be dielectricdielectric center central member member used in both duct and lashed applications . optical opticalfibers fibers rip cordrip cord gel-filledgel-filled buffer buffer tube tube

Loose Tube Cable Components Temperature Range Loose Tube stranded design cables polyethylene jacket PARAMETER VALUE polyester tape Operating -40°C to +70°C feature fiber counts up to 432, Storage -40°C to +75°C optical fiber compliance with EIA/TIA and REA/RUS Installation -30°C to +70°C PE-90, and are S-Z stranded for easy FRP central member mid-span access . rip cord water-blocking system gel-filled loose buffer tube

NOTE: Refer to page on Connector Specifications .

Dimensions

Ordering Information

ASC ASC LT 024 Q 0010 NN

Connector End A Connector End B Cable Type Fiber Count Fiber Type Cable Length (meters)

Single-mode Single-mode TL = Loose Tube 006 = 6 Q = Single-mode XXXX (specify length) ASC = Angle SC ASC = Angle SC RL = Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor 012 = 12 X = Single-mode 0010 = 10 meters AFC = Angle FC AFC = Angle FC Loose Tube 024 = 24 ITU-T G .657A BIF USC = Ultra SC USC = Ultra SC 036 = 36 Leg Diameter UFC = Ultra FC UFC = Ultra FC 048 = 48 N = 900µm End A / XXX End B UST = Ultra ST UST = Ultra ST 072 = 72 NN = 900µm End A and B ULC = Ultra LC ULC = Ultra LC 096 = 96 F = Furcated End A / XXX End B XXX = No connector 144 = 144 FF = Furcated Ends A and B FN = Furcated Ends A / 900µm End B NF = 900µm End A / Furcated Ends B

Lengths Available Cable lengths are dependent on fiber cable type and count . Consult customer service for maximum lengths available .

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00090, Revision 2, 11.22.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 111 Future Access Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for MDU Applications Used in MDU applications, the Future Access Single-Fiber HFOC (Hardened Fiber Optic Connector) Drop Cable provides a quick and easy installation from the pre-installed HFOC terminal residing on a pole, pedestal or hand-hole to a far end termination . With environmentally-sealed SC/APC connectors, the Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable is factory terminated using dielectric or toneable flat cables in customer specified lengths, single or doubled-ended . The single-fiber drop cable saves time and money with faster deployments in the optical FTTx network .

Specifications

Features PARAMETER VALUE •• Environmentally sealed SC/APC connec- Connector Type SC/APC tors equipped with protective cap Max . Insertion Loss <0 35. dB Min . Return Loss -65 dB •• Factory termination – single or double- ended •• Faster deployment, saving time and Ordering Information money DESCRIPTION AFL NO. •• Cable available in dielectric or toneable Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – Single-ended Dielectric CS002823-XXXXFT flat drop and in varying lengths Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – Single-ended Toneable CS008995-XXXXFT •• Tested to Telcordia GR-3120 require- Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – Double-ended Dielectric CS008994-XXXXFT ment Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – Double-ended Toneable CS008993-XXXXFT NOTE: XXXX is the length in feet .

Application

FutureAccess is a registered trademark of Fujikura Ltd .

© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00126, Revision 1, 4.5.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 112 4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for the MDU Splice and Distribution Enclosure The Future Access 4-Fiber HFOC (Hardened Fiber Optic Connector) Drop Cable is used in MDU application where FTTP services are to be provisioned using indoor single family unit (SFU) ONTs . The use of the 4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable allows quick and easy installation from the pre-installed HFOC terminal usually residing on a pole, pedestal or hand-hole run to the side of the MDU building . Used in conjunction with the LightLink™ LL-500-DS MDU Splice and Distribution Enclosure, the output of the 4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable is spliced inside the LL-500-DS to (4) 2 mm pigtails which than terminate to SC-APC adapters . The output fibers will be standard MDU drop cables running to each individual dwelling unit inside the building . This enclosure is mounted on the outside of an MDU building allowing splicing and distribution for up to 12 SFU dwellings in 4-fiber increments .

Features •• Four environmentally sealed SC/APC connectors •• Each connector marked for fiber identification and equipped with protective cap •• Fully sealed transition fan-out into individual 48” long single fiber HFOC tethers •• Tested to Telcordia GR-3120 and GR-771 requirements •• Available in dielectric or toneable flat drop cable •• Available in 200 or 500 foot lengths

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Connector Type SC/APC Max . Insertion Loss <0 35. dB Min . Return Loss -65 dB

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. 4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – 200 Feet Dielectric CS004232-0200FT 4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – 500 Feet Dielectric CS004232-0500FT 4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – 200 Feet Toneable CS004233-0200FT 4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – 500 Feet Toneable CS004233-0500FT

Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. LL-500-DS Enclosure FC000570 LL-500-DS Expansion Kit (allows additional 4-fiber splices and terminations) FC000574

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00166, Revision 2, 11.3.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 113 Future Access™ 4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for the MDU Splice and Distribution Enclosure

Application

FASTConnect® Field-Installable Connectors FASTConnect are factory pre-polished, field-installable connectors that completely eliminate the need for hand polishing in the field . Proven mechanical splice technology ensuring precision fiber alignment, a factory pre-cleaved fiber stub and a proprietary index-matching gel combine to offer an immediate low loss termination to either single-mode or multimode optical fibers . FAST Connectors are compatible with 250 µm and 900 µm optical fibers, as well as 900 µm, 2 mm and 3 mm cordage . All primary fiber types are supported, and each connector is color coded per industry standard requirements to aide in identification during and after installation . Features A factory-installed wedge clip (included with each connector) is removed and discarded • No Epoxy, No Polish upon completion of the termination . Incorporated into this device is an innovative, • Low Insertion Loss translucent wedge enabling the use of a common VFI to provide a "pass/fail" • Fiber Can Be Reinserted signal once physical contact is achieved . up to Three Times • 3 0. mm, 2 0. mm and 900 μm Specifications Cordage Compatibility PARAMETER VALUE • VFI Accessory to Confirm Single-mode - UPC Average: 0 2. dB, Maximum: 0 .5 dB Proper Installation Insertion Loss: Single-mode - APC Average: 0 3. dB, Maximum: 0 .6 dB Multimode - PC Average: 0 1. dB, Maximum: 0 .5 dB Single-mode - UPC Average: -55 dB, Maximum: -45 dB Applications Single-mode - APC-AU* Average: -55 dB, Maximum: -50 dB Return Loss at Room Temperature: Single-mode - APC-AA** Average: -65 dB, Maximum: -60 dB • Premise/Enterprise Networks Multimode Average: -25 dB, Maximum: -20 dB • LAN/WAN Connections Operating Temperature -40°C to +75°C • Patch Panels *Angle/Flat Cleaves • Equipment Termination **Angle/Angle Cleaves • FTTx Applications TIA/EIA-568-C .3 Compliant TIA/EIA-604 (FOCIS) Compliant • Field Repair/Replacement • Equipment Test Leads Ordering Information AFL NO. FIBER TYPE HOUSING CABLE COLOR SIZE PACKAGE OF 6 PACKAGE OF 100 FASTCONNECT SC Multimode 62 .5/125 µm, OM1 Beige FAST-SC-MM62 .5-6 FAST-SC-MM62 .5-100 Multimode 50/125 µm, OM2 Black FAST-SC-MM50-6 FAST-SC-MM50-100 Multimode 50/125 µm, OM3/OM4 compatible Aqua FAST-SC-MM50L-6 FAST-SC-MM50L-100 900 µm Single-mode, UPC Blue FAST-SC-SM-6 FAST-SC-SM-100 Single-mode, APC-AU Green FAST-SC-SMAU-6 FAST-SC-SMAU-100 Single-mode, APC-AA Green FAST-SC-SMAA-6 FAST-SC-SMAA-100* FASTCONNECT ST Multimode 62 .5/125 µm, OM1 Beige FAST-ST-MM62 5-6. FAST-ST-MM62 .5-100 Multimode 50/125 µm, OM2 Black FAST-ST-MM50-6 FAST-ST-MM50-100 900 µm Multimode 50/125 µm, OM3/OM4 compatible Aqua FAST-ST-MM50L-6 FAST-ST-MM50L-100 Single-mode, UPC Blue FAST-ST-SM-6 FAST-ST-SM-100 FASTCONNECT LC Multimode 62 .5/125 µm, OM1 Beige FAST-LC-MM62 .5-6 FAST-LC-MM62 .5-100 Multimode 50/125 µm, OM2 Black FAST-LC-MM50-6 FAST-LC-MM50-100 900 µm Multimode 50/125 µm, OM3/OM4 compatible Aqua FAST-LC-MM50L-6 FAST-LC-MM50L-100 Single-mode, UPC Blue FAST-LC-SM-6 FAST-LC-SM-100

* Requires FAST APC Tool Kit for installation

U.S. Patents: 5,963,699 / 5,984,532 / 6,179,482 / 7,003,208 / 7,258,496

© 2005 AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00052, Revision 10, 3.18.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 115 FASTConnect® Field-Installable Connectors Accessories DESCRIPTION AFL NO. AFL NO. BOOT KITS FOR 2 MM AND 3 MM CORDAGE COLOR CABLE SIZE PACK OF 6 PACK OF 100 2 mm Boot Kit, SC/LC/ST Black 2 mm FAST-BOOT-2MM-6 FAST-BOOT-2MM-100 3 mm Boot Kit, SC/LC/ST Black 3 mm FAST-BOOT-3MM-6 FAST-BOOT-3MM-100 DUPLEX CLIPS LC Duplex Clip (LC only) Transparent CS010437-06 CS010437-100

TOOL KITS AFL NO. FAST UPC Tool Kit For all UPC style connectors and SC/ APC-AU (CT-30A Cleaver) CS001201 FAST UPC Tool Kit For all UPC style connectors and SC/APC-AU (CT-06A Cleaver) CS010975 FAST APC Tool Kit For SC/APC-AA connectors (CT-11A Cleaver) CS012290

VISUAL FAULT IDENTIFIERS AFL NO. AFL NOYES® VFI 2 VFI2-00-0900 AFL NOYES HiLite VFI3-00-0900 1 .25 mm Universal Adapter (LC Connectors) 2900-50-0010MR

Testing HOLD 1 sec 1 2

>POM<

Before Fiber Insertion HOLD

1 sec 1 2

>POM<

After Fiber Insertion

Fiber Optic Cable

FASTConnect® Universal Tool Kit The FASTConnect Universal Tool Kits provide all the necessary installation tools required for fiber preparation of 250 μm or 900 μm fibers, or 900 μm, 2 mm or 3 mm cordage for AFL’s pre-polished FASTConnect . Featuring either the CT-30A, CT-06A or CT-11A fiber cleaver, the FASTConnect Universal Tool Kit contains all the industry standard termination tools required for fiber preparation . Additionally, the carrying case has adequate storage for extra FASTConnect for on-site convenience .

Applications Features Tool Kit Contents • Premise environments • Industry standard fiber preparation tools • LAN Fiber to the Desk environments • Compact design, flexible yet rugged case • Patch panel/wiring closets • Complete instructions provided • FTTx applications • Quick repair/replacement areas

Ordering Information DESCRIPTION AFL NO. FASTConnect High Precision UPC/PC Tool Kit with CT-30A Cleaver CS001201 FASTConnect High Precision UPC/PC Tool Kit with CT-06A Cleaver CS010975 CT-30A Cleaver FASTConnect APC (Angle/Angle Connector) Tool Kit with CT-11A Cleaver CS012290

Tool Kits include: Cleaver, FAST SC Assembly Tool, FAST LC Assembly Tool, 3 mm Cable Clamp, 2 mm Cable Clamp, 0 25/0. 9. mm Cable Clamp, Fiber Stripper, Kevlar Scissors, Fiber Preperation Fluid, Lint-free Cloth Wipes, Marker Pen, Installation Instructions, Strip Length Template and a Carrying Case .

CT-06A Cleaver

CT-11A Cleaver

( ) © 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00053, Revision 8, 3.13.15 www.AFLglobal.com or 800 235-3423 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 117 FUSEConnect® Field-Installable Connectors

FUSEConnect® Fusion-Spliced, Field-Installable Connectors AFL’s FUSEConnect fusion-spliced, field installable connectors are uniquely designed and feature only four to five components. The factory pre-polished ferrule eliminates the need for polishing, adhesives, and crimping in the field, which minimizes the potential for operator error and expensive connector scrap. FUSEConnect utilizes a fusion splicer to terminate the connector in the field, addressing return loss concerns present in analog optical networks. This advanced process yields true APC performance for SC/APC and LC/APC configurations, and is compliant to GR-326-CORE. FUSEConnect is compatible with Fujikura fusion splicers and most other fiber holder-based fusion splicing platforms. FuseConnect Connectors (SC, FC, LC, ST)

Features Applications • Field installable • Connectorization in: • No adhesives, crimping or polishing - RF-overlay FTTP networks • True APC performance - Cable TV backbone networks - Outside plant • MM compliant to TIA/EIA568C.3 - FTTD • Compatible with most fusion splicers - MDU FTTP Cabling • Central office connector replacement • Data center installation

FuseConnect in Fusion Splicer Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Connector Type SC, LC, FC, ST Cable Type 900 µm, 2 mm, 3 mm Polish APC, UPC, PC Insertion Loss SM: 0.15 dB (average), 0.3 dB (maximum) / MM: 0.10 dB (average), 0.3 dB (maximum) Return Loss SM: ≤ -65 dB (APC), ≤ -55 dB (UPC) / MM: ≤ -35 dB (PC) Operating Temperature -40°C to +75°C

Ordering Information AFL NO.* CONN. BOOT TYPE TYPE UPC SM APC SM PC 62.5 µm MM PC 50 µm MM PC 50 µm LOMMF (Blue) (Green) (Beige) (Black) (AQUA) ** SC 900 µm FUSE-SC9SMU-6 FUSE-SC9SMA-6 FUSE-SC9M62-6 FUSE-SC9M50-6 FUSE-SC9M50L-6 3 mm FUSE-SC3SMU-6 FUSE-SC3SMA-6 FUSE-SC3M62-6 FUSE-SC3M50-6 FUSE-SC3M50L-6 LC 900 µm FUSE-LC9SMU-6 FUSE-LC9SMA-6 FUSE-LC9M62-6 FUSE-LC9M50-6 FUSE-LC9M50L-6 2 mm FUSE-LC2SMU-6 FUSE-LC2SMA-6 FUSE-LC2M62-6 FUSE-LC2M50-6 FUSE-LC2M50L-6 FC 900 µm FUSE-FC9SMU-6 — FUSE-FC9M62-6 FUSE-FC9M50-6 FUSE-FC9M50L-6 2 mm FUSE-FC2SMU-6 — FUSE-FC2M62-6 FUSE-FC2M50-6 FUSE-FC2M50L-6 3 mm FUSE-FC3SMU-6 — FUSE-FC3M62-6 FUSE-FC3M50-6 FUSE-FC3M50L-6 ST 900 µm FUSE-ST9SMU-6 — FUSE-ST9M62-6 FUSE-ST9M50-6 FUSE-ST9M50L-6 2 mm FUSE-ST2SMU-6 — FUSE-ST2M62-6 FUSE-ST2M50-6 FUSE-ST2M50L-6 3 mm FUSE-ST3SMU-6 — FUSE-ST3M62-6 FUSE-ST3M50-6 FUSE-ST3M50L-6

* AFL NO. is for one pack of 6 pieces ** Laser Optimized MM Fiber (LOMMF) compatible with OM3 and OM4 fibers

FuseConnect Kits—ST (blue), SC (green), LC (blue)

NNECTOR CO S

Fiber Optic Cable

FUSEConnect® MPO Fusion-Spliced, Field-Terminated Connectors AFL’s FUSEConnect MPO fusion-spliced, field-terminated connectors are uniquely designed and feature just six components. With a factory pre-polished ferrule, its innovative field-termination process eliminates polishing, adhesives and crimping in the field minimizing the potential for operator error and expensive connector scrap. Designed to Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard (FOCIS), Type MPO, FOCIS-5, TIA-604-5-C, AFL’s FuseConnect MPO performs as an equivalent to the standard factory FUSEConnect MPO Connectors, Cable terminated MPO/MTP® assemblies. Designed to utilize either ribbon or loose tube cable, this connector helps to minimize the complexity involved in the termination of a multi-fiber connection, allowing for a reliable and repeatable termination in field applications. FUSEConnect MPO is part of the FUSEConnect series splice-on connector which includes the SC, LC, ST and FC that require a fusion splicer and accessories for installations. The AFL FUSEConnect MPO Termination Kit specifically provides all the necessary accessories required for field termination of the FUSEConnect MPO.

Features Applications • Field installable splice-on connector • Connectorization in: • Only six components - RF-overlay FTTP networks • No adhesives, crimping or polishing - Cable TV backbone networks FUSEConnect MPO Connectors, Ribbon - Outside plant • TIA-568-C.3, IEC-61754-7, and - MDU FTTP Cabling TIA/EIA-604-5 FOCIS 5 Compliant • Connector restoration in the field • Field MPO polarity customization • Data center installation • Include 3.0 mm round and optical fiber ribbon flat boots in each pack • Patch cord customization in the field

Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Insertion Loss Single-mode (OS1) Average: 0.25 dB; Max: 0.75 dB 62.5/125 (OM1) Average: 0.10 dB; Max: 0.35 dB 50/125 (OM2) Average: 0.10 dB; Max: 0.35 dB 50/125 LO (OM3) Average: 0.10 dB; Max: 0.35 dB Return Loss Single-mode (OS1) > 65 dB 62.5/125 (OM1) > 30 dB 50/125 (OM2) > 30 dB 50/125 LO (OM3) > 30 dB Operating Temperature -40°C to +75°C

continued on next page

Fiber Optic Cable

FUSEConnect® MPO Fusion-Spliced, Field-Terminated Connectors

Ordering Information CABLE SIZE AFL NO.* CONNECTOR TYPE FIBER TYPE POLISH ROUND FLAT HOUSING COLOR FUSEMPO-SMA-3-M-6 MPO, Male (guide pins) Single-mode (OS1) APC 3.0 mm 250 µm Green FUSEMPO-SMA-3-F-6 MPO, Female (No Guide Pins) Single-mode (OS1) APC 3.0 mm 250 µm Green FUSEMPO-MM6-3-M-6 MPO, Male (guide pins) Multimode 62.5 µm (OM1) PC 3.0 mm 250 µm Beige FUSEMPO-MM6-3-F-6 MPO, Female (no guide pins) Multimode 62.5 µm (OM1) PC 3.0 mm 250 µm Beige FUSEMPO-MM5-3-M-6 MPO, Male (guide pins) Multimode 50 µm (OM2) PC 3.0 mm 250 µm Black FUSEMPO-MM5-3-F-6 MPO, Female (no guide pins) Multimode 50 µm (OM2) PC 3.0 mm 250 µm Black FUSEMPO-MM5L-3-M-6 MPO, Male (guide pins) Multimode 50 µm 10Gig (OM3) PC 3.0 mm 250 µm Aqua FUSEMPO-MM5L-3-F-6 MPO, Female (no guide pins) Multimode 50 µm 10Gig (OM3) PC 3.0 mm 250 µm Aqua *Pack of 6 pieces

Ordering Information – Accessories DESCRIPTION AFL NO. TOOL KIT FuseConnect MPO Tool Kit FUSEMPO-TL-KT ACCESSORIES FuseConnect Ribbonize Tool FUSE-RB-TL FuseConnect Stripping Tool (3.0 mm, 2.8 mm, 2.0 mm, and 1.6 mm) FUSE-ST-TL FuseConnect MPO Assembly Tool FUSE-AS-TL

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 © 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00059, Revision 1, 8.11.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 120 FUSEConnect® Tool Kit and Accessories The FUSEConnect tool kit provides all the necessary installation tools required for fiber preparation of 900 μm fiber, 2 mm or 3 mm cordage for AFL’s FUSEConnect Fusion Spliced Field Installable Connectors except for a fusion splicer and precision cleaver. Included in the kit are standard fiber preparation tools and cleaning supplies as well as a FUSEConnect accessory kit and cord splitter tool, which can be bought separately from the tool kit. The cord splitter tool is uniquely designed to open the cordage of FUSEConnect Tool Kit Contents 2 mm and 3 mm cable allowing the termination of the ST and FC type connectors on simplex cordage.

Applications Features • Premise environments • Industry standard fiber preparation tools • LAN Fiber to the Desk environments • Compact design, flexible yet rugged case • Patch panel/wiring closets • FTTx applications • Quick repair/replacement areas

Ordering Information FUSEConnect Accessory Kit DESCRIPTION AFL NO. FUSEConnect Tool Kit (includes items below) FUSE-TL-KT Tool Case CS001202 Fiber Stripper CS001205 Kevlar Scissors C095257 Lint-Free Wipes FM000413 Fiber Preparation Fluid FPF1-00-0900 Permanent Marker C015830 Cord Splitter Tool FUSE-ST-TL FUSEConnect Accessory Kit FUSE-AC-KT

FUSEConnect Accessory Kit (includes items below) FUSE-AC-KT Cord Splitter Tool Utility Storage Box CS012351 Clamp for holding 3 mm Simplex Cordage S014704 Clamp for holding 2 mm Simplex Cordage S014705 250 μm / 900 μm Fiber Clamp CS004442 3 mm FUSEConnect Fiber Holder S014695 2 mm FUSEConnect Fiber Holder S014696 900 μm FUSEConnect Fiber Holder S014697 CLAMP-S70D Sheath Clamp S015862 CLAMP-S60D Sheath Clamp (Left side) S014752

Cord Splitter Tool FUSE-ST-TL

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00145, Revision 2, 6.5.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 121 SpliceConnect with Tool Kit AFL’s SpliceConnect is a mechanical splice that provides an inexpensive, quick alternative to mating fibers. Using V-groove technology, this splice maintains physical contact between the fibers. An assembly tool is used to ensure the fibers are mated correctly, resulting in <0.1 dB insertion loss (typical for single-mode). The SpliceConnect secures both fiber and coating independently with the U-shaped sleeve, enhancing the strength against fiber twist.

Features Applications • Quick splicing time • Restoration • Minimal tools • Premise environments • 250 µm and/or 900 µm fiber capabilities • Fiber-to-the-Subscriber (FTTx) applications • Both fiber and coating are secured independently

Ordering Information DESCRIPTION AFL NO. SpliceConnect Mechanical Splices (Bag of 6) CS004154 SpliceConnect Mechanical Splice Tool Kit CS004162 Kit Includes: SpliceConnect Mechanical Splicing Tool CS004155 Fiber Holder, 250 µm x2 CS004442 Fiber Holder, 900 µm x2 CS004443 Instruction Manual CS004159 Carrying Case CS004161 Template, Strip/Cleave Length CS004573 SpliceConnect Mechanical Splicing Tool CS004155 Fiber Holder, 250 µm CS004442 Fiber Holder, 900 µm CS004443

Dimensions and Structure Clamping Force from U-Shaped Crimp 4 mm Clamping

Fiber 4 mm Fiber 40 mm V-groove Plate

Index Mating Gel

© 2007, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00104, Revision 3, 3.19.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 122 Buildout Attenuators Buildout attenuators provide superior performance for all single-mode in-line attenuation requirements. Standard attenuation values are 5, 10, 15, and 20 dB, available in SC, FC, ST, and LC connector styles. Using no air gap, filters, or light path discontinuities, attenuation is achieved by controlled absorption of light energy. This results in a polarization insensitive device with high power handling capability, environmentally stable, and exceptionally responsive, across a wide bandpass range.

Specifications Features PARAMETER VALUE Standard Attenuation Values 5, 10, 15 and 20 dB • SC, FC, ST, and LC connector styles Attenuation Tolerance Standard at 10% (Ultra & Angled Polish) Vibration resistance <0.1X attenuation value • Long-term reliability Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to +75°C Storage Temperature Range: -40°C to +85°C • Low ripple, wavelength independent attenuation • Certified to >125 mW continuous Ordering Information power handling capability with no OFA — — BO performance degradation • Polarization insensitive Connector 01DB SCA = SC/APC 02DB • Telcordia approved SCU = SC/UPC 03DB LCA = LC/APC 04DB LCU = LC/UPC 05DB Application STU = ST/UPC 06DB • Broadband Network FCA = FC/APC 07DB FCU = FC/UPC 08DB • Fiber in the Loop 09DB 10DB • Local Area Networks (LAN) 11DB • Long Haul Telecommunications 12DB (CLEC, CAPS) 13DB 14DB • Network Testing 15DB 16DB • Passive Optical Networks 17DB • Telco 18DB 19DB 20DB 21DB 22DB 23DB 24DB 25DB 26DB 27DB 28DB 29DB 30DB

Wideband Couplers The dual window Wideband Couplers (WBC) split or couple optical power in two wavelength regions while maintaining a very broad operating bandwidth. Split and coupling ratios are available from 5% to 50%. WBCs are widely considered one of the most cost-effective solutions to optical power management. The WBC is an all-fiber device, based on AFL’s fused biconic technology, and is designed and manufactured to meet military and Telcordia® requirements.

Specifications STANDARD AND PREMIUM GRADES Features PARAMETER VALUE • Dual window wideband operation Operating Wavelength 1310 nm + 50 and 1550 nm + 50 • Low insertion loss over entire band- Return Loss 55 dB width and temperature (typical IL Directivity 55 dB change <±0.1 dB) Package Dimension 3.2 mm (dia.) x 55 mm (L) Operating Temperature -40° to +85°C • Ultra-low PDL and temperature sensitivity Storage Temperature -40° to +85°C • High directivity • Compact design Ordering Information • Environmentally stable, over 10 years SINGLE-MODE PREMIUM GRADE SPECIFICATIONS (MAX. INSERTION LOSS AND MAX. PDL) of proven field reliability SPECIFICATIONS (DB) RATIO AFL NO. • Standard operating temperature range PRIMARY/SECONDARY PORT PDL (DB) -4O°C to +85°C 50/50 3.6/3.6 0.15 C198364-P • Fully tested to Telcordia 1209 and 55/45 3.2/4.1 0.15 C198358-P 1221 criteria 60/40 2.7/4.7 0.14 C198353-P 65/35 2.3/5.3 0.14 C198349-P 67/33 2.2/5.7 0.14 C198904-P Applications 70/30 2.0/6.0 0.13 C198346-P • Telecommunications 75/25 1.8/6.8 0.13 C198340-P • CATV 80/20 1.3/7.8 0.10 C198335-P 85/15 1.0/9.2 0.10 C198331-P • LAN 90/10 0.8/11.2 0.10 C198328-P • Monitoring of Networks 95/5 0.5/14.4 0.10 C198322-P

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00110, Revision 2, 5.24.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 124 Ruggedized Wideband Couplers Enhancing AFL’s wideband coupler offering are two package styles for ruggedized versions of these reliable, standardized couplers – 3 mm and 900 µm furcated pigtail options and a variety of connector styles are offered in both single-mode and multimode applications. All AFL couplers conform to stringent environmental and mechanical standards to provide high reliablity in a variety of customer applications.

Features Applications • Dual window wideband operation • Telecommunications • Low insertion loss • CATV • Low PDL • LAN • High Directivity • Fiber in the Loop • Long term field application • Network monitoring • Environmentally stable over range of -40°C to +85°C

Ordering Information

T 0102 50 S ASC 01 ASC 01

Package Type Split Ratio Configuration Input Connector Input Pigtail Output Connector/ Output Pigtail T = 900 µm Diameter Leads 50 = 50/50% S = Single-mode Options Length (M) Adapter Length (M) 3 = 3 mm Diameter Leads 45 = 45/55% M = Multimode ASC = Angle SC (Examples) ASC = Angle SC (Examples) AFC = Angle FC 01 = 1 meter AFC = Angle FC 01 = 1 meter Output Leads 40 = 40/60% USC = Ultra SC 02 = 2 meters USC = Ultra SC 02 = 2 meters 0102 = 1 x 2 35 = 35/65% 30 = 30/70% UFC = Ultra FC UFC = Ultra FC 25 = 25/75% SST = Super ST SST = Super ST 20 = 20/80% ULC = Ultra LC ULC = Ultra LC 15 = 15/85% 000 = Non-connectorized 000 = Non-connectorized 10 = 10/90% 5 = 5/95%

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00100, Revision 1, 5.24.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 125 Wavelength Division Multiplexer Couplers The WDM separates or combines wavelengths in the 1310 and 1550 nm bands over an ultra-wide bandwidth (+ 20 nm) and temperature range while maintaining excellent stability and optical performance. The device, which is fabricated using an advanced fused biconical taper technology, is designed to meet Telcordia® 1209 and 1221 requirements.

Specifications (Single-Mode Premium)

PARAMETER VALUE Model Number S004794 Configuration 1 x 2 Features Wavelength 1310 / 1550 nm • Low insertion loss Directivity <-65 dB • Ultra-wide bandwidth Operating Temperature -40º to +85ºC Typical Temperature Stability <0.1 dB • Wide operating temperature Typical Polarization Stability (passband) <0.1 dB • Low PDL Isolation 20 dB • Highly stable and reliable *Isolation of 32 dB and higher not available in 63 mm L or 69 mm L x 3 mm OD • Epoxy-free optical path

Applications • Telecommunications • CATV • Fiber Optic Sensors and Instruments • Subscriber Loops • Military Systems, Fiber Optic Gyros • FTTH

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00109, Revision 1, 5.24.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 126 Planar Couplers The Planar Coupler provides the uniform division of an optical signal by having one input port and multiple output ports. Compact packaging and stable optical parameters allow these couplers to be integrated into Telecommunications, Local Area Network (LAN), and Cable Television (CATV) networks.

Specifications PARAMETER VALUE AFL NO. CM000034 CM000033 C198299 CS001470 Operating Wavelength (Grade) 1260-1360 nm and 1480-1580 nm (Standard) Features Optical Split Ratio 1 x 4 1 x 8 1 x 16 1 x 32 Maximum Insertion Loss (dB) 7.5 11.0 14.2 17.8 • Low insertion loss Typical Insertion Loss (dB) 7.3 10.8 13.9 17.5 • Compact design Maximum Uniformity (dB) 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 Typical Uniformity (dB) 0.8 0.8 1.3 1.8 • Stable optical performance PDL (dB) <0.3 <0.3 <0.4 <0.4 • Dual Window (1310 & 1550 nm) Return Loss (dB) >55 >55 >55 >55 • Low insertion loss Directivity (dB) >55 >55 >55 >55 • Low back reflection Fiber Type SMF28e 250 µm equivalent Input/Output Fiber Length 1 meter 1.5 meters 1.5 meters 1.5 meters • High output uniformity Operating Temperature -40° to +85°C • Telecordia® GR-1029 and Package Dimensions (LxWxH) (mm) 40 x 4 x 4 40 x 4 x 4 40 x 4 x 4 50 x 6.5 x 4 GR-1221 qualified

Applications • Telecommunications Networks • Datacom • LAN & CATV Networks • FTTH, FTTB, & FTTC

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00097, Revision 1, 5.24.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 127 Optical Coupler Modules The optical coupler module offers management of optical power and wavelength, packaged in the LGX® design. Each module is comprised of Telcordia®-compliant PLC or concatenated fused biconic components. Once assembled and terminated, the module is fully tested for environmental, mechanical, and optical integrity.

Features • Telcordia GR-1209 & GR-1221 compliant • Optical bandpass: 1310 ± 40 nm / • Telcordia GR-326 compliant connectors 1550 ± 40 nm and adapters • RoHS compliant • Telcordia GR-20 compliant singlemode • Packaged individually / tamper-proof seal optical fiber Applications • CATV Specifications • Telco VALUE • Wide Area Networks Single-mode • Fiber Monitoring Systems PARAMETER Ultra Angled Return Loss (Minimum dB) > -45 > -50 • Military systems Directivity > -55 Operating Temperature/ Relative Humidity -40 to +85°C / 90% Storage Temperature/ Relative Humidity -40 to +85°C / 90%

Ordering Information OUTPUT PORT INSERTION LOSS INSERTION LOSS COUPLING RATIO (PORT) (IL) PORT 01 (IL) PORT 02

I/O PORTS I/O CONN AFL NO. 01 02 TYP MAX TYP MAX 1 x 2 USC CM000165 50 50 3.3 4.0 3.3 4.0 1 x 2 USC CM000166 40 60 4.3 5.2 2.5 3.3 1 x 2 USC CM000167 30 70 5.5 6.4 1.5 2.4 1 x 2 USC CM000168 20 80 7.3 8.3 1.3 1.8 1 x 2 USC CM000169 10 90 10.3 11.5 0.8 1.1 1 x 2 USC CM000170 5 95 13.3 14.6 0.5 0.8 1 x 2 ASC CM000171 50 50 3.3 4.0 3.3 4.0 1 x 2 ASC CM000172 40 60 4.3 5.2 2.5 3.3 1 x 2 ASC CM000173 30 70 5.5 6.4 1.5 2.4 1 x 2 ASC CM000174 20 80 7.3 8.3 1.3 1.8 1 x 2 ASC CM000175 10 90 10.3 11.5 0.8 1.1 1 x 2 ASC CM000176 5 95 13.3 14.6 0.5 0.8 1 x 2 ULC CM000315 50 50 3.3 4.0 3.3 4.0 1 x 2 ULC CM000325 40 60 4.3 5.2 2.5 3.3 1 x 2 ULC CM000323 30 70 5.5 6.4 1.5 2.4 1 x 2 ULC CM000321 20 80 7.3 8.3 1.3 1.8 1 x 2 ULC CM000319 10 90 10.3 11.5 0.8 1.1 1 x 2 ULC CM000317 5 95 13.3 14.6 0.5 0.8 1 x 2 ALC CM000310 50 50 3.3 4.0 3.3 4.0 1 x 2 ALC CM000324 40 60 4.3 5.2 2.5 3.3 1 x 2 ALC CM000322 30 70 5.5 6.4 1.5 2.4 1 x 2 ALC CM000320 20 80 7.3 8.3 1.3 1.8 1 x 2 ALC CM000318 10 90 10.3 11.5 0.8 1.1 1 x 2 ALC CM000316 5 95 13.3 14.6 0.5 0.8

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Ordering Information (cont.)

OUTPUT PORT INSERTION LOSS COUPLING RATIO (PORT) PORT 01 PORT 02 PORT 03

I/O PORTS I/O CONN AFL NO. 01 02 03 TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX 1 x 3 USC CM000177 33.0 33.0 33.0 5.1 6.2 5.1 6.2 5.1 6.2 1 x 3 ASC CM000178 33.0 33.0 33.0 5.1 6.2 5.1 6.2 5.1 6.2 1 x 3 ULC CM000326 33.0 33.0 33.0 5.1 6.2 5.1 6.2 5.1 6.2 1 x 3 ALC CM000311 33.0 33.0 33.0 5.1 6.2 5.1 6.2 5.1 6.2

OUTPUT PORT INSERTION LOSS COUPLING RATIO (PORT) PORT 01 PORT 02 PORT 03 PORT 04

I/O PORTS I/O CONN AFL NO. 01 02 03 04 TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX 1 x 4 USC CM000179 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 6.3 7.7 6.3 7.7 6.3 7.7 6.3 7.7 1 x 4 ASC CM000180 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 6.3 7.7 6.3 7.7 6.3 7.7 6.3 7.7 1 x 4 ULC CM000327 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 6.3 7.7 6.3 7.7 6.3 7.7 6.3 7.7 1 x 4 ALC CM000312 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 6.3 7.7 6.3 7.7 6.3 7.7 6.3 7.7

OUTPUT PORT INSERTION LOSS COUPLING RATIO (PORT) PORT 01 PORT 02 PORT 03 PORT 04 I/O I/O PORTS CONN AFL NO. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX 1 x 8 USC CM000181 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 1 x 8 ASC CM000182 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 1 x 8 ULC CM000346 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 1 x 8 ALC CM000347 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4

OUTPUT PORT INSERTION LOSS COUPLING RATIO (PORT) PORT 05 PORT 06 PORT 07 PORT 08 I/O I/O PORTS CONN AFL NO. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX 1 x 8 USC CM000181 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 1 x 8 ASC CM000182 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 1 x 8 ULC CM000346 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 1 x 8 ALC CM000347 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4 9.3 11.4

Insertion loss (IL) includes connector loss and Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) across operating temperature over the Optical Bandpass. *** Additional split ratios available upon request.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00091, Revision 5, 9.10.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 129 Optical Splitter Shelf The LightLink LanSystem™ Optical Splitter Shelf provides a convenient in-rack solution to combine/split optical signals in a passive optical network. With 1x16, 1x32 and 2x32 options available, the splitter shelf also features a Planar Lightwave Circuit (PLC) allowing a signal to be split into either 16 or 32 channels in a 1U rack-mountable housing. The 2x32 option provides a filter WDM concatenated to a PLC, which allows 1310/1490/1550 nm signal management evenly across 32 channels.

Features Applications • Telcordia® GR-63 NEBS tested housing • PON-FTTx Networks • Aluminum Material per ASTMB209 • CATV links • Universal Mounting Bracket WECO, EIA • DWDM & CWDM systems • 19" and 23" Rack Mountable • Wide area networks • Rugged construction, ensuring • Outside plant requirements environmental, mechanical and optical integrity • WDM and PLC fully compliant to Telcordia GR-1209 and GR-1221 • Low Excess loss • Low Polarization Dependent Loss

Specifications PARAMETER 1x16 1x32 2x32 Insertion Loss 13.5 ~ 14.3 dB 17.5 - 18.5 dB 17.5 - 19 dB Uniformity 1.5 dB Typical 1.8 dB Typical 1.8 dB Typical PDL ≤ 0.3 dB <0.45 dB <0.45 dB Return Loss ≥ 55 dB ≥ 55 dB ≥ 40 dB Directivity ≥ 55 dB ≥ 55 dB ≥ 50 dB Fiber Type SMF-28e SMF-28e SMF-28e Operating Temp -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +70°C Storage Temp -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +85°C Operating 1260 ~ 1650 1260 ~ 1650 1550 nm Band - Port 1 (Pass) 1550 - 1560 nm Bandwidth 1310 + 1490 nm - Port 2 (Reflect) 1260-1360 nm & 1480-1500 nm

Ordering Information DESCRIPTION AFL NO. 1x16 Optical Splitter Shelf, ASC inputs/outputs, 1U, textured White FM001000 1x32 Optical Splitter Shelf, ASC inputs/outputs, 1U, textured White FM000775 2x32 Optical Splitter Shelf, ASC inputs/outputs, 1U, textured White FM000622

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2006, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00094, Revision 4, 10.10.12 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 130 Optical FTTx Coupler Module AFL’s Optical FTTx Coupler Module is designed to satisfy requirements utilizing 1550 nm bandwidths in FTTx applications and is specified for FTTx video install-ations. The module features a compact footprint with adapter ports consisting of SC/APC adapter outputs.

Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Performance Wavelength 1540-1560 nm Insertion Loss 1550 < 3.9 dB PDL <0.2 dB PMD < 0.05 ps Return Loss > 55 dB Directivity > 55 dB Operating Temperature -40 to +75°C Storage Temperature -40 to +85 °C Relative Humidity 0 to 90% Optical Power 500 mW

PACKAGING Packaging Size Standard Single Width LGX® Rack Module Fiber Type Low-Water-Peak Non-Dispersion Shifted SMF-28e Connector Type All ports – SC/APC, Green

Ordering Information DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Optical FTTx Coupler Module CM000072

Dimensions

29.00 mm 84.60 mm 1.14" 3.33"

171.00 mm 155.60 mm 6.73" 6.13"

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

© 2004, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00092, Revision 2, 5.24.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 131 Optical FTTx WDM Module The Optical FTTx WDM Module is designed to satisfy requirements utilizing 1310, 1490 and 1550 nm bandwidths in FTTx applications. The module features a compact footprint with adapter ports consisting of SC (UPC or APC) outputs.

Specifications PARAMETER VALUE 1550 Band – Port 1 (Pass) 1550-1560 nm 1310 + 1490 Band – Port 2 (Reflect) 1260-1360 & 1480-1500 nm Insertion Loss 1550 < 1.2 dB 1310 + 1490 < 1.2 dB Isolation 1550 > 25 dB 1310 + 1490 > 20 dB PDL <0.2 dB PMD < 0.2 ps Return Loss > 50 dB Directivity > 50 dB Operating Temperature -40 to +75°C Storage Temperature -40 to +85°C Relative Humidity 0 to 90% Optical Power 500 mW PACKAGING Packaging Size Standard Single Width LGX® Rack Module Fiber Type Low-Water-Peak Non-Dispersion Shifted SMF-28e Connector Type Port 3 (Common) – SC/APC Port 1 (Data) – SC/UPC Port 2 (Video) – SC/APC

Ordering Information AFL NO. DESCRIPTION CM000043 Optical FTTx WDM Module

Dimensions

29.00 mm 84.60 mm 1.14" 3.33"

171.00 mm 155.60 mm 6.73" 6.13"

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

© 2004, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00093, Revision 2, 5.24.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 132 RFoG WDM Module The RFOG WDM module is designed to satisfy wavelength management requirements where 1310, 1490, 1550, 1590 / 1610 nm wavelengths are used in passive optical network applications. This unit is available in traditional LGX® module packaging with virtually all connector options supported. Also available is a high density platform delivering unsurpassed ports per rack unit for applications requiring the most efficient use of available rack space.

Specifications

PARAMETER UNIT SPECIFICATION Features MIN MAX • Flexible packaging options Wavelength Range 1310 Band nm 1270 1350 • Low Excess Loss 1490 Band 1480 1500 1550 Band 1540 1570 • Low PDL 1590/1610 Band 1584.5 1620 • Monitoring / Tap ports available Insertion Loss 1310+1490 Port dB - 1.2 • RoHS compliant 1550 Port 1.4 1590/1610 Port 1.5 Band Isolation 1310/1490 Port @ 1550 dB 40 Applications 1310/1490 Port @ 40 • PON - FTTx Networks 1590/1610 • Access Networks 1550 Port @ 1310/1490 30 1550 Port @ 1590 15 • CATV Links 1590/1610 Port @ 35 1310/1490/1550 Wavelength Thermal Stability nm/°C 0.002 Directivity dB 50 PDL dB 0.15 PMD ps 0.10 Return Loss dB 45 Optical Power Handling mW 300

Environmental Specifications

PARAMETER UNIT SPECIFICATION Operation Temperature °C -5 ~ +70 Operation Humidity %RH 5 ~ 95 not condensed Storage Temperature °C -40 ~ +85 Storage Humidity %RH 0 ~ 95 not condensed

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. FILTER WDM,1310+1490/1550+1590/1610,SC/APC CM000150 DUAL FILTER WDM,1310+1490/1550+1590/1610,LC/APC CM000151 * Additional configuration available upon request. Contact AFL Customer Service.

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

© 2010, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00099, Revision 1, 5.24.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 133 LGX® FTTx Splitter Modules The PON / FTTx splitters provide a convenient in-rack solution to combine or split optical signals in an optical network. Based on PLC technology, these modules offer the network operator high port-to-port uniformity and low insertion loss, as well as a wide operating wavelength range to accommodate future growth needs with new and emerging optical technologies. These products are available in LGX compatible modules.

Features Applications •• Low excess loss •• PON - FTTx Networks •• Low polarization dependent loss •• Access Networks •• Flexible LGX packaging options •• CATV Links (*see ordering information below •• Wide Area Networks for product size information) •• Telcordia® GR-1209 or GR-1221 compliant •• SC/APC Connectors

Performance Specifications

PARAMETER 1X4 1X8 1X16 1X32 Insertion Loss (dB) * <7.4 <10.5 <13.9 <17.2 Uniformity (dB) *, ** <0.5 <0.8 <1.1 <1.5 PDL (dB) *, ** <0.3 Return Loss (dB) >55 Directivity (dB) >55 Operating Temperature (°C) -40 to +85 Storage Temperature (°C) -40 to +85 Package LGX, 1 Slot LGX, 2 Slot LGX, 3 Slot LGX, 3 Slot

*Operating wavelength range (1260-1650 nm) guaranteed by design. Test report provided at 1310 and 1550 nm. ** Value does not include connector loss.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. 1x4 Optical Splitter Module, 1260~1650 nm, Single slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000474 1x8 Optical Splitter Module, 1260~1650 nm, Dual slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000475 1x16 Optical Splitter Module, 1260~1650 nm, Triple slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000476 1x32 Optical Splitter Module, 1260~1650 nm, Triple slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000477

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00083, Revision 0, 3.15.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 134134 LGX® FTTx WDM Modules The FTTx WDM Modules are designed to satisfy 1310, 1490 and 1550 nm wavelength management requirements in FTTx passive optical networks. Based on proven thin-film filter technology, these modules offer low overall insertions loss, high wavelength thermal stability and high band isolation, all of which add to network reliability. These products are available in LGX compatible modules of scaling density to meet varying density objectives.

Features Applications • Low excess loss • PON - FTTx Networks • Low polarization dependent loss • Access Networks • Flexible LGX packaging options • CATV Links (*see ordering information below for • Wide Area Networks product size and density information) • Telcordia® GR-1209 or GR-1221 compliant • SC/APC Connectors

Performance Specifications

PARAMETER UNIT SPECIFICATION MINIMUM MAXIMUM 1310 Band nm 1260 1360 Wavelength Range 1490 Band nm 1480 1500 1550 Band nm 1550 1560 1310+1490 Port dB 1.2 Insertion Loss 1550 Port dB 1.4 1310/1490 Port @ 1550 dB 40 Band Isolation 1550 @ 1310/1490 Port dB 30 Wavelength Thermal Stability nm/°C 0.002 Directivity dB 50 PDL dB 0.15 PMD ps 0.1 Return Loss dB 45 Optical Power Level mW 300 Operation Temperature °C -5 to 70 Operation Humidity %RH 5 to 90 Storage Temperature °C 40 to 85 Storage Humidity %RH 0 to 95

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. PON WDM Module, 1X, 1310/1490+1550, Single slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000478 PON WDM Module, 2X, 1310/1490+1550, Single slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000479 PON WDM Module, 4X, 1310/1490+1550, Dual slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000480 PON WDM Module, 6X, 1310/1490+1550, Triple slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000481

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00084, Revision 1, 5.26.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 135135 Dense WDM (DWDM) Modules AFL’s Dense WDM modules (DWDM) are designed using proven thin-film filter technology featuring low insertion loss, high isolation, and superior environmental stability. DWDM modules are available in 2, 4, 8, and 16 channel configurations, with 100 GHz and 200 GHz spaced central wavelength options on the ITU-T Grid in the C-Band (1528 nm-1568 nm) and L-Band (1568 nm-1610 nm). All DWDM modules are factory assembled in a thin cassette package or a rugged LGX® cassette with most common industry standard connector options to meet varying system requirements.

Features Applications • Telcordia® qualified components • CATV Systems • 100 GHz & 200 GHz ITU-T channel spacing • Sensor Systems • 2, 4, 8 and 16 channel configurations • 10G Ethernet Systems Double-width LGX 118 package shown • Most industry standard connectors • Metro Optical Networks • Low insertion loss • Metro Access Networks • High isolation • Epoxy-free optical path

Specifications VALUE PARAMETER UNIT 100 GHZ DWDM 200 GHZ DWDM Ports 2 4 8 16 2 4 8 16 Center Wavelength nm 1531-1561 (CH. 20-58) 1530-1560 (CH. 21-59) Passband @ 0.5 dB nm >0.25 >0.6 Passband nm ±0.11 ±0.25 Passband Flatness dB <0.5 <0.5 Insertion Loss (Typ.) dB 1.4 1.6 2.6 3.8 1.4 1.6 2.6 3.8 Insertion Loss (Max.) dB 1.8 2.0 3.2 4.5 1.8 2.0 3.2 4.5 Adjacent Channel Isolation dB >25 >25 Non-Adjacent Channel Isolation dB >45 >45 Wavelength Thermal Stability nm/°C <0.001 <0.002 IL Thermal Stability db/°C <0.005 <0.005 <0.007 <0.007 <0.005 <0.005 <0.007 <0.007 Return Loss dB >45 >45 PMD ps <0.10 <0.10 <0.10 <0.15 <0.10 <0.10 <0.10 <0.15 PDL dB <0.10 <0.20 <0.20 <0.25 <0.10 <0.20 <0.20 <0.25 Directivity dB >50 >50 Operation Temperature °C -5 to +65 -5 to +65 Storage Temperature °C -40 to +85 -40 to +85 LGX 118 Package Single-width Single-width Double-width Triple-width Single-width Single-width Double-width Triple-width Thin Cassette Package mm 88.9x50.8x8.3 120x80x13 130x87x13 150x115x13 88.9x50.8x8.3 120x80x13 130x87x13 150x115x13

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Ordering Information

DWDM — 04 — 5 — 1 — 20 — 24 — ASC — ISP

Channel Count Package/Pigtail Spacing Start Channel End Channel Connectors 02 = 2 Channel 1 = Thin Cassette, 1 = 100 GHz 20 21 ASC = SC/APC 04 = 4 Channel 1 Meter Pigtail 2 = 200 GHz 21 22 USC = SC/UPC 08 = 8 Channel 3 = Thin Cassette, 22 23 ALC = LC/APC 3 Meter Pigtail 23 24 16 = 16 Channel ULC = LC/UPC 5 = Thin Cassette, 24 25 5 Meter Pigtail 25 26 X = No connectors L = LGX 118 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 51 51 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 56 56 57 57 58 58 59

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00050, Revision 1, 5.24.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 137 Coarse WDM Modules (CWDM) AFL’s Coarse WDM modules are designed using proven thin-film filter technology providing high isolation, 20nm channel separation and a high level of thermal stability. CWDM modules are available in 2, 4, 8, and 16 channel configurations and are factory assembled in a thin cassette or rugged LGX® cassette with industry standard connector options to meet varying system requirements. An optional 1310 nm Mux/Demux Upgrade Port is available to allow seamless integration of legacy voice, video, and data services.

Specifications PARAMETER UNIT VALUE Ports 2 4 8 16 Center Wavelength nm 1271-1611 Passband @ 0.5 dB nm > 14 Passband nm ± 6.5 Double-width LGX 118 package shown Passband Flatness dB < 0.5 Insertion Loss (Typ.) dB 1.4 1.6 1.8 4.3 Features Insertion Loss (Max.) dB 1.8 2.0 2.5 5.0 Adjacent Channel Isolation dB > 30 • Telcordia® qualified components Non-Adjacent Channel Isola- dB > 45 • 20 nm channel spacing tion Wavelength Thermal Stability nm/°C < 0.002 • 2, 4, 8, and 16 channel configurations IL Thermal Stability db/°C < 0.005 < 0.005 < 0.007 < 0.008 • Most industry standard connectors Return Loss dB > 45 • Low insertion loss PMD ps < 0.10 < 0.10 < 0.15 < 0.15 PDL dB < 0.10 < 0.15 < 0.20 < 0.25 • High isolation Directivity dB > 50 • Custom configurations upon request Operation Temperature °C -5 to +65 Storage Temperature °C -40 to +85 LGX 118 Package Single-width Single-width Double-width Triple-width Applications Thin Cassette Package mm 88.9 x 50.8 x 8.3 120 x 80 x 13 130 x 87 x 13 150 x 115 x 13 • CATV Systems Options 2% Tap, 1310 Upgrade • Sensor Systems 1310 Channel Wavelength nm 1260-1360 1310 Channel Isolation dB 40 minimum • 10G Ethernet Systems 1310 Channel Insertion Loss dB 1.3 maximum • Metro Optical Networks * Includes Connectors • Metro Access Networks

Ordering Information

CWDM — 04 — 5 — 1271 — 1331 — B — ASC — ISP

Channel Count Package/Pigtail Start Wavelength (nm) End Wavelength (nm) Options Connectors 02 = 2 Channel 1 = Thin Cassette, 1271 1291 U = 1310 Upgrade Port ASC = SC/APC 04 = 4 Channel 1 Meter Pigtail 1291 1311 T = 2% Tap Port USC = SC/UPC 1311 1331 08 = 8 Channel 3 = Thin Cassette, 1331 X = No Option ALC = LC/APC 3 Meter Pigtail 1351 16 = 16 Channel 1351 1371 B = 1310 Upgrade Port ULC = LC/UPC 5 = Thin Cassette, 1371 1391 and 2% Tap Port 5 Meter Pigtail 1391 1411 X = No connectors L = LGX 118 1411 1431 1431 1451 1451 1471 1471 1491 1491 1511 1511 1531 1531 1551 1551 1571 1571 1591 LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. 1591 1611

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightLink LANSystem 1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel The AFL 1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 36 fibers is desired. The panel design is based on a 1 rack unit height and is provisioned with three LGX® 118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM® optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein. Standard 1RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly. Standard 1RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and splice trays.

Features Applications • Fits comfortably into new and existing • Telecommunications closets interconnect, cross-connect, customer • Data Centers premise, and co-location environments • Customer Premise • Most common connector styles and • LAN / WAN Networks types available • Central Offices / Headends • Compatible with industry standard • Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals equipment frames • FTTH / FTTB Networks • Modular design • Slide-out tray with relief cut-outs Specifications for simplified connector access • Designed around Telcordia® GR-63NEBS • Optional splice tray kit for on site • Aluminum construction per ASTMB209 conversion to patch and splice panel • Durable textured powder coat finish • Optional front door key lock for heightened available in black or white protection of internal components • Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility • Standard density: up to 18-fiber Dimensions • High density: up to 36-fiber DEPTH (A) WIDTH (B) HEIGHT (C) RACK UNLOADED IN INCHES IN INCHES IN INCHES UNITS CAPACITY WEIGHT • LGX 118 compatible 13.51 17.00 1.75 1 18 / 36 4 lbs. • Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward • 1RU Patch and Splice Panel holds up to three splice tray kits

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00069, Revision 5, 3.5.14 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 139 LightLink LANSystem 1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel Loading Cable Stub Ordering Information AFL NO. Color Charactor Length (M) Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, FM001344 B S 0010 and choose the loading character desired. W = White E = Empty 0002 = 2 meters B = Black H = Half-loaded with adapters 0004 = 4 meters When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required L = Loaded with adapters and etc. pigtails (Patch and Splice in meters. only) S = Preterminated with tight Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC). buffered CPC cable stub (Riser) (Patch only) R = Preterminated with OSP loose tube cable stub (Patch only)

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 12 PSC adapters (2 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.

Ordering Information Accessories

CONFIGURATION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. CON012P—1 RU PATCH PANELS—12 FIBERS—LGX118 Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel Standard Density FM002826-1 EMPTY FM001038 (1 splice tray) 12 PSC adapters (2 Six Packs) FM001344 Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel High Density FM002826-2 (2 splice trays) 12 UST adapters (2 Six Packs) FM001346 Ribbon Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel Standard FM002826-1R 12 PST adapters (2 Six Packs) FM001347 Density (1 splice tray) 6 UDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs) FM001353 Ribbon Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel High Density FM002826-2R 6 PDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs) FM001354 (2 splice trays) 12 ASC adapters (2 Six Packs) FM001352 Kit, Lock, for CON/CNS Panels FM001318 12 UFC adapters (2 Six Packs) FM001349 12 USC (ZR) adapters (2 Six Packs) FM001351 12 AFC adapters (2 Six Packs) FM001350 Connector/Adapter Key CON024HD—1 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS—24 FIBERS—LGX118 TYPE DESCRIPTION 24 UST adapters (2 Twelve Packs) FM001355 ASC SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 24 PST adapters (2 Twelve Packs) FM001356 ASF SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 12 PDL (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs) FM001348 PSC SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 12 USF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs) FM001357 PSF SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM 12 ASF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs) FM001358 USC (PB) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM USC (ZR) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM CNS012P—1U PATCH AND SPLICE PANELS—12 FIBERS—LGX118 USF SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM EMPTY FM001328 PST ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 12 PSC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM001323 UST ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 12 UST adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM001329 AFC FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 12 PST adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM001325 PFC FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 6 UDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs), Splice Tray FM001334 UFC FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 6 PDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs), Splice Tray FM001335 ADL LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 12 ASC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM001333 PDL LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM 12 UFC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM001330 PLC LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 12 USC (ZR) adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM001332 UDL (ZR) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 12 AFC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM001331 UDL (PB) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM CNS024HD—1 RU HIGH-DENSITY PATCH & SPLICE PANELS—24 FIBERS—LGX118 ULC LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 24 UST adapters (2 Twelve Packs), Splice Tray FM001336 24 PST adapters (2 Twelve Packs), Splice Tray FM001337 Notes: 1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified. 12 USF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM001338 2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration. 12 ASF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM001339

LightLink LANSystem 2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel The AFL 2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 72 fibers is desired. The panel design is based on a 2 rack unit height and is provisioned with three LGX® 118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein. Standard 2RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly. Standard 2RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and splice trays.

Features Applications • Fits comfortably into new and existing • Telecommunications closets interconnect, cross-connect, customer • Data Centers premise, and co-location environments • Customer Premise Specifications • Most common connector styles and • LAN / WAN Networks types available • Designed around Telcordia® GR-63NEBS • Central Offices / Headends • Compatible with industry standard • Aluminum construction per ASTMB209 • Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals equipment frames • Durable textured powder coat finish • FTTH / FTTB Networks • Modular design available in black or white • Slide-out tray with relief cut-outs for • Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility simplified connector access • Standard density: up to 36 fiber • Optional splice tray kit for on site • High density: up to 72 fiber conversion to patch and splice panel • LGX 118 compatible • Optional front door key lock for height- • Standard cable stub location ened protection of internal components is right rear exiting upward • 2RU Patch and Splice Panel holds Dimensions up to four splice tray kits DEPTH (A) WIDTH (B) HEIGHT(C) RACK UNLOADED IN INCHES IN INCHES IN INCHES UNITS CAPACITY WEIGHT 13.51 17.00 3.50 2 36 / 72* 5 lbs.

* 72 fiber capacity not available in Patch and Splice configuration.

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Loading Cable Stub AFL NO. Color Charactor Length (M) Ordering Information FM001411 B S 0010 Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, and choose the loading character desired. W = White E = Empty 0002 = 2 meters B = Black H = Half-loaded with adapters 0004 = 4 meters L = Loaded with adapters and etc. When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required pigtails (Patch and Splice in meters. only) S = Preterminated with tight buffered CPC cable stub Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC). (Riser) (Patch only) R = Preterminated with OSP loose tube cable stub (Patch only)

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 24 PSC adapters (4 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.

Ordering Information Accessories CONFIGURATION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. CON024P—2 RU PATCH PANELS—24 FIBERS—LGX118 Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (1 splice tray) FM002827-1 EMPTY FM001029 Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (2 splice trays) FM002827-2 24 PSC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX (Beige) FM001433 Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (3 splice trays) FM002827-3 24 UST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX FM001434 Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (4 splice trays) FM002827-4 24 PST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX FM001435 Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon FM002827-1R 12 UDL (dup) adapters (4 Three Packs) 118 LGX (Blue) FM001441 (1 splice tray) 12 PDL (dup) adapters (4 Three Packs) 118 LGX (Beige) FM001442 Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon FM002827-2R (2 splice trays) 24 ASC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX (Green) FM001439 Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon FM002827-3R 24 UFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX FM001436 (3 splice trays) 24 USC (ZR) adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX (Blue) FM001438 Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon FM002827-4R 24 AFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX FM001437 (4 splice trays) Kit, Lock, for CON / CNS Panels FM001318

CNS024P—2U PATCH AND SPLICE PANELS—24 FIBERS—LGX118 EMPTY FM001414 Connector/Adapter Key 24 PSC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM001411 TYPE DESCRIPTION 24 UST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM001412 ASC SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 24 PST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM001413 ASF SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 12 UDL (dup) adapters (4 three Packs)118 LGX , Splice tray FM001419 PSC SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 12 PDL (dup) adapters (4 three Packs)118 LGX , Splice tray FM001420 PSF SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM 24 ASC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM001418 USC (PB) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM 24 UFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM001415 USC (ZR) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 24 USC (ZR) adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM001417 USF SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 24 AFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM001416 PST ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM UST ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

Notes: AFC FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified. PFC FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration. UFC FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM ADL LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM PDL LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM PLC LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM UDL (ZR) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM UDL (PB) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM ULC LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LightLink LANSystem 3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel The AFL 3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 96 fibers is desired. The panel design is based on a 3 rack unit height with a master plate that is provisioned with nine LGX® 118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM® optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein. Standard 3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly.

Specifications Features Applications ® • Telcordia GR-63 NEBS Tested • Fits comfortably into new and existing • Telecommunications closets • Aluminum construction per ASTMB209 interconnect, cross-connect, customer • Data Centers • Durable textured powder coat finish premise, and co-location environments • Customer Premise available in black or white • Most common connector styles and • LAN / WAN Networks • Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility types available • Central Offices / Headends • Standard density: up to 48-fiber • Compatible with industry standard • Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals • High density: up to 96-fiber equipment frames • FTTH / FTTB Networks • LGX 118 compatible • LGX compatible master plate (118 mm) • Standard cable stub location is right • Modular design rear exiting upward • Provides maximum protection of optical components

Dimensions

DEPTH (A) WIDTH (B) HEIGHT (C) RACK FIBER UNLOADED MATERIAL IN INCHES IN INCHES IN INCHES UNITS CAPACITY WEIGHT GAUGE 11.00 17.00 5.25 3 48/96 8.4 lbs. 2.03 mm

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Ordering Information Loading Cable Stub AFL NO. Color Charactor Length (M) Select the seven digit AFL part number you need, specify black C211291 B S 0010 or white, and choose the loading character desired. W = White E = Empty 0002 = 2 meters B = Black H = Half-loaded with adapters 0004 = 4 meters When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required S = Preterminated with tight etc. buffered CPC cable stub in meters. (Riser) (Patch only) R = Preterminated with OSP loose tube cable stub Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC). (Patch only)

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 48 PSC adapters (8 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.

Configuration Part Numbers All cable clamps offered separately so that customers may choose the correct clamp for their application. Connector/Adapter Key CONFIGURATION AFL NO. TYPE DESCRIPTION CON048P—3 RU PATCH PANELS—48 FIBERS—LGX118 ASC SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM EMPTY C211291 ASF SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 48 USC (PB) adapters (8 Six Packs) C211300 PSC SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 48 PSC adapters (8 Six Packs) C211309 PSF SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM USC (PB) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM 48 UST adapters (8 Six Packs) C211336 USC (ZR) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 48 PST adapters (8 Six Packs) C211345 USF SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 24 UDL (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) FM000181 PST ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 24 PDL (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) FM000182 UST ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 48 ASC adapters (8 Six Packs) C213928 AFC FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 48 UFC adapters (8 Six Packs) C213916 PFC FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 48 USC (ZR) adapters (8 Six Packs) C213923 UFC FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM ADL LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 48 AFC adapters (8 Six Packs) C213919 PDL LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM 48 ULC adapters (8 Six Packs) C213934 PLC LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 24 PSF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) FM000183 UDL (ZR) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 24 USF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) FM000184 UDL (PB) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM 24 ASF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) FM000185 ULC LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 48 MTRJ adapters (8 Six Packs) FM000186 CON096HD—3 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS—96 FIBERS—LGX118 96 UST adapters (8 Twelve Packs) FM000187 96 PST adapters (8 Twelve Packs) FM000188 48 UDL (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) C211349 48 PSF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) C211313 48 PDL (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) C211360 48 USF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) FM000189 48 ASF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) FM000190

Notes: 1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified. 2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.

LightLink LANSystem 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel The AFL 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 144 fibers is desired. The panel design is based on a 4 rack unit height with a master plate that is provisioned with 12 LGX® 118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM® optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein. Standard 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly.

Specifications Features Applications • Telcordia® GR-63 NEBS Tested • Fits comfortably into new and existing • Telecommunications closets • Aluminum construction per ASTMB209 interconnect, cross-connect, customer • Data Centers • Durable textured powder coat finish premise, and co-location environments • Customer Premise available in black or white • Most common connector styles • LAN / WAN Networks and types available • Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility • Central Offices / Headends • Compatible with industry standard • Standard density: up to 72-fiber • Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals equipment frames • High density: up to 144-fiber • FTTH / FTTB Networks • LGX compatible master plate and • LGX 118 compatible footprint (118 mm) • Standard cable stub location is right • Modular design rear exiting upward • Provides maximum protection of optical components

Dimensions

DEPTH (A) WIDTH (B) HEIGHT (C) RACK FIBER UNLOADED MATERIAL IN INCHES IN INCHES IN INCHES UNITS CAPACITY WEIGHT GAUGE 11.00 17.00 7.00 4 72/96/144 9 lbs. 2.03 mm

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Ordering Information Loading Cable Stub AFL NO. Color Charactor Length (M) Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, C211381 B S 0010 and choose the loading character desired. W = White E = Empty 0002 = 2 meters When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required B = Black H = Half-loaded with adapters 0004 = 4 meters S = Preterminated with tight etc. in meters. buffered CPC cable stub (Riser) (Patch only) Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC). R = Preterminated with OSP loose tube cable stub (Patch only)

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 72 PSC adapters (12 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.

Ordering Information CONFIGURATION AFL NO. CONFIGURATION AFL NO. CON072P—4 RU PATCH PANELS—72 FIBERS—LGX118 CON144HD—4 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS—144 FIBERS—LGX118 EMPTY C211372 EMPTY FM000344 72 USC (PB) adapters (12 Six Packs) C211381 72 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) C211432 72 PSC adapters (12 Six Packs) C211390 72 ADL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) FM000345 72 UST adapters (12 Six Packs) C211417 72 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) C211396 72 PST adapters (12 Six Packs) C211426 72 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) C211439 36 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs) FM000191 72 USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) FM000196 36 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs) FM000192 72 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) FM000197 72 ASC adapters (12 Six Packs) C213955 144 UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM000198 72 UFC adapters (12 Six Packs) C213941 144 PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM000199 72 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Six Packs) C213952 144 UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM000200 72 AFC adapters (12 Six Packs) C213946 144 USC (PB) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM000133 72 ULC adapters (12 Six Packs) C213959 144 ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM000201 36 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs) FM000193 36 USF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs) FM000136 36 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs) FM000194 Connector/Adapter Key 72 MTRJ adapters (12 Six Packs) FM000195 TYPE DESCRIPTION ASC SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM ASF SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM CON096P—4 RU PATCH PANELS—96 FIBERS—LGX118 PSC SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM EMPTY FM000344 PSF SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM USC (PB) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM 96 USC (PB) adapters (12 Eight Packs) FM000202 USC (ZR) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 96 PSC adapters (12 Eight Packs) FM000203 USF SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 96 UST adapters (12 Eight Packs) C213964 PST ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 96 PST adapters (12 Eight Packs) FM000204 UST ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 96 ASC adapters (12 Eight Packs) C213982 AFC FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 96 UFC adapters (12 Eight Packs) C213970 PFC FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 96 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Eight Packs) C213977 UFC FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 96 AFC adapters (12 Eight Packs) C213973 ADL LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 96 MTRJ adapters (12 Eight Packs) FM000205 PDL LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM PLC LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM UDL (ZR) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM Notes: UDL (PB) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM 1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified. 2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration. ULC LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LightLink LANSystem 5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel The AFL 5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 288 fibers is desired. The panel design is based on a 5 rack unit height with a master plate that is provisioned with twelve LGX® 170 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM® optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein. Standard 5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly. High density panels utilize two 144 fiber stubs for 288 terminations. Specifications Features Applications • Telcordia® GR-63 NEBS Tested • Fits comfortably into new and existing • Telecommunications closets • Aluminum construction per ASTMB209 interconnect, cross-connect, customer • Data Centers • Durable textured powder coat finish premise,and co-location environments • Customer Premise available in black or white • Most common connector styles • LAN / WAN Networks and types available • Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility • Central Offices / Headends • Compatible with industry standard • Standard density: up to 144-fiber • Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals equipment frames • High density: up to 288-fiber • FTTH / FTTB Networks • LGX compatible master plate (170 mm) • LGX 170 compatible • Modular design • Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward • Provides maximum protection of optical components

Dimensions

DEPTH (A) WIDTH (B) HEIGHT (C) RACK FIBER UNLOADED MATERIAL IN INCHES IN INCHES IN INCHES UNITS CAPACITY WEIGHT GAUGE 11.00 17.00 8.75 5 144/288 9 lbs. 2.03 mm

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Ordering Information Loading Cable Stub AFL NO. Color Charactor Length (M) Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, C211462 B S 0010 and choose the loading character desired. W = White E = Empty 0002 = 2 meters When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required B = Black H = Half-loaded with adapters 0004 = 4 meters S = Preterminated with tight etc. in meters. buffered CPC cable stub (Riser) (Patch only) Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC). R = Preterminated with OSP loose tube cable stub (Patch only)

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 144 PSC adapters (12 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.

Ordering Information Connector/Adapter Key

CONFIGURATION AFL NO. TYPE DESCRIPTION CON144P—5 RU PATCH PANELS—144 FIBERS—LGX170 ASC SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM EMPTY C211453 ASF SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM PSC SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 144 USC (PB) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) C211462 PSF SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM 144 PSC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) C211471 USC (PB) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM 144 UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs) C211498 USC (ZR) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 144 PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs) C211507 USF SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 72 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) FM000206 PST ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 72 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) FM000207 UST ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 144 ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) C214009 AFC FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM PFC FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 144 UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) C213995 UFC FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 144 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) C214006 ADL LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 72 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) FM000208 PDL LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM 72 USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) FM000209 PLC LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 72 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) FM000210 UDL (ZR) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 144 MTRJ adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM000211 UDL (PB) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM CON288HD—5 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS (USES TWO 144 STUBS)—LGX170 ULC LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 144 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) C211511 144 ADL (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM000346 144 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) C211522 144 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) C211475 144 USF (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM000212 144 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM000213

Notes: 1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified. 2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.

LightLink LANSystem 6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel The AFL 6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 96 fibers is desired. The two panel design is based on a 6-rack unit height comprised of a 3RU Termination Patch Panel and a 3RU Optical Splice Shelf. The 3RU Termination Patch Panel is provisioned with nine LGX® 118 compatible mounting positions. The 3RU Optical Splice Shelf utilizes two STF-48 telescoping splice drawers. Standard 6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays.

Specifications Features Applications • Designed around Telcordia® GR-63NEBS • Fits comfortably into new and existing • Telecommunications closets • Aluminum construction per ASTMB209 interconnect, cross-connect, customer • Data Centers • Durable textured powder coat finish premise and co-location environments • Customer Premise available in black or white • Most common connector styles • LAN / WAN Networks and types available • Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility • Central Offices / Headends • Compatible with industry standard • Standard density: up to 48-fiber • Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals equipment frames • High density: up to 96-fiber • FTTH / FTTB Networks • LGX-compatible master plate (118 mm) • Fiber storage capacity—one meter per spliced fiber (3 mm jacket) • Modular design • Uses two STF-48 telescoping splice drawers • Compact and versatile method of organizing splicing and connectivity • Two panel package—3U patch, 3U splice • Provides maximum protection • Nine LGX 118 mm positions of optical components

Dimensions

DEPTH (A) WIDTH (B) HEIGHT (C) RACK FIBER IN INCHES IN INCHES IN INCHES UNITS CAPACITY 11.00 17.00 10.5 6 48/96

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Ordering Information Loading AFL NO. Color Charactor Select the seven-digit AFL panel part number, specify the color C211543 B S and choose the loading character desired. W = White E = Empty B = Black H = Half-loaded with adapters L = Loaded with adapters and pigtails

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded Empty - Includes master plate, mounting hardware, cable clamp. with, master plate, adapter plates, 48 USC Unloaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), hardware, cable clamp. adapters (8 Six packs), splice drawer (48 and up), Loaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp. pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.

Configuration Part Numbers Accessories CONFIGURATION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. CNS048P—6U PATCH & SPLICE PANELS (1 EA. 3U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)—LGX118 STF-48 Telescoping Splice Drawer 911442-00-00 EMPTY C211534 48 USC (PB) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211543 48 PSC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211552 Connector/Adapter Key 48 UST adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211579 TYPE DESCRIPTION 48 PST adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211588 ASC SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 24 UDL (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000234 ASF SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 24 PDL (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000235 PSC SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 48 ASC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C210928 PSF SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM USC (PB) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM 48 UFC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C210913 USC (ZR) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 48 USC (ZR) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C210922 USF SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM AFC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C210917 PST ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM ULC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C210931 UST ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 24 PSF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000236 AFC FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 24 USF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000237 PFC FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 24 ASF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000238 UFC FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 48 MTRJ adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000239 ADL LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM PDL LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM CNS096HD—6U HIGH DENSITY PATCH & SPLICE PANELS—LGX118 PLC LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 96 UST adapters (8 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawer 2-48 position) FM000240 UDL (ZR) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 96 PST adapters (8 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000241 UDL (PB) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM 48 UDL (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211594 ULC LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 48 PSF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211558 48 PDL (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211601 48 USF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000242 48 ASF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000243

Notes: 1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified. 2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.

LightLink LANSystem 7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel The AFL 7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 144 fibers is desired.The two panel design is based on a 7 rack unit height comprised of a 4RU Termination Patch Panel and a 3RU Optical Splice Shelf.The 4RU Termination Patch Panel includes a master plate that is provisioned with 12 LGX® 118 compatible mounting positions.The 3RU Optical Splice Shelf utilizes three STF-48 telescoping splice drawers. Standard 7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays.

Specifications Features • Designed around Telcordia® GR-63NEBS • Fits comfortably into new and existing • Provides maximum protection of optical • Aluminum construction per ASTMB209 interconnect, cross-connect, customer components premise, and co-location environments • Durable textured powder coat finish Applications available in black or white • Most common connector styles and • Telecommunications closets • Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility types available • Data Centers • Standard density: up to 72-fiber • Compatible with industry standard equipment frames • Customer Premise • High density: up to 144-fiber • LGX-compatible master plate (118 mm) • LAN / WAN Networks • Fiber storage capacity—one meter per spliced fiber (3 mm jacket) • Modular design • Central Offices / Headends • Uses three STF-48 telescoping splice • Compact and versatile method of • Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals drawers organizing splicing and connectivity • FTTH / FTTB Networks • Two panel package—4U patch and Dimensions 4U splice DEPTH (A) WIDTH (B) HEIGHT (C) FIBER CAPAC- • 12 LGX 118 mm positions IN INCHES IN INCHES IN INCHES RACK UNITS ITY 11.00 17.00 12.25 7 72/144

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00074, Revision 6, 5.27.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 151 LightLink LANSystem 7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel Loading Ordering Information AFL NO. Color Charactor Select the seven-digit AFL number, specify the color and choose C211624 B L the loading character desired. W = White E = Empty B = Black H = Half-loaded with adapters L = Loaded with adapters and pigtails Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with master plate, adapter plates, Empty - Includes master plate, mounting hardware, cable clamp. 48 USC adapters (8 Six packs), splice drawer (48 and up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, Unloaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), hardware, cable clamp. cable clamp. Loaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp. Ordering Information

CONFIGURATION AFL NO. CONFIGURATION AFL NO. CNS072P—7U PATCH & SPLICE PANELS (1 EA. 4U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)—LGX118 CNS144HD—7RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS (1 EA. 4U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)—LGX118 EMPTY C211615 72 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211673 72 USC (PB) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211624 72 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211637 72 PSC adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211633 72 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211684 72 UST adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211660 72 USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000250 72 PST adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211669 72 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000251 36 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000244 144 UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000252 36 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000245 144 PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000253 72 ASC adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210958 144 UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000254 72 UFC adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210946 144 USC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000255 72 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210953 144 ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000256 72 AFC adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210949 72 ULC adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210964 Accessories 36 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000246 36 USF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000247 DESCRIPTION AFL NO. 36 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000248 STF-48 Telescoping Splice Drawer 911442-00-00 72 MTRJ adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000249 Connector/Adapter Key CNS096P—7U PATCH & SPLICE PANELS (1 EA. 4U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)—LGX118 EMPTY C210967 TYPE DESCRIPTION ASC SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 96 UST adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) C210971 ASF SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 96 UFC adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) C210976 PSC SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 96 AFC adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) C210982 PSF SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM 96 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) C210985 USC (PB) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM 96 ASC adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) C210989 USC (ZR) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 96 MTRJ adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) FM000257 USF SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM PST ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM Notes: UST ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified. AFC FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration. PFC FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM UFC FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM ADL LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM PDL LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM PLC LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM UDL (ZR) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM UDL (PB) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM ULC LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LightLink LANSystem 8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel The AFL 8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 144 fibers is desired. The standard density, two panel design is based on an 8 rack unit height comprised of a 5RU Termination Patch Panel and a 3RU Optical Splice Shelf. The 5RU Termination Patch Panel includes a master plate that is provisioned with twelve LGX® 170 compatible mounting positions. The 3RU Optical Splice Shelf utilizes three STF-48 telescoping splice drawers. Standard 8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays.

Specifications Features • Designed around Telcordia® GR-63NEBS • Fits comfortably into new and existing • Provides maximum protection of optical • Aluminum construction per ASTMB209 interconnect, cross-connect, customer components premise, and co-location environments • Durable textured powder coat finish Applications available in black or white • Most common connector styles and • Telecommunications closets • Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility types available • Data Centers • Standard density: up to 144-fiber • Compatible with industry standard equipment frames • Customer Premise • Fiber storage capacity—one meter per spliced fiber (3 mm jacket) • LGX compatible master plate (170 mm) • LAN / WAN Networks • Uses three STF-48 telescoping splice • Modular design • Central Offices / Headends drawers • Compact and versatile method of • Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals • Two panel package Standard Density: organizing splicing and connectivity • FTTH / FTTB Networks 5U patch and 3U splice Dimensions • 12 LGX 170 mm positions DEPTH (A) WIDTH (B) HEIGHT (C) RACK PANEL VERSION IN INCHES IN INCHES IN INCHES UNITS FIBER CAPACITY Standard 11.00 17.00 14.00 8 144

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Ordering Information Loading AFL NO. Color Charactor Select the seven-digit AFL number, specify the color and choose C211705 B L the loading character desired. W = White E = Empty B = Black H = Half-loaded with adapters L = Loaded with adapters and pigtails

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded Empty - Includes master plate, mounting hardware, cable clamp. with, master plate, adapter plates, 144 USC Unloaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), hardware, cable clamp. adapters (12 Twelve packs), splice drawer Loaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp. (48 and up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.

Configuration Part Numbers Accessories CONFIGURATION AFL NO. DESCRIPTION AFL NO. CNS144P—8U PATCH & SPLICE PANELS (1 EA. 4U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)—LGX170 STF-48 Telescoping Splice Drawer 911442-00-00 EMPTY C211696 144 USC (PB) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211705 144 PSC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211714 Connector/Adapter Key 144 UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211741 TYPE DESCRIPTION 144 PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211750 ASC SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 72 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000258 ASF SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 72 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000259 PSC SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 144 ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211021 PSF SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM USC (PB) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM 144 UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211007 USC (ZR) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 144 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000260 USF SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 72 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000261 PST ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM 72 USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000262 UST ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 72 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000263 AFC FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM 144 MTRJ adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000264 PFC FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM UFC FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM Notes: ADL LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM 1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified. PDL LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM 2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available PLC LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM for field configuration. UDL (ZR) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM UDL (PB) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM ULC LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

Poli-MOD® Patch and Splice Module AFL's new Poli-MOD is an innovative patch and splice module, which offers an inventive and effective means to accommodate up to 24 fiber interconnections in an industry-standard, single-slot LGX®118 footprint. The new Poli-MOD offers a unique and robust way to secure cable without the need for time-wasting, tie-wrap alternatives. Additionally, the module leverages a creative snap-in splice sleeve cradle to securely manage both single and ribbon fiber arrangements. These features provide the capacity to outfit a standard 4RU rack-mount panel with up to 288-fiber interconnections. 12-Fiber SC/UPC Configuration The Poli-MOD is also offered in an arrangement that supports the low loss budget requirements of Distributed Antenna System (DAS) networks. This is accomplished through the elimination of an interconnection point while providing a robust splicing environment for rack and wall-mount panel applications.

Features • 24-fiber interconnection capacity • LGX 118 compatibility (single-slot module) • Effective and time-saving cable mounting mechanism (no tie-wraps necessary) • Inventive splice sleeve cradle • Available in SC, LC, ST and FC connector arrangements • Organized fiber routing • Fixed solution, no moving parts • Multi-directional cable entry access • DIN rail mountable (with DIN Mount Kit)

Applications • Telecommunications Closets • Data Centers • Customer Premise • Local Area Networks DAS Poli-MOD • Wide Area Networks • Central Offices • Hub Sites • Cabinets • Remote Terminals • Distributed Antenna Systems (DAS)

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00089, Revision 3, 5.18.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 155 Poli-MOD® Patch and Splice Module Ordering Information Example: PM-L-12-ASC-0-S-01 PM L 12 ASC 0 S 01

Configuration Fiber/Connector Count Connector Type3 Fiber Type Fiber Arrangement Packaging

E = Empty (Splicing Only) 06 = 6 Fibers/Connectors ASC = Angle-Polished SC 0 = Single-mode S = Single/Standard 01 = 1 Poli-MOD per box* H = Half Loaded USC = Ultra-Polished SC (G.657.A1 BIF) 12 = 12 Fibers/Connectors R = Ribbon 06 = 6 Poli-MODs per box (Adapter Plate only) 24 = 24 Fibers/Connectors2 PSC = Multimode SC 1 = 62.5 μm (OM1) L = Loaded 3 = 3 mm, 3 meter DAS 12 = 12 Poli-MODs per box XX = Empty ALC = Angle-Polished LC 2 = 50 μm (OM2) (Adapter Plate & Pigtails) X = No Fiber ULC = Ultra-Polished LC D = DAS Poli-MOD1 3 = 50 μm (OM3) (Half Loaded or Empty) PLC = Multimode LC 4 = 50 μm (OM4) UST = Ultra-Polished ST PST = Multimode ST X = Empty AFC = Angle-Polished FC UFC = Ultr a-Polished FC PFC = Multimode FC

1. DAS Poli-MOD requires specialty packaging and is packaged as "1 Poli-MOD per box" ONLY. XXX = Empty 2. 24 Fibers/Connectors are only available in a LC Duplex configuration. 3. Angle and Ultra-Polished connector types are only available with single-mode fiber configurations.

Connector Color Codes Poli-MOD Kits/Accessories CONNECTOR COLOR DESCRIPTION AFL NO. APC (Angled Polish Connector) Green Poli-MOD Cable Mounting Clip Kit FM003053 UPC (Ultra Polish Connector) Blue Poli-MOD Spiral Wrap Kit FM003280 PC-OM1 Beige Fusion Splice Sleeve, FP-03, 40 mm S000206 PC-OM2 Black Adapter Bracket for Mounting Single Poli-MOD FM000948-B PC-OM3 / PC-OM4 Aqua Corning CCH and PCH 145 mm Adapter Bracket FM001636 DIN Mount Kit, LGX® 118 FM003394

Dimensions

6.07 in. (154 mm) 1.14 in. (29 mm)

4.14 in. 5.12 in. (105 mm) (130 mm)

Pigtail Assemblies for Patch and Splice Panels AFL’s pigtail assemblies help eliminate labor-intensive field termination, yet guarantee reliable performance. Featuring a unified construction allowing for easy fiber identification and rapid installation, these assemblies are built to exceed all TIA and Telcordia requirements.

Ordering Information

FIBER CONNECTOR INTERFACE AFL NO. POLISH TYPE SC ST LC CPC PIGTAIL KITS, 3 METER, 12-FIBER APC SMF C152906-0003 — CS007719-0003 UPC SMF C165943-0003 C152671-0003 C223369-0003 Splicer Connector Specifications PC 62.5 µm C165463-0003 C223366-0003 C223373-0003 PARAMETER VALUE PC 50 µm CS007672-0003 CS007674-0003 CS007676-0003 Cable Type 250 µm, 900 µm PC 50 µm LO CS007673-0003 CS007675-0003 CS007677-0003 Insertion Loss < 0.15 dB Return Loss > 40 dB 900 µm TIGHT-BUFFERED PIGTAIL KITS, 3 METER, 12-FIBER Operating Temperature (900 µm Fiber Coating) APC SMF C223312-0003 — CS003981-0003 PVC -40ºC to 75ºC UPC SMF C223492-0003 CS003979-0003 CS001037-0003 Nylon 0ºC to 75ºC PC 62.5 µm CS000386-0003 CS002150-0003 CS002067-0003 TPEE -25ºC to 75ºC PC 50 µm CS001373-0003 CS002136-0003 CS002081-0003 PC 50 µm LO CS003056-0003 CS003980-0003 CS003058-0003

Jumper Specifications

VALUE PARAMETER LC SC ST FC LC-APC SC-APC MT Insertion Loss SM max 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.75 MM max 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 Return Loss SM max -55.0 dB -55.0 dB -55.0 dB -55.0 dB -65.0 dB -65.0 dB -55.0 dB MM max -20.0 dB -20.0 dB Cable Bend Radius Standard min <30 mm Bend Insensitive min <15 mm Durability 200 cycles 500 cycles Operating Temperature -40ºC to +85ºC Storage Temperature -40ºC to +85ºC

& SPLIC H E E TC N A C P L O L S A U C

I R

T E

S P

Fiber OpticO Cable

Xpress Fiber Management® (XFM) MPO Optical Cassettes AFL’s Xpress Fiber Management Optical Cassette product line is a family of preterminated fanout modules that streamline the deployment of optical network infrastructure. The primary function of these products is to break out multi-fiber ribbon connectors to simplex or duplex style connectors for connection to adjacent network elements. The Xpress Fiber Management Optical Cassette solution features low-loss MPO style trunk cable assemblies. These cassettes are available in the industry standard LGX® footprint as well as a selection of Corning Cable Systems™ footprints to support embedded base installations. All modules feature a durable powder coat finish, and are compatible with all 1U-4U LANSystem platforms. All modules are clearly labeled with a silk-screened "A" and "B" positioning reference to ensure proper polarity is maintained in the network, referenced to the polarity convention being deployed.

Applications Features • Data centers • 12- and 24- port configurations • Available in black with rear • LAN, WAN and SAN • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 compliant MPO connection(s) • Interoffice cross-connects • Single-slot LGX packages • SMF, 62.5 µm MMF and • Campus environments • Compatible with LANSystem 50 µm MMF supported and WME hardware • SC- and LC-MPO standard configurations • ST- and FC-MPO configurations available on special order Optical Performance Data Multimode Fiber Single-mode Fiber (OS1) PARAMETER (OM1, OM2 and 50 µm Laser Optimized) LC - MPO LCAPC - MPO SC - MPO SCAPC - MPO ST - MPO LC - MPO SC - MPO ST - MPO Max IL (dB) 1.15 1.15 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.15 1.3 1.3 Typical IL (dB) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 Reflectance (dB) -55 -65 -55 -65 -55 -30 -30 -30 Technical Specifications: Notes: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 1. Single-mode IL test wavelengths 1310 nm and 155 0nm 2. Telcordia® GR-326-CORE compliant single fiber connectors 2. Multimode IL test wavelengths 850 nm and 1300 nm 3. Telcordia GR-1435-CORE compliant multi-fiber connectors 3. Single-mode RL test wavelengths 1310 nm and 1550 nm 4. Multimode RL test wavelengths 850 nm and 1300 nm

Ordering Information SINGLE-MODE MULTIMODE FIBER COUNT, 50 µm LOMMF OM4 62.5 µm OM1 UPC - MPO APC - MPO CONNECTOR PC - MPO PC - MPO (MALE, APC) (Male, APC) OPTION (Male, PC) (Male, PC) 12F, LC FM000090-B FM001477-B FM000273-B FM000092-B 24F, LC FM000691-B FM001653-B FM000692-B FM000663-B 12F, SC FM000087-B FM001465-B FM000272-B FM000089-B 12F, ST FM000093-B N/A FM000274-B FM000095-B

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

I R

T E

S P

Fiber OpticO Cable

Xpress Fiber Management® (XFM) MPO Optical Cassettes

Ordering Information – Accessories DESCRIPTION AFL NO. 145 mm Adapter Bracket FM001636

NOTE: Allows standard LGX modules, such as AFL’s Poli-Mod Interconnect Module and the XFM Optical Cassette, to be mounted into existing Corning Cable Systems™ CCH series and PCH series racks and wall mount products.

Dimensions

128.0 28.9

104.6 130.0

ADAPTERS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

( ) © 2003, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00117, Revision 5, 6.4.14 www.AFLglobal.com or 800 235-3423 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 159 Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDM

Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDM AFL’s TFF compact series CWDM modules deliver reliable performance and flexibility in every network application – from cellular backhaul and metro Ethernet to access and security. With its reduced package size, this new outside plant CWDM module has added flexibility, making deployment options more convenient. This CWDM series is based on proven Thin Film Filter technology, offering low insertion loss and high thermal stability over the entire outside plant operating temperature CWDM 4-Channel Mini Module range. Numerous configurations are available to meet unique needs and support new or existing network architectures. Typical options include a variety of configurations (mux, demux, and balanced), upgrade ports (1310, C-Band, and others), test / monitoring ports and multiple termination options.

Features Applications • Low insertion loss • CWDM systems • Compact size • Metro ethernet / access networks • High thermal stability • Cellular backhaul networks • Telcordia GR-1221-CORE compliant CWDM 8-Channel Mini Module • RoHS 6/6 compliant

Specifications WITHOUT UPGRADE PORT WITH 1310 NM UPGRADE PORT PARAMETER UNIT 4 Channel 8 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel Operating Wavelength nm 1471~1611 Channel Spacing nm 20 Center Wavelength nm Customer specified Pass Band nm ± 6.5 1310 Upgrade Port Pass Band nm — 1270~1350 1310 Upgrade Port Insertion Loss dB — 1.0 CWDM Channel Insertion Loss dB ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.6 ≤ 3.4 CWDM Adjacent Channel Isolation dB ≥ 30 CWDM Non-adjacent Channel dB ≥ 45 Isolation PDL dB ≤ 0.2 PMD ps ≤ 0.1 ≤ 0.25 Return Loss dB ≥ 45 Directivity dB ≥ 50 Maximum Input Power mW ≤ 300 Package Size Mm 60 (l) x 35 (w) x 6 (d) 70 (l) x 45 (w) x 9 (d) Operating Temperature °C -40 ~ +85

* Actual optical specifications will aryv based on product configuration 1. Higher and lower channel counts available

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

© 2010, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00048, Revision 1, 10.30.12 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 160 Interchangeable Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Splice Closures and Fiber Enclosures

LG-500

LG-410

LG-600 Optical Splice Trays

LL-4848 LL-2448-485

LL-2448

LL-400s LL-400b

161 Aerial Weathertight Splice Closures LightGuard® (LG) Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures

LightGuard® Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures The AFL family of Aerial Weathertight Splice Closures is designed to provide a cost-effective solution for your aerial splicing needs. Quality engineering reduces the installation time, training and complexity associated with fiber splicing in the field. The closures have all been designed to be installed without the need for special tools, heat, adhesives, drills or any powered equipment. Durable and easy to install, these closures will improve productivity, reduce labor expenses and last the life of the plant.

Features • Individual, patented, self-sizing cable grommets and strength member tie downs provide for cable additions without disturbing those previously installed • Unique tongue-in-groove closure seal and back-to-back grommet design provides for a weathertight and insect seal • Closures are re-enterable without the need for any re-entry kits and require only a common can wrench for installation • Designed and tested to Telcordia® GR-771 aerial weathertight closure requirements • Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

Specifications

PARAMETER LG-410-U-0 LG-420-U-0 LG-500-U-0 LG-600-U-0 Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, 72, 288, 36 12, 48, 12 96, 288, 36 288, 1152, 96 Mechanical Splice Tray Capacity - Single, Mass 3, 2 n/a, n/a 3, 2 12, 8 Cable Ports 4-8 4-6 4-8 6-12 (6 per end) Cable Entrance In-line, Butt In-line (taut sheath) In-line, Butt In-line, Butt Cable Sizes (O.D.) 4 @ 0.3-0.8" 4 @ 0.3-0.8" 4 @ 0.3-0.83" 6 @ 0.4-1.04" Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits Up to 6 with Dual Grommet Kits Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits Up to 12 with Dual Grommet 4 @ 0.3-0.65" 2 @ 0.3-0.77" 4 @ 0.3-0.65" Kits 4 @ 0.3-0.5" 2 @ 0.3-0.65" 4 @ 0.3-0.5" 6 @ 0.4-0.87" 2 @ 0.3-0.5" 6 @ 0.5" CLOSURE TEST 1, 2 Cable Retention (100 lbs.) Passed Passed Passed Passed Impact Resistance (0-40 °C) Passed Passed Passed Passed Chemical Resistance Passed Passed Passed Passed Cable Flexing Passed Passed Passed Passed Dust (Weather Tightness) Passed Passed Passed Passed Driving Rain Passed Passed Passed Passed Rodent Test Passed Passed Passed Passed Dimensions 36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00 36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00 27.00 x 8.25 x 4.00 27.00 x 11.25 x 7.50 (L x W x D) in. (cm) (91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16) (91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16) (68.58 x 20.96 x 10.16) (68.58 x 28.58 x 19.05) Weight lbs. (kg) 8.5 (3.86) 8.5 (3.86) 6.4 (2.90) 18 (8.16) Note 1: Tested to Telcordia GR-771-Core and Aerial Strand requirements Note 2: Not all Telcordia tests are listed due to space constraints; All closures are designed and tested to appropriate aerial test requirements

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard® 410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure The AFL LightGuard (LG) 410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for small to medium count fiber splicing (< 72 single or 288 mass) in aerial applications and provides additional fiber bundle storage with its extended length design and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical 72, 288, 36 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass 3, 2 Cable Entrance Configuration In-line, Butt Cable Ports 4-8 Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.) 4 @ 0.3-0.8"

Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits 4 @ 0.3-0.65" 4 @ 0.3-0.5" Features Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm) 36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00 (91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16) Weight - lbs. (kg) 8.5 (3.86) • Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports (expandable to eight cable entrances) Ordering Information • Splice trays available for single, DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. mass or mechanical splicing Aerial Weathertight Universal Fiber Optic Splice Closure, up to 72 Single LG-410-U-0 FC000022 fusion splices, 4 cable ports expandable to 8. Equipped w/ 4 self seal- • Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal ing ports, (2) grounding terminals and standard length aerial hangars. system and requires only a common Does not include splice trays or cable grounding kits. can wrench for installation Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended LG-400/500 911499-00-00 • Cable retention clamps provide pullout sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single fused fibers LL-2400 91710-06 rating required by Telcordia (maximum of 3 trays in LG-410) • Engineered thermoplastic Universal Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single fusion or 4 Mass fusion LL-2448 911289-00-02 to meet Telcordia® aerial and sleeves/48 Fibers (maximum of 2 trays in LG-410) Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 fibers LL-4800 91711-07 UV resistance requirements (maximum of 2 trays in LG-410) • Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed Single Fusion Splice Tray Stores 48 Single Fused Fibers LL-2448-48S FA000045 6-Port Grommet Kit LG-400/500 FC000573 Dual Grommet Cable Expansion Kit - Includes (2) LG-400 Dual LG-400/LG-500 911386-00-01 Grommets and Cable Hardware Dual Grommet Kit Dual Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) Dual Grommets for the LG-400-Dual-Kit 911495-00-00 LG-400 Series Closures Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port) LG-400-S 911496-00-00 Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG CGH-4 FC000024 Extended Aerial Hanger Kit LG-400/500 911497-00-00 Adjustable Aerial Hanger Bracket Kit LG-400/500/600 FC000572 * See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard® 420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure The AFL LightGuard (LG) 420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed to allow for Taut Sheath (no slack) splicing in aerial applications such as repairing cable sheath and fibers or providing mid-span access. A common can wrench is only required for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical 12, 48, 12 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass n/a, n/a Cable Entrance Configuration In-line (taut sheath) Cable Ports 4-8 Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.) 4 @ 0.3-0.8"

Up to 6 with Dual Grommet Kits 2 @ 0.3-0.8" Features 2 @ 0.3-0.65" 2 @ 0.3-0.5" • Four individual, self-sizing Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm) 36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00 (91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16) grommeted cable ports (expandable Weight - lbs. (kg) 8.5 (3.86) to six cable entrances) • Taut Sheath splice module Ordering Information accommodates up to twelve fusion splices and supports storage of up DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. Aerial Weathertight Universal Taut Sheath Splice Closure - LG-420-U-0 FC000023 to twelve optical connector adapters Includes: (2) 6 fiber single fusion splice organizers, (2) grounding • Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal terminals and 4 individual self sealing ports. Expandable to 8 cable ports. system and requires only a common Does not include cable grounding kits. Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended LG-400/500 911499-00-00 can wrench for installation sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers • Cable retention clamps provide pullout Dual Grommet Cable Expansion Kit - Includes (2) LG-400 Dual LG-400/LG-500 911386-00-01 Grommets and Cable Hardware Dual Grommet Kit rating required by Telcordia Dual Grommet Kit - Includes (10) Dual Port Grommets LG-400-Dual-Kit 911495-00-00 • Engineered thermoplastic to Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port) LG-400-S 911496-00-00 meet Telcordia® aerial and UV Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures resistance requirements Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG CGH-4 FC000024 Extended Aerial Hanger Kit LG-400/500 911497-00-00 • Protective channel allowing taut fibers Adjustable Aerial Hanger Bracket Kit LG-400/500/600 FC000572 or bundles to pass through the closure

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed * See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard® 420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure The AFL LightGuard (LG) 420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures are designed to allow for Taut Sheath (no slack) splicing in aerial applications such as FTTx access networks. The LG-420 FTTx provides access for 1 to 16 subscriber drops and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single Up to 32 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single 1, n/a Cable Entrance Configuration In-line (taut sheath) Cable Ports 2 - express 2 - multi-drop (FC000099 Model) Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.) 0.3-0.77" express 0.22-0.38" drop Features Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm) 36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00 (91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16) Weight - lbs. (kg) 8.5 (3.86) • Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports: - 2 express ports Ordering Information - 2 multi-drop ports DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. • Up to 16 connections with use of Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure for FTTx applications– LG-420-U-FTTx FC000099 LGX®118 duplex adapters Includes: splice tray to accommodate up to 32 single fusion splices, • Special multi-drop grommet and (2) Blank adapter bulkheads (SC style), (2) Grounding terminals and 4 individual self-sealing ports. With an LGX118 footprint can connect up cable retention to 16 subscribers. Special interior lock out protrective closure. Does not • Special lock-out interior enclosure include cable grounding kits. • (2) 8-pack adapter plates Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure with Grounding Kit LG-420-FTTx FC000206 for FTTx applications – Includes: splice tray to accommodate up to • Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal 32 single fusion splices, (2) Blank adapter bulkheads (SC style), (2) system and requires only a common Grounding terminals and 4 individual self-sealing ports. With an LGX118 footprint can connect up to 16 subscribers. Special interior lock can wrench for installation out protrective closure. • Cable retention clamps provide pullout Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended LG-400/LG-500 911499-00-00 rating required by Telcordia sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers • Engineered thermoplastic to Dual Grommet Cable Expansion Kit - Includes (2) LG-400 Dual LG-400/LG-500 911386-00-01 meet Telcordia® aerial and UV Grommets and Cable Hardware Dual Grommet Kit resistance requirements Dual Grommet Kit - Includes (10) Dual Port Grommets LG-400-Dual-Kit 911495-00-00 • Protective channel allowing taut fibers Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port) LG-400-S 911496-00-00 Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures or bundles to pass through the closure Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG CGH-4 FC000024 • Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed Extended Aerial Hanger Kit LG-400/LG-500 911497-00-00 Adjustable Bracket LG-400/LG-500 FC000572

* See Accessory Specifications.

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard® 500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure The AFL LightGuard (LG) 500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for small to medium count fiber splicing (< 96 single, 288 using LL-2448-48S splice tray or 288 mass) in aerial applications. Compact in design for congested aerial construction. and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical 96, 288, 36 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass 3, 2 Cable Entrance Configuration In-line, Butt Cable Ports 4-8 Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.) 4 @ 0.3-0.77"

Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits 4 @ 0.3-0.65" 4 @ 0.3-0.5" Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm) 27.00 x 8.25 x 4.00 (65.58 x 20.96 x 10.16) Weight - lbs. (kg) 6.4 (2.90)

Features Ordering Information • Four individual, self-sizing DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. grommeted cable ports Aerial Weathertight Universal Compact Splice Closure - Includes: LG-500-U-0 FC000026 (4) cable retention kits, (2) grounding terminals, (4) self sealing ports • Splice trays available for single, and standard aerial hangars. Does not include splice trays or cable mass or mechanical splicing grounding kits. • Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 24 single fused fibers LL-2400 91710-06 (maximum of 3 trays in LG-500) system and requires only a common Universal Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single Fusion, 4 Mass fusion LL-2448 911289-00-02 can wrench for installation sleeves/48 fibers or 12 Mechanical (maximum of 2 trays in LG-500) Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 fibers LL-4800 91711-07 • Cable retention clamps provide pullout (maximum of 2 trays in LG-500) rating required by Telcordia Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 12 Mass fusion sleeves/144 fibers LL-4848 911437-00-02 • Engineered thermoplastic to (maximum of 2 trays in LG-500) meet Telcordia® aerial and UV Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 48 Single Fused Fibers LL-2448-48S FA000045 Dual Grommet Kit - Includes: (2) small grommets and hardware Dual Grommet Kit 911386-00-01 resistance requirements Dual Grommet Kit - Includes: (10) Dual Port Grommets LG-400-Dual-Kit 911495-00-00 • Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended LG-400/500 911499-00-00 sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG CGH-4 FC000024 Extended Aerial Hanger Kit LG-400/500 911497-00-00 Adjustable Aerial Hanger Kit Bracket Kit (included with closure) LG-400/500/600 FC000572 LG-500 6-Port Drop Cable Kit 6-Port Drop Kit FC000573

* See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard® 500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures The AFL LightGuard (LG) 500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures are designed to allow for fiber splicing in aerial applications such as FTTx access networks. The LG-500 FTTx provides cable entry and connectivity for one to 12 subscriber drops.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single Up to 32 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single 1, N/A Cable Entrance Configuration In-line Cable Ports 2 express 2 multi-drop Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.) 0.3-0.77" express 0.22-0.38" drop Features Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm) 27.00 x 8.3 x 4.00 (68.6 x 21 x 10.2) Weight - lbs. (kg) 6.4 (2.9) • Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports: Ordering Information - 2 express ports - 2 multi-drop ports DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. • Up to 12 connections with use FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure includes splice LG-500-U-FTTx FC000899 of LGX® 118 duplex adapters tray accommodating up to 32 single fusion splices, (2) blank SC-style adapter bulkheads, (2) grounding terminals and (4) individual • Special multi-drop grommet self-sealing ports. Connects up to 12 subscribers with an LGX® 118 and cable retention footprint. Special interior lock out protective closure. Does not include cable grounding kits. • Special lock-out interior enclosure Closure extension kit joins multiple closures for extended sheath LG-400/LG-500 911499-00-00 • (2) 6-pack adapter plates openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers • Patented tongue-in-groove Dual grommet cable expansion kit includes (2) LG-400 dual grommets LG-400/LG-500 911386-00-01 and cable hardware Dual Grommet Kit cover seal system Cable grounding harness includes (4) harness 8" #6 AWG CGH-4 FC000024 • Cable retention clamps provide pullout Extended aerial hanger kit LG-400/LG-500 911497-00-00 ™ rating required by Telcordia Adjustable bracket LG-400/LG-500 FC000572 • Engineered thermoplastic to LG-500 6-port drop cable kit 6-Port Drop Kit FC000573 meet Telcordia aerial and UV resistance requirements • Protective channel allowing taut fibers or bundles to pass through the closure • Rural Utilities Service (RUS)-listed

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

LightGuard® 600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure The AFL LightGuard (LG) 600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for high count fiber splicing (< 288 single or 1152 mass) in aerial applications where a cost-effective high cable entry closure is desired and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical 288, 1152, 96 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical 12, 8, 8 Cable Entrance Configuration In-line, Butt Cable Ports 4-8 Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.) 6 @ 0.4-0.87"

Up to 12 with Dual Grommet Kits 6 @ 0.4-0.87" 6 @ 0.5" Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm) 27.00 x 11.25 x 7.50 (68.58 x 28.58 x 19.05) Weight - lbs. (kg) 18 (8.16)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. Aerial Weathertight Universal High Capacity Splice Closure - LG-600-U-0 FC000029 Features Includes: (4) cable retention kits, (2) gounding terminals, (6) self sealing ports and standard length aerial hangars. Does not include • Six individual, self-sizing grommeted splice trays or cable grounding kits. cable ports (expandable to twelve Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single fused fibers LL-2400 91710-06 cable entrances) (maximum of 12 trays in LG-600) • Splice trays available for single, Universal Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single Fusion or 4 Mass fusion LL-2448 911289-00-02 sleeves/48 fibers (maximum of 8 trays in LG-600) mass or mechanical splicing Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 4 Mass fusion Sleeves/48 fibers) LL-4800 91711-07 • Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal (maximum of 8 trays in LG-600) system and requires only a common Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 12 Mass fusion sleeves /144 fibers LL-4848 911437-00-02 (maximum of 6 trays in LG-300) can wrench for installation Single Fusion Splice Tray to Accommodate 48 Splices LL-2448-48S FA000045 • Integrated grounding clamp Dual Grommet Expansion Kit - Includes: (2) Dual Grommets, (1) LG-600-DCEK 911406-00-00 through aerial hangers CSM retention clamp, cable retention clamp and cable spacer Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) LG-600 Grommets LG-600-S-Kit 91918-00 • Cable retention clamps provide pullout Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG CGH-4 FC000024 rating required by Telcordia Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit LG-600 91990-00 • Engineered thermoplastic to Adjustable Aerial Hanger Bracket Kit LG-400/500/600 FC000572 meet Telcordia® aerial and UV SC 6-Pack Adapter Bracket LG-600 FM001212 Multi-drop Cable Entry Kit - Allows six cable entries 0.23-0.48" MDG-600 FC000352 resistance requirements • Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed * See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard® 600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure The AFL LightGuard (LG) 600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for express slack loop fiber access splicing in aerial applications where up to 24 customer fiber drops are required. Installation only requires a common can wrench.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass 24, 48 (see FTTx Expansion Kit description in table below) Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical 2, 2, 2 Cable Entrance Configuration In-line, Butt Cable Ports 6 Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.) 2 @ 0.4-0.87" 24 @ 0.23-0.48" Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm) 27.00 x 11.25 x 7.50 (68.58 x 28.58 x 19.05) Weight - lbs. (kg) 18 (8.16)

Features Ordering Information • Six individual, self-sizing grommeted DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. cable ports; 2 express ports, 4 drop ports Aerial Weathertight Universal High Capacity FTTx Splice Closure - LG-600-FTTx FC000291 • Up to 24 FTTx drops Includes: (6) cable retention kits, (2) grounding terminals, (6) self sealing ports and standard length aerial hangars. Does not include splice trays • Up to 12 adapters using the or cable grounding kits. LG-600 expansion kit and SC 6-pack Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 12 Single fused fibers LL-2450 91957-00 adapter brackets Universal Splice Tray - Stores 12 Single Fusion or 4 Mass fusion LL-1248 911221-00-00 • Special multi-drop grommets sleeves/48 fibers and cable retention Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 4 Mass fusion Sleeves/48 fibers) LL-4850 91958-00 • Integrated aerial splicing work tray Dual Grommet Expansion Kit - Includes: (2) Dual Grommets, (1) CSM LG-600-DCEK 911406-00-00 • Splice trays available for single retention clamp, cable retention clamp and cable spacer or mass splicing Single Port Grommet Kit - 2 Grommets and LSM Hardware SEG-600-1 FC000623 • Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal Single Cable Entry Grommet Kit SEG-600 FC000356 system and requires only a common Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG CGH-4 FC000024 can wrench for installation Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit LG-600 91990-00 • Integrated grounding clamp Multi-drop Cable Entry Kit - Allows six cable entries 0.23-0.48" MDG-600 FC000352 through aerial hangers FTTx Expansion Kit - Includes: Stacker Module (1) LG-600 SC-6-Pack LG-600-FTTx FC000620 • Cable retention clamps provide pullout Bracket. Allows use of standard splice trays LL2400, 2448, 2448-48S, rating required by Telcordia and 4848 plus 5 trays up to 120 single, 288 mass. • Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia® aerial and UV resistance requirements • Rur al Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

* See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Dual- and Multi-port Grommet Kits for LG-400/LG-500/LG-600 For use with the LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Closure. Remove the single-port grommet set from the closure and replace with the multi-port grommet set when drops are required. Retention hardware included.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Dual-port Grommet Kit for LG-400/LG-500 911386-00-01 Dual-port Grommet Kit Diameter for large port is 0.375" - 0.65"; small port, 0.27" - 0.5" Dual Grommet Expansion Kit - Includes: (2) Dual Grommets, (1) CSM 911406-00-00 retention clamp, cable retention clamp and cable spacer Dual Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) Dual Grommets for the 911495-00-00 LG-400 Series Closures. Diameter for large port is 0.375" - 0.65"; small port, 0.27" - 0.5" Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port) 911496-00-00 Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures. Diameter from 0.3" - 0.82" Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) LG-600 Grommets 91918-00 Diameter from 0.5" - 1.0" Multi-port Grommet Kit for LG-400/LG-500. Diameter up to 0.365" FC000573 Multi-port Grommet Kit for LG-600. Diameter from 0.67" to 0.475" FC000352 Multi-port Grommet Kit

Single-port Grommet Kit for LG-600 FTTx For use with the LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Closure. Remove the multi-port grommet set from the closure and replace with the single-port grommet set when installing a branch cable. Hardware included.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Single-port Grommet Kit for LG-600 FTTx FC000623 Single Cable Entry Grommet Kit LG-600 Hardware FC000356

Adjustable Aerial Hanger Brackets For use with all Aerial Weathertight Closures (LG-410, LG-420, LG-420 FTTx, LG-500, LG-600 and LG-600 FTTx). This pair of hanger brackets is shipped from the factory with all weathertight closures. Purchase separately for closures installed over existing utilities.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Adjustable Aerial Hanger Brackets 911497-00-00

SC 6-Pack Bracket for LG-600 Installs at each end of the stacker module in the LG-600. Allows up to (12) SC connectors or (24) LC connectors (using duplex connectors) to be installed in the closure. Snaps in place or use self-tapping screws to secure.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. SC 6-Pack Bracket Kit for LG-600 FM001294 SC 6-Pack Adapter Bracket FM001212

Expansion Kit for LG-600 FTTx Expansion kit includes a Stacker Tray Module and one LG-600 SC-6-Pack Bracket to allow for up to six SC connections or 12 LC duplex connections. An additional bracket may be used to increase connectivity to 12 SC or 24 LC connections using duplex adapters. Allows increasing splices with LL-2400, LL-2448 and LL-2448-48S splice trays.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Expansion Kit for LG-600 FTTx FC000620

Cable Grounding Harness For use with all Aerial Weathertight Closures (LG-410, LG-420, LG-420 FTTx, LG-500, LG-600 and LG-600 FTTx).

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG FC000024

Aerial Hanger Kits For use with all Aerial Weathertight Closures (LG-410, LG-420, LG-420 FTTx, LG-500, LG-600 and LG-600 FTTx).

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Extended Aerial Hanger Kit 911497-00-00 Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit 91990-00

© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00119, Revision 2, 10.8.12 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 171 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays AFL’s LightLink series of Fiber Optic Splice Trays offers a variety of unique and flexible splice and storage possibilities. They are available in industry standard configurations (single, mass).

Features • In-line or butt splice capability (see model descriptions) • Pre-formed radiuses maintain bend requirements • Interlocking base and cover provides tray stability without the use of a bolt • Extended finger guides easily store and route loose fiber or ribbon

Ordering Information—Splice Trays for Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. LG-55-U LG-150-U LG-250-U LG-350-U Single Fuse: 32 LL-2425 FC000053 Max trays: 1 N/A N/A N/A Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 32 6.300" (L) x 2.730" (W) x 0.829" (H) Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: 12 LL-2450 91957-00 N/A Max Trays: 4 N/A N/A Mass Fuse: N/A Sinlge: 48 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: N/A LL-4850 91958-00 N/A Max Trays: 4 N/A N/A Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber) Single: N/A 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) Mass: 32 (384 fiber)

Single Fuse: 12 LL-1248 911221-00-00 N/A Max Trays: 4 N/A N/A Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber) Single: 48 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) Mass: 48 (384 fiber)

Single Fuse: 24 LL-2400 91710-06 N/A N/A Max Trays: 5 Max Trays: 13 Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 120 Single: 312 12.542" (L) x 4.042" (W) x 0.390" (H) Mass: N/A Mass: N/A

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 172 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Ordering Information—Splice Trays for Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. LG-250-U LG-350-U LG-350-AC LG-350XL-U Single Fuse: 60 LL-7644 FA000044 N/A Max Trays: 6 N/A N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) Single: 360 12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) x 0.485" (H) Mass: 72 (864 fiber)

Single Fuse: 24 LL-2448 911289-00-02 Max Trays: 3 Max Trays: 8 N/A N/A Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber) Single: 72 Single: 192 12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Mass: 32 (384 fiber) Mechanical: 36 Mechanical: 96

Single Fuse: 48 LL-2448-48S FA000045 Max Trays: 3 Max Trays: 8 N/A N/A Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 144 Single: 384 12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) Mass: N/A Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: N/A LL-4848 911437-00-02 Max Trays: 3 Max Trays: 8 N/A N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) Single: N/A Single: N/A 12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) Mass: 36 (432 fiber) Mass: 96 (1152 fiber)

Single Fuse: 96 LL-4896 911676-00-02 N/A Max Trays: 5 N/A Max Trays: 9 Mass Fuse: 24 (288 fiber) Single: 480 Single: 864 15.950" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) Mass: 120 (1440 fiber) Mass: 216 (2592 fiber)

Single Fuse: 60 LL-7060 FA000042 N/A Max Trays: 6 N/A N/A Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 360 12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) x 0.485" (H) Mass: N/A

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 173 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Ordering Information – Splice Trays for LG-350 and LG-350XL-U Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. LG-350-U LG-350-AC LG-350XL-U Single Fuse: N/A LL-7144 FA000043 Max Trays: 6 N/A N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) Single: 360 12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) x 0.485" (H) Mass: 72 (864 fiber)

Single Fuse: 36 LL-4808L-R FA000037 N/A Max Trays: 4 N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) Single: 144 8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) Mass: 48 (576 fiber)

Single Fuse: N/A LL-4808 R FA000020 N/A Max Trays: 4 N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) Single: N/A 8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) Mass: 48 (576 fiber)

Single Fuse: 36 LL-4808 L FA000021 N/A Max Trays: 4 N/A Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 144 8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: N/A LL-4896 R FA000022 Max Trays: 5 N/A Max Trays: 9 Mass Fuse: 24 (288 fiber) Single: N/A Single: N/A 15.950" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) Mass: 120 (1440 fiber) Mass: 216 (2592 fiber)

Single Fuse: 96 LL-4896 L FA000023 Max Trays: 5 N/A Max Trays: 9 Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 480 Single: 864 15.950" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) Mass: N/A Mass: N/A

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 174 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Ordering Information – Splice Trays for Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. LG-410-U LG-420-U FTTx LG-500-U LG-500-U FTTx Single Fuse: 24 LL-2400 91710-06 Max Trays: 4 N/A Max Trays: 4 N/A Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 96 Single: 96 12.542" (L) x 4.042" (W) x 0.390" (H) Mass: N/A Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: 32 LL-2425 FC000053 N/A Max Trays: 1 N/A Max Trays: 1 Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 32 Single: 32 6.300" (L) x 2.730" (W) x 0.829" (H) Mass: N/A Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: 24 LL-2448 911289-00-02 Max Trays: 3 N/A Max Trays: 3 N/A Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber) Single: 72 Single: 72 12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Mechanical: 36 Mechanical: 36

Single Fuse: 12 LL-2450 91957-00 N/A N/A N/A N/A Mass Fuse: N/A 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)

Single Fuse: N/A LL-4848 911437-00-02 Max Trays: 3 N/A Max Trays: 3 N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) Single: N/A Single: N/A 12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) Mass: 36 (432 fiber) Mass: 36 (432 fiber)

Single Fuse: N/A LL-4850 91958-00 N/A N/A N/A N/A Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber) 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)

Single Fuse: 12 LL-1248 911221-00-00 N/A N/A N/A N/A Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber) 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 175 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Ordering Information – Splice Trays for Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. LG-500-U-FTTx-ISO LG-600-U LG-600 LG-600-U-FTTx-ISO FTTx Single Fuse: 24 LL-2400 91710-06 N/A Max Trays: 12 Max Trays: 2 N/A Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 288 Single: 48 12.542" (L) x 4.042" (W) x 0.390" (H) Mass: N/A Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: 32 LL-2425 FC000053 N/A N/A N/A N/A Mass Fuse: N/A 6.300" (L) x 2.730" (W) x 0.829" (H)

Single Fuse: 24 LL-2448 911289-00-02 N/A Max Trays: 8 N/A N/A Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber) Single: 192 12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) Mass: 32 (384 fiber) Mechanical: 12

Single Fuse: 12 LL-2450 91957-00 Max Trays: 1 N/A N/A Max Trays: 2 Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 12 Single: 24 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) Mass: N/A Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: N/A LL-4848 911437-00-02 N/A Max Trays: 8 N/A N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) Single: N/A 12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) Mass: 96 (1152 fiber)

Single Fuse: N/A LL-4850 91958-00 Max Trays: 1 N/A N/A Max Trays: 2 Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber) Single: N/A Single: N/A 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) Mass: 8 (96 fiber) Mass: 16 (192 fiber)

Single Fuse: 12 LL-1248 911221-00-00 Max Trays: 1 N/A N/A Max Trays: 2 Mass Fuse: 8 (96) Single: 12 Single: 24 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) Mass: 8 (96 fiber) Mass: 16 (192 fiber)

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 176 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Ordering information – Splice Trays for Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. LG-410-U LG-500-U LG-600-U Single Fuse: N/A LL-4800 91711-07 Max Trays: 3 Max Trays: 3 Max Trays: 8 Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber) Single: N/A Single: N/A Single: N/A 12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Mass: 32 (384 fiber)

Ordering Information—Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Enclosures DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. LL-400B WITH LL-400B WITHOUT LL-400SX WITH LL-400SX WITHOUT INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT 2 LGX® PLATES LGX PLATES Single Fuse: 24 LL-2448 911289-00-02 Max Trays: 4 Max Trays: 6 Max Trays: 3 Max Trays: 9 Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber) Single: 96 Single: 144 Single: 72 Single: 216 Mechanical : 12 Mass: 16 (192 fiber) Mass: 24 (288 fiber) Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Mass: 36 (432 fiber) 12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) Mechanical: 48 Mechanical: 72 Mechanical: 36 Mechanical: 108

Single Fuse: 48 LL-2448-48S FA000045 Max Trays: 4 Max Trays: 6 Max Trays: 3 Max Trays: 9 Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 192 Single: 288 Single: 144 Single: 432 12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) Mass: N/A Mass: N/A Mass: N/A Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: N/A LL-4848 911437-00-02 Max Trays: 4 Max Trays: 6 Max Trays: 3 Max Trays: 9 Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) Single: N/A Single: N/A Single: N/A Single: N/A 12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) Mass: 48 (576 fiber) Mass: 72 (864 fiber) Mass: 36 (432 fiber) Mass: 108 (1296 fiber)

Single Fuse: N/A LL-4800 91711-07 Max Trays: 4 Max Trays: 6 Max Trays: 3 Max Trays: 9 Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber) Single: N/A Single: N/A Single: N/A Single: N/A 12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531 (H) Mass: 16 (192 fiber) Mass: 24 (288 fiber) Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Mass: 108 (1296 fiber)

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 177 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Ordering Information—Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Enclosures

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. LL-500 WITH LL-500 WITHOUT LGX LL-580 2 LGX PLATES PLATES Single Fuse: N/A LL-7144 FA000043 N/A N/A Max Trays: 2 Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) Single: N/A 12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) 0.485" (H) Mass: 24 (288 fiber)

Single Fuse: 60 LL-7644 FA000044 N/A N/A Max Trays: 2 Mass Fuse: 12 (144) Single: 120 12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) 0.485" (H) Mass: 24 (288 fiber)

Single Fuse: 36 LL-4808 L FA000021 Max Trays: 3 Max Trays: 7 N/A Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 108 Single: 252 8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) Mass: N/A Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: N/A LL-4808 R FA000020 Max Trays: 3 Max Trays: 7 N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) Single: N/A Single: N/A 8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) Mass: 36 (432 fiber) Mass: 84 (1008 fiber)

Single Fuse: 36 LL-4808L-R FA000037 Max Trays: 3 Max Trays: 7 Max Trays: 2 Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) Single: 108 Single: 252 Single: 72 8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) Mass: 36 (432 fiber) Mass: 84 (1008 fiber) Mass: 24 (288 fiber)

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 178 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Ordering Information – Splice Tray for Splicing Cabinets and Shelves

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. Telescoping Splice Tray - Stores up to 48 single fusion sleeves or STF-48 911442-00-00 12 mass fusion sleeves (144 fibers). For use in the following products: LL-300, LL-288/576, LL-720/1440, OTSS-SYS1, OSS-SYS2 and OSS-SYS1.

FTTx Splice Tray - Stores up to 2 single fusion sleeves. — DM000445 For use in the following products: ONT-760XL, ONT-3000 and CG-1500

Bare Fiber Splice Tray - Stores up 24 single fusion fibers — C184190 without sleeves. For use in the following products: Any product that accepts the LL-2400 splice tray

Ordering Information—Splice Tray Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. 40 mm Fiber Protection Fusion Splice Sleeves, Telcordia® compliant (50 pcs. per bag) S000206 60 mm Fiber Protection Fusion Splice Sleeves, Telcordia® compliant (50 pcs. per bag) S000065 Single Fusion Splice Chip - 6 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit) FA000034 Single Fusion Splice Chip - 12 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit) FC000657 Single Fusion Splice Chip - 24 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit) 91745-02 Mass Fusion Splice Chip - 4 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit) FA000088 Mechanical Fusion Splice Tape (10 pcs. per kit) FA000089 Core Tube Cable Fiber Router for routing fiber up to 8 directions. For all central core tube sizes. FC000008 Loose Tube or Ribbon Router for routing fiber up to 6 directions. For all Loose Tube and up to 12 fiber Ribbon. FC000070

Dimensions

LL-2448 and LL-4848 Splice Trays LL-1248, LL-2450 and LL-4850 Splice Trays LL-2400 Splice Tray

LL-4896 Splice Tray LL-2425 Splice Tray OEE Splice Tray

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 179 LightLink Splitter Trays The LightLink Splitter Trays are a packaged system that include factory-preinstalled PLC splitters and splicing trays which easily fit within AFL’s LG Series Closures, LL Series Wall Mount Cabinets and pedestals. These AFL splitter trays feature 1x4, 1x8, 1x16 or 1x32 planar technology with optical characteristics that include low insertion loss, high uniformity, and excellent environmental stability. The products are Telcordia® GR-1209 and GR-1221-CORE compliant ensuring longevity and durability Features in an Outside Plant application. • Tamper-Proof Packaging The splitter couplers are factory-preinstalled and secured within the AFL splice trays. • Fits in all AFL enclosures The trays are tamper-proof to prevent unwanted entry. With the lengthy transition • No additional trays required • Color-coded transportation tubing tubing preinstalled, the device fibers are routed into the splice trays (included as part • Telcordia GR-1209 and of the package) to help complete installations in a timely manner. No additional trays 1221-CORE Compliant are required reducing material costs.

Optical Specifications

VALUE PARAMETER 1 X 4 1 X 8 1 X 16 1 X 32 Wavelength Range 1260 - 1650 nm 1260 - 1650 nm 1260 - 1650 nm 1260 - 1650 nm Max. Insertion Loss 7.5 10.7 14.0 17.4 Max. Uniformity 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.7 PDL (dB) Max. 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Return Loss 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 Operating Temperature (°C) -40 to 85 -40 to 85 -40 to 85 -40 to 85

This tray has capacity for up to 24 single fusion splices and are stackable with each other and other similar AFL splice trays.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. SIZE LightLink Splitter CM000799 Tray PKG 1x2 LightLink Splitter FC000571 Tray PKG 1x4 LightLink Splitter FC000539 Tray PKG 1x8 LightLink Splitter FC000538 Tray PKG 1x16 LightLink Splitter FC000537 Tray PKG 1x32

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard® Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures AFL LightGuard Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures are designed to simplify splice management and maintenance. Intuitive engineering design reduces the installation time and complexity associated with fiber splicing in the field. No heat, adhesives, drills or powered equipment for installation or re-entry are required, just simply use a common 216 can wrench to access and install cable. LightGuard closures are durable, easy-to-install and will increase productivity, reduce labor expenses, and last the life of your plant. Features • Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex® or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations • Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity • Fully kitted with all parts to install cables • Designed and tested to Telcordia® GR-771 requirements • Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

Specifications

MODEL DESCRIPTION LG-55-U-0 LG-150-U-0 LG-250-U-0 LG-350-U-0 350-AC LG-350XL-U-0 Splice Capacity (Max.) - 24, n/a, n/a 48, 144, 24 96, 288, 361 384, 1152, 1082 144, 288, 36 864, 2592, 288 Single, Mass, Mechanical Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - 1, n/a, n/a 4, 3, n/a 4, 2, 3 12, 8, 8 4, 3 9, 9, n/a Single, Mass, Mechanical Cable Entrance Configuration In-line / Butt Butt Butt Butt Butt Butt Cable Ports 2 5 5 5 2 (Express Grommets) 5 (7 using dual port 3 (4-Drop Grommets) grommet Express sides) Cable Sizes (Max. O.D.) 2 @ 0.60" (splice) 5 @ 0.62" 5 @ 0.62" 3 @ 0.80" 2 @ 1.0" 3 @ 1.25" 2 @ 0.77" (ground / bond) 2 @ 1.00" 12 @ 0.312" Flat or 2 @ 1.35" 0.250" Round Testing - Cable Retention (100 lbs) Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed - Water Resistance (waterhead) 20 ft. 20 ft. 20 ft. 20 ft. 20 ft. 20 ft. - Impact Resistance (0-40 °C) Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed - Chemical Resistance Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed - Cable Flexing Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm) 14.00 x 4.00 18.25 x 8.75 19.00 x 8.75 28.00 x 10.00 20 x 10 31.00 x 12.00 (35.60 x 10.16) (46.36 x 22.23) (48.26 x 22.23) (71.12 x 25.40) (78.74 x 30.48) Weight - lbs. (kg) 3.0 (1.36) 10.5 (4.76) 11.5 (5.23) 14 (6.35) 13 (5.89) 25 (11.34)

NOTES: 1. For the LG-250-U-0; 36 mechanical splices only using the LL-2448 splice tray. 2. For the LG-350-U-0; 108 mechanical splices only using the LL-2448 splice tray.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard® Peel and Seal Grommet Systems for Sealed Fiber Optic Closures AFL’s cable sealing grommet technology for the LightGuard (LG) Sealed Fiber Optic Closures improves sealing technology utilitizing MULTICENTRIC® Grommets that do away with time consuming tasks such as installing washers and messy sealing tapes for cable entry. MULTICENTRIC® Grommets are designed to accept a wide range of cable diameters, eliminating the need to stock a variety of diameter-specific grommet kits. Conversion kits for old LG-100, LG-200, and LG-300 closures allows for “Peel and Seal" Expandable to support various cable diameters grommet technology to be used without changing out the existing closure.

Features • All Peel and Seal Grommet Systems support loose tube, core tube, dielectric and armored cable designs • Installation and re-entry using common hand tools • Accepts a wide range of cable diameters • Fast and easy to install • Fits existing AFL LightGuard sealed closures • Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity Ease of installation (no tapes, washers, or glue) • Full conversion kits and dual cable entry port kits • Designed and tested to Telcordia® GR-771 & RUS 515 closure requirements

Single Dual Quad

Ordering information SEALED CLOSURE FULL CONVERSION KITS (SINGLE AXIS CABLE ENTRY) Multiple layers of sealing protection DESCRIPTION AFL NO. 3 Port Drop Grommet (LG-150/250) FC000655 Dual Express Grommets for LG-350 FC000337 Quad Express Grommets for LG-350 FC000421 Single Cable Grommet Kit, Drop Port FC000628 4 Port Drop Grommet (LG-350 / LG-350-AC) FC000422 LG-350 Express Single Cable Grommet Kit FC000726 LG-350 Drop Single Cable Grommet Kit FC000727

MULTICENTRIC is a registered trademark of the Mar-Don Corporation.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00001, Revision 6, 10.8.12 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 182 Sealed Splice Closures and Accessories LG-55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

LightGuard® 55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure Designed with versatility in mind, the LightGuard (LG) 55 sealed closure from AFL offers a variety of solutions including repair and distribution splicing, grounding for Fiber-in- the-Loop applications, and for use as an isolation gap with armored cables. This closure accepts stranded loose tube, Uniflex® or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations and can be utilized in a butt or in-line configuration. The LG-55 closure incorporates a unique cable clamp design sealing the cable, allowing both of the cover halves to be removed without disturbing the contents. In addition, AFL’s Peel & Seal Grommet System™ is incorporated to ensure a tight fit on various cable diameters, fully sealing the closure and protecting the fiber while eliminating cumbersome tape and washers – making installation fast and easy.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 24, n/a, n/a Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 1, n/a, n/a Cable Entrance Configuration In-line / Butt Features Cable Ports 2 (3 using dual cable entry port kit) Cable Sizes (Max. O.D.) 2 @ 0.60" (for in-line splice configuration) • Accommodates cables to 0.77" O.D. 2 @ 0.77" (for in-line ground / bond configuration) for splicing and grounding / bonding 2 @ 0.45" (for butt splice configuration) • Incorporates the Peel & Seal Grommet Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm) 14 x 4 (34.30 x 10.16) Weight – lbs. (kg) 3.0 (1.36) System, fully sealing the closure • Includes removable, integral central splicing module and individual cable Ordering Information retention clamps DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. • Requires only a common can wrench LG-55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 24 fusion splice LG-55-U-0 FC000034-PS capable and includes (2) cable kits for sealing / retention, for installation (2) Cable Grounding Kits, (1) Dual Cable Entry Port Kit and a grounding terminal. Splice tray not included. LG-55 In-line Repair Closure LG-55-IRC FC000793-PS LG-55 with Stainless Steel Hardware for Harsh Environments LG-55-U-SS FC000711 LG-55 Splice Tray – Stores 24 single fusion splices and LL-2425 FC000247 includes base, cover, (3) eight-position splice holders and tie-wraps. Maximum of (1) tray in the LG-55. Dual Cable Entry Port Kit – Allows two cables to enter Dual Cable Entry Port Kit FC000337 closure from each cable port. Includes one dual port cable Inline Repair Closure (IRC) for repair grommet to increase the closure to four ports. of flat or round drop cables Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp (one CGH-1 FC000003 kit required per cable entry) Cable Grounding Harness Kit – Includes (4) 8" long ground CGH-4 FC000024 harnesses constructed of #6 AWG conductor.

LightGuard® 55-SC Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure AFL’s LightGuard (LG) 55-SC sealed closure retains all the features of the LG-55, but includes a unique patching system that utilizes pre-terminated SC fiber assemblies or field installable connectors such as the FAST™ SC. An innovative solution that can be used to facilitate a link between traffic control cabinets and entrance cables, the LG-55-SC closure allows for rapid restoration and minimal damage to a fiber optic cable should an impact disable the cabinet. A breakable tie wrap secures the pre-connectorized cable to one side of the closure (traffic control cabinet), while the main entrance cable is secured with a more rugged cable clamp, allowing the system to separate during a damaging impact.

Features • Durable cover assembly that provides protection for all internal components and acts as an interface / anchor to the cable clamps • Unique cable clamp seal to anchor the cable to the cover assembly • Movable sheath retention bracket keeps cable bends at a minimum • Accommodates up to four SC/UPC connectors • Utilizes AFL’s Peel & Seal Grommet System™, ensuring a tight fit on various cable diameters while eliminating cumbersome tape and washers • Requires only a common can wrench for installation

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Maximum Cable Diameter 0.65" Minimum Cable Diameter 0.30" Maximum Cable Entry 2 ports (one each end) Overall Dimensions 14" Length x 4" Diameter

Ordering Information

MODEL NO. AFL NO. LG-55-SC FC000481-PS Dual Cable Entry Port Kit – Allows two cables to enter FC000337 closure from each cable port. Includes one dual port cable grommet to increase the closure to four ports. Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp FC000003 (one kit required per cable entry). Cable Grounding Harness Kit – Includes (4) 8" long ground FC000024 harnesses constructed of #6 AWG conductor.

LightGuard® 150 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 150 is a sealed dome closure designed for small count fiber splicing (< 48 single or 192 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-150 is ideal for express or ring applications and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Features Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 48, 192, n/a • Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex® Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 4, 3, n/a or ribbon fiber cables in either armored Cable Entrance Configuration Butt Cable Ports 5 or dielectric configurations Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.) 5 (0.62" - 0.30") • Installation and re-entry requires only Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm) 18.25 x 8.75 (46.36 x 22.23) a common can wrench Weight – lbs. (kg) 10.5 (4.76) • Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity Ordering Information • Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. LG-150 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 48 Single or 192 LG-150-U-0 FC000001-PS • Designed and tested to Telcordia® mass fusion capable, includes (5) cable kits for sealing / reten- GR-771 requirements tion and a grounding terminal. Cable Grounding Kits, hanger brackets and splice trays not included. • Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed LL-2450 Splice Tray – Stores (12) single fusion splices, includes LL-2450 91957-00 base, cover, (2) six position single splice holders and tie-wraps. Maximum of (4) splice trays in the LG-150. LL-4850 Splice Tray – Stores (8) mass fusion splices, includes LL-4850 91958-00 base, cover, (2) four position ribbon splice holders and tie-wraps. Maximum of (4) splice trays in the LG-150. LL-1248 Splice Tray – Stores (12) single fusion splices or LL-1248 911221-00-00 (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (2) six position single splice holders, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (4) splice trays in the LG-150. 3-Flat Drop Grommet Kit – For use with standard flat drop cable Flat Drop Grommet Kit FC000655 Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp. One kit CGH-1 FC000003 needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350. Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose CGH-5 FC000040 clamp. For use with LG-150/250/350. Universal Aerial Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with Universal Hanger FC000006 LG-150/250/350. Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with Extended Offset Hanger FC000208 LG-150/250/350. Pole or Wall Mount Bracket – For use with LG-150/250/350. PWK FC000592 OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use when installing Sealed Closures OPGW Bracket FC000683 (LG-150 / LG-250 / LG-350) to OPGW Cable. See details in Accessory section on page 13. 1X6 Fiber Router Kit Router FC000070 O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-150/250. O-Ring Replacement FC000004 LLAS-200-12SC Terminal Adapter. Used with LG-150 and LLAS-200-12SC FC000068 LG-250. See details in Accessory section on page 14.

* See Accessory Specifications. See Splice Tray Specifications.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard® 250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 250 is a sealed dome closure designed for medium count fiber splicing (< 96 single or 288 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-250 is ideal for express or ring applications and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Features Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 96, 288, 48 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 4, 2, 4 ® • Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex Cable Entrance Configuration Butt or ribbon fiber cables in either armored Cable Ports 5 or dielectric configurations Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.) 5 (0.62" - 0.30") Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm) 19 x 8.75 (48.26 x 22.23) • Installation and re-entry requires only Weight – lbs. (kg) 11.5 (5.23) a common can wrench • Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices Ordering Information ensuring longevity • Fully kitted with all parts to install DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. LG-250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 96 Single or 288 LG-250-U-0 FC000002-PS five cables mass fusion capable, includes (5) cable kits for sealing / • Designed and tested to Telcordia® retention and a grounding terminal. Cable Grounding Kits, GR-771 requirements hanger brackets and splice trays not included. LL-2400 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion splices, includes LL-2400 91710-06 • Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (4) trays in the LG-250. LL-2448 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass LL-2448 911289-00-02 fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (3) trays in the LG-250. LL-4800 Splice Tray – Stores (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, LL-4800 91711-07 cover, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (10) trays in the LG-300XL. LL-4848 Splice Tray – Stores (12) mass fusion splices, includes LL-4848 911437-00-02 base, cover, (1) twelve position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (1) tray in the LG-250. Single Fusion Splice Tray for 48 Single Fused Fiber* LL-2448-48S FA000045 3-Flat Drop Grommet Kit – For use with standard flat drop cable Flat Drop Grommet Kit FC000655 OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use only when installing closure on OPGW Bracket FC000683 OPGW cable. 1X6 Fiber Router Kit Router FC000070 Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp. One CGH-1 FC000003 kit needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350. Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose CGH-5 FC000040 clamp. For use with LG-150/250/350. O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-150/250 O-Ring Replacement FC000004 Universal Aerial Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with Universal Hanger FC000006 LG-150/250/350 * NOTE: When using LL-2448-48S capacity increases to 144 single splices. Capacity is cable OD driven. Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with Extended Offset Hanger FC000208 LG-150/250/350. * See Accessory Specifications. Pole or Wall Mount Bracket – For use with LG-150/250/350 PWK FC000592 See Splice Tray Specifications. Terminal Adapter – Houses 12 SC bulkhead adapters, for use LLAS-200-12SC FC000068 with LG-150/250

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

MuxGuard® 250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure The MuxGuard 250 is a sealed dome closure designed with pre-installed Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDMs or DWDMs that allow for MUXing and DEMUXing within the same closure. The closure is also equipped with pre-installed splice trays that keep the bandwidth signals separated from each other, thus preventing accidental signal loss during maintenance activities. All fibers from the WDMs are routed to the appropriate splice tray through color-coded transition tubes. The closures are available with 4-channel or 8-channel units. As with other LG Series Sealed Closures, these closures require no tools for re-entry, and each closure may be padlocked as necessary.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single 96 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single 4 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt Cable Ports 5 Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.) 5 (0.70" - 0.30") Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm) 19 x 8.75 (48.26 x 22.23) Features Weight – lbs. (kg) 11.5 (5.23) • Factory pre-installed devices Ordering Information • Factory pre-installed transition tubes with fibers routed to appropriately DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. designated bandwidth splice trays MuxGuard 250 Sealed Closure LG-250-CWDM-8-301 (1471-1611) FC000800 LG-250-CWDM-8-301-121-500 FC000803 • Color-coded transition tubes LL-2448 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion or (4) LL-2448 911289-00-02 • Installation and re-entry requires mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty- four position single splice holder, (1) four position only a common can wrench ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (3) • Fully sealed to protect fiber, splices trays in the LG-250. and devices 1X6 Fiber Router Kit Router FC000070 O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-150/250 O-Ring Replacement FC000004 • Fully kitted with all parts to install Universal Aerial Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use Universal Hanger FC000006 five cables with LG-150/250/350 • Designed and tested to Telcordia® Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with Extended Offset Hanger FC000208 GR-771 requirements LG-150/250/350. Pole or Wall Mount Bracket – For use with PWK FC000592 • Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed LG-150/250/350 Terminal Adapter – Houses 12 SC bulkhead adapt- LLAS-200-12SC FC000068 ers, for use with LG-150/250 * See Accessory Specifications. See Splice Tray Specifications.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard® 350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 350 is a sealed dome closure designed for large count fiber splicing (< 384 single or 1152 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-350 is ideal for express, ring or long haul applications and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Features • Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex® or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations • Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench • Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity • Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables • Designed and tested to Telcordia® GR-771 requirements • Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 480, 1152, 108 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 12, 8, 8 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt Cable Ports / Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.) 5 / 7 (using dual cable configuration for Express ports) 2 Express (1.00" - 0.40") 3 Drop (0.80" - 0.30") Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm) / Weight - lbs. (kg) 28.0" x 10.0" (71.12 x 25.40) / 14 (6.35)

LG-350 with LLAS-300-24SC

continued on next page

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. LG-350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 384 single fusion or 1152 mass fusion capable, includes (5) cable kits for sealing / LG-350-U-0 FC000009-PS retention (single and dual calbe configurations for express ports) and a grounding terminal. Cable Grounding Kits, hanger brackets and splice trays not included. LL-2400 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder and tie- LL-2400 91710-06 wraps. Maximum of (12) trays in the LG-350. LL-2448 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice LL-2448 911289-00-02 holder, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (8) trays in the LG-350. LL-4800 Splice Tray – Stores (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of LL-4800 91711-07 (10) trays in the LG-300XL. LL-4848 Splice Tray – Stores (12) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twelve position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. LL-4848 911437-00-02 Maximum of (6) trays in the LG-350. LL-4896 Splice Tray – Stores (96) single fusion splices or (24) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (16) six position single LL-4896 911676-00-02 splice holders, (6) four position ribbon splice holders and tie-wraps. Maximum of (5) trays in the LG-350. LL-2448-48S Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion splices. May be installed in the LG-250, LG-350, LG-350-XL, LG-410, LG-500, LL-2448-48S FA000045 LG-600 Splice Closures, the LL-400B and LL-400S Distribution Enclosures and the LL-2400 Pedestal. LL-7644 Universal Splice Tray – Stores (60) single fusion splices or (288) mass fusion splices or a combination of both LL-7644 FA000044 in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures. LL-7060 Splice Tray – Stores (60) single fusion splices in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 LL-7060 FA000042 and LG-350XL Closures. LL-7144 Splice Tray – Stores (288) mass fusion splices in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 LL-7144 FA000043 and LG-350XL Closures. 4-Flat Drop Grommet Kit – For use with standard flat drop cable and round cable up to 0.256" O.D. Flat Drop Grommet Kit FC000422 Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp. One kit needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350. CGH-1 FC000003 Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp. For use with LG-150/250/350. CGH-5 FC000040 O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-350. O-Ring LG-300 912231-00-00 Universal Aerial Strand Hanger Kit – For use with LG-150/250/350. Universal Hanger FC000006 Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with LG-150/250/350. Extended Offset Hanger FC000208 Pole or Wall Mount Bracket – For use with LG-150/250/350. PWK FC000592 OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use only when installing closure on OPGW cable. PGW Bracket FC000683 1X6 Fiber Router Kit Router FC000070 Terminal Adapter – Houses 24 SC bulkhead adapters, for use with LG-350 LLAS-300-24SC FC000069 Terminal Adapter – Empty plate LLAS-350-96LC FC000736

* See Accessory Specifications. See Splice Tray Specifications.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard® 350-AC Drop Access Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure AFL’s LightGuard (LG) 350-AC sealed dome closure is intended for utilization in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required and space may be limited. Designed for "drop access" applications providing access for up to 12 drops, this closure is also versatile enough to be used for splicing up to 144 single splices in a butt configuration. Ideal for Fiber-to-the-Home installations in small hand-hole applications, the LG-350-AC requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) – single, mass 144, 432 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – single, mass 4, 3 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt Cable Ports 5 Ports (14 cables total using flat-drop grommets) Cable Sizes (O.D.) Express Side – 2 (0.4"–1.0") Drop Side – 12 (0.31" flat-drop or 0.25" round) Dimensions (L x D) – inches (cm) 19.8" x 10.0" (50.3 x 25.4) Weight - lbs. (kg) 12 (5.44)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. Dome Closure, 144 single fusion capable (with additional trays), 5 LG-350-AC FC000412 cable entry kits for sealing and retention (2-single port for express and 3-quad port for drop), ground terminal, (1) LL-4808L splice tray. No cable grounding or hanger brackets are included Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores up to 36 single fused fibers LL-4808L FA000021 (maximum of 4 trays in LG-350-AC) Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores up to 144 mass fused fibers LL-4808R FA000020 (maximum of 4 trays in LG-350-AC) Features Single Cable Branch Grommet Kit Branch Grommet Kit FC000628 Cable Grounding Kit - For LG-150/250/350 CGH-1 FC000003 • Less than 20" overall length; ideal for 5 Cable Grounding Kits - For LG-150/250/350 CGH-5 FC000040 small hand-holes O-Ring Replacement Kit for the LG-350 O-Ring LG-300 912231-00-00 • Supports standard loose tube, Universal Aerial Strand Hanger kit - For LG-150/250/350 Universal Hanger FC000006 outside plant ribbon and Uniflex® Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit - For LG-150/250/350 Extended Offset Hanger FC000208 Pole or Wall MT Bracket for use with LG150/250/350 PWK FC000592 fiber optic cables in both dielectric OPGW Cable Bracket Kit OPGW Bracket FC000683 and armored configurations * Unit available for Mass/Ribbon utilization. Consult customer service for details. • Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench * See Accessory Specifications. See Splice Tray Specifications. • Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices, ensuring longevity • Fully kitted with all parts to install two cables and up to 12 drops • Designed and tested to Telcordia® GR-771 requirements • Rural Utilities Service (RUS) listed

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard® 350XL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 350XL is a sealed dome closure designed for large count fiber splicing (up to 864 single or 2592 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-350XL requires only a common can wrench for installation. Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 864, 2592, 288 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 9, 9, 9 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt Cable Ports / Cable Sizes (Max. O.D.) 5 ports / 7 with Dual Express Grommet Express Port Drop Port Single 1.18" - 0.40" Single 1.08" - 0.30" Double 0.56" - 0.44" Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm) / Weight - lbs. (kg) 31.0" x 12.0 (78.74 x 30.48) / 25 lbs. (11.3 kg)

Features Ordering Information • Can accommodate up to 7 cables • Supports stranded loose tube, DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. ® LG-350XL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 864 single fusion or 2592 mass LG-300XL-U-0 FC000010-PS Uniflex or ribbon fiber cables in either fusion capable, includes (5) cable kits for sealing / retention (single and dual cable armored or dielectric configurations configurations) and a grounding terminal. Cable Grounding Kits, hanger brackets and splice trays not included • Flanged O-Ring and T-bolt V-band LL-4896 Splice Tray – Stores (96) single fusion splices or (24) 288 mass fusion LL-4896 911676-00-02 for increased protection splices, includes base, cover, (16) six position single splice holders, (6) four position ribbon splice holders and tie-wraps. Maximum of (9) trays in the LG-350XL • Oversized basket allows multiple LL-2400 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion splices, includes base, LL-2400 91710-06 configurations of slack storage cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (12) trays in the LG-350XL. • Requires only a common can wrench LL-2448 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass fusion splices, includes LL-2448 911289-00-02 for installation base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (8) trays in the LG-350XL. LL-4800 Splice Tray – Stores (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) four LL-4800 91711-07 position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (10) trays in the LG-300XL. LL-4848 Splice Tray – Stores (12) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twelve LL-4848 911437-00-02 position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (10) trays in the LG-350XL. LL-2448-48S Splice Tray – Stores (48) single fusion splices. May be installed in the LL-2448-48S FA000045 LG-250, LG-350, LG-350-XL, LG-410, LG-500, LG-600 Splice Closures, the LL-400B and LL-400S Distribution Enclosures and the LL-2400 Pedestal. LL-7060 Splice Tray – Stores (60) single fusion splices in an easy-to-use, LL-7060 FA000042 deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures. LL-7144 Splice Tray – Stores (288) mass fusion splices in an easy-to-use, LL-7144 FA000043 deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures. LL-7644 Universal Splice Tray – Stores (60) single fusion splices or (288) mass fusion LL-7644 FA000044 splices or a combination of both in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures. LG-350XL Dual Axis Express Grommet Dual Axis Exp FC000664 Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp. Cable Bonding FC000041 For use with LG-350XL Kit - 300XL O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-300XL O Ring - 300XL FC000016 Strand Mount Hanger Bracket – For use with LG-300XL XL Hangar Bracket 912215-00-00 1X6 Fiber Router Kit Router FC000070

* See LL4896 Splice Tray Specifications.

LightGuard® 700 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure With a capacity for up to 288 single fusion or 432 mass fusion splices, AFL’s LightGuard (LG) 700 in-line sealed closure is suitable for use in underground and aerial applications. The LG-700 hosts a dry, permanent peripheral grommet seal that allows for easy re-entry, eliminating the need for a re-entry kit. The closure is equipped with eight cable entry ports (four at each end of the closure), which allows for additional cables to be installed without disturbing previously installed cables. The 3/8" stainless steel captive bolts require only a standard nut driver or 216 tool for installation or re-entry. The LG-700 features a grounding system that may be used for common or isolated/grounding applications.

Features • Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia® • Dry, permanent peripheral grommet seal allows for easy re-entry • Space for large amounts of buffer tubing with tie downs for organization and installation • Eight cable entry ports; previously installed cables are not disturbed when installing additional cables • Common or isolated grounding/bonding • Designed and tested to Telcordia GR-771 requirements

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) – single, mass 288, 432 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – single, mass 12, 9 Cable Entrance Configuration In-line, Butt Cable Ports 8 Ports Cable Sizes (O.D.) 4 @ 0.77" 4 @ 1.00" Dimensions (L x D) – inches (cm) 24.5" x 10.7" x 4.7" (62.2 x 25.4 x 11.9) Weight - lbs. (kg) 8.5 (3.85)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. LG-700 Bonded Sealed In-line/Butt Closure - Equipped with (3) cable seal- LG-700 911605-00-00 ing/retention kits, (3) cable bonding kits, (2) single fusion splice trays Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 24 single fused fibers, base, cover, LL-2400 91710-06 (1) twenty-four position fusion splice holder, tie-wraps. Universal Splice Tray - Stores 24 single fused fibers or 4 mass fusion LL-2448 911289-00-02 sleeves (48 fibers), base, deep cover, tie-wraps. Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 12 mass fusion sleeves (144 fibers) Base, LL-4848 911437-00-02 deep cover, (1) twelve position mass sleeve holder, tie-wraps.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Closure Stand for Sealed Dome Closures Table top closure stand to be used for the LG-150/250/350/350XL closures. Can be clamped or permanently fastened to a table top to hold the closure in place during installation or maintenance. The clamp pivots 180° to allow accessibility to both sides of the frame and all cable entry ports.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Closure Stand for Sealed Dome Closures FC001176

Dual Express Grommets for LG-350XL Used on the express side of the LG-350XL closure for installing additional branches. Use the drop ports for the express cable while the express ports may be used to introduce small branch cables. Minimum cable diameter is 0.380" - 0.560".

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Dual Express Grommets for LG-350XL FC000688

Dual and Quad Express Grommets for LG-350 Used on the express side of the LG-350 closure for installing additional branches. Use the drop ports for the express cable while the express ports may be used to introduce small branch Dual Express Grommets cables. A 4-drop flat grommet may be used if drops are also required. Cable diameter for dual grommets is 0.26" - 0.44"; for quad, 0.24" - 0.382".

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Dual Express Grommets for LG-350 FC000337 Quad Express Grommets Quad Express Grommets for LG-350 FC000421

4-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for LG-350/LG-350-AC Used with the LG-350 and LG-350-AC Sealed Closures. Allows for quick addition of drop cables as required. Simply replace the drop port grommets with this grommet kit and install standard flat drop cable or round cable up to 0.25" in diameter.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. 4-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for LG-350/LG-350-AC FC000422

Single Cable and 3-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for LG-150/LG-250 Used with the LG-150 and LG-250 Sealed Closures. Allows for quick addition of drop cables as required. Simply replace the drop port grommets with this grommet kit. Both closures will accept standard flat drop cable or round cable up to 0.250" in diameter.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Single Cable Grommet Kit for the LG-150/LG-250 FC000704 3-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for the LG-150/LG-250 FC000655

Single Cable Grommet Kits for LG-350-AC and LG-350 Used with the LG-350-AC when a branch cable is required with the drop cables. May also be used for with the LG-350 as replacement grommets. Simply remove the flat drop grommet and replace with the single cable grommets.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Single Cable Grommet Kit, Drop Port for LG-350-AC FC000628 Express Single Cable Grommet Kit for LG-350 FC000726 Drop Single Cable Grommet Kit for LG-350 FC000727

OPGW Cable Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350 Attaches to the outer grounding studs of the LG-150/LG-250 or LG-350 Sealed Closures. Stainless steel hose clamps secure the OPGW cable to the bracket preventing twisting or movement.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. OPGW Cable Bracket for the LG-150/LG-250/LG-350 for 2 cables. FC000683 OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use when installing Sealed Closures FC000746 (LG-150/LG-250) to 4 OPGW Cables. OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use when installing Sealed Closures (LG-350) to FC000747 4 OPGW Cables.

Pole/Wall Mount Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350 Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350-AC to secure the closures onto poles or walls in a vertical orientation. Slots on the brackets allow for strapping onto steel or cement poles.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Pole/Wall Mount Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350/LG-350-AC FC000592

© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00120, Revision 3, 4.14.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 194 ® LightGuard Sealed Splice Closure Accessories (cont.) Universal Aerial Bracket and Extended Offset Bracket Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350-AC for mounting on aerial or messengers.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Universal Aerial Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350/LG-350-AC FC000006 Extended Offset Bracket FC000208

Strand Mount Hanger Bracket for LG-350XL Used with the LG-350XL.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Strand Mount Hanger Bracket – For use with LG-350XL 912215-00-00

Cable Ground Kits Used with the LG-150, LG-250 and LG-350.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp. FC000003 One kit needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350. Cable Grounding Harness Kit – Includes (4) 8" ground harnesses constructed of #6 AWG conductor FC000024 Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp. FC000040 For use with LG-150/250/350.

O-Ring Replacement Kits Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350XL.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-150/250 FC000004 O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-300XL FC000016 O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-350. 912231-00-00

1x6 Cable Router Kit Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350-AC.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Enlarged to show detail 1X6 Cable Router Kit FC000070

LightLink Fiber Optic Terminal Adapters for Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures The LightLink Access Solution (LLAS) Terminal Adapters provide the interconnect and/or demarcation of optical fibers for Fiber-to-the-Node (FTTN), Fiber-to-the-Home (FTTH), Fiber-to-the-Premise (FTTP) and Fiber-to-the-Curb (FTTC) applications. The adapter plates are designed to be used in conjunction with AFL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures and convert the standard closure design into an FTTX or demarcation type fiber optic splice closure. The adapter plates provide mounting positions ranging from six to 24 SC-style bulkheads (depending on the model). The interconnection and routing of 900 µm SC pigtails with pre-connectorized SC drop cables is managed through routing rings on the terminal adapter. Three versions are available and are matched to the LG-150, LG-250 and LG-350 series sealed fiber optic splice closures.

Ordering Information

LLAS-200-12SC DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. Terminal Adapter for LG-150/250 Sealed Splice Closure LLAS-200-12SC FC000068 Terminal Adapter for LG-350 Sealed Splice Closure LLAS-300-24SC FC000069 Terminal Adapter – Empty plate LLAS-350-96-LC FC000736 Terminal Adapter – with Installed SCAPC (48) LLAS-350-96-LC FC000737 Terminal Adapter – with Installed SCUPC (48) LLAS-350-96-LC FC000738 Terminal Adapter – with Installed LCUPC Duplex SC Foot Print (48) LLAS-350-96-LC FC000739 Terminal Adapter – with Installed LCAPC Duplex SC Foot Print (48) LLAS-350-96-LC FC000765

Blank bulkhead adapter plate and routing rings are included. SC bulkheads, SC pigtails (900 µm) and SC pre-connectorized drop cable may be ordered separately.

Accessories Ordering

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. (1) Small Flange SC/UPC Bulkhead adapter (Blue) C058475 (1) Small Flange SC/APC Bulkhead adapter (Green) C147880 (1) Pigtail - SC/UPC Connector with (1) meter 900µm fiber C146507-0001 (1) Pigtail - SC/APC Connector with (1) meter 900µm fiber C203278-0001

LLAS-300-24SC

LLAS-200-12SC LLAS-300-24SC

LLAS-350-96LC

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00155, Revision 4, 10.8.12 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 196 OptiNID® 500 Optical Demarcation Closure The OptiNID (OPN) 500 is an optical demarcation closure designed for use in either indoor or outdoor environments. Small form factor for FTTH demarcation applications, the closure is capable of housing up to six bulkhead adapters in one 118 LGX® compatible adapter plate, and is equipped with an integrated splice tray, which holds up to six single fusion splices. The OPN-500 can be either wall or pole-mounted.

Features • Weather-resistant thermoplastic alloy • Self-latching, hinged cover design allows easy access without loose parts • Capacity for one 118 LGX compatible adapter plate • Provider override for customer lock • 3/4" NPT conduit fitting, compression cable fittings or grommeted entry ports

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUES Dielectric Strength Minimum 2500 Vrms for 1 minute High Temperature Storage/Mold Stress °F (°C) 14 days at 159 (70.55) Temperature Cycling with Humidity °F (°C) 150 day cycling from 40-140 (4.44-60) with 95% RH Impact Test °F (°C) -40 (-40), 5 ft/lbs on all external surfaces Drop Test °F (°C) -40 (-40), 5 ft onto concrete surface four times Rain 24 hours at 10 psi UV Resistance (Days Exposed) 60 per ASTM-G26-84 Salt Fog (Days Exposed) 60 per ASTM-BLL7-90 Flammability UL94-5V Chemical Resistance Resists chipping and/or cracking when subject to house paint, 30 Days at 100°F and 95% RH wasp spray, sulfuric acid, kerosene and sodium hydroxide Material UL® listed flame retardant thermoplastic alloy Dimensions (H x W x D) in. (cm) 6.3 x 7.8 x 2.0 (15.7 x 19.7 x 5.0) Cable Entrance in. (cm) diameter - Input 1 x 3/4” NPT (1.130”), 2 x 1/2” NPT (0.875”) Covers Standard, molded-in snap finger and "F" termination

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. BASE PRODUCT 1,2 OptiNID OPN-500, No Adapters DM001021 OptiNID OPN-500, 1 x SC/UPC Adapter DM000550 OptiNID OPN-500, 1 x SC/APC Adapter DM000766 OptiNID OPN-500, 6 x SC/UPC Adapters DM000871 OptiNID OPN-500, 6 x SC/UPC Adapters, 6 x 1 m 900 μm Pigtails DM001109 ACCESSORIES 3 Heyco M3234 Compression Fitting, 18 mm to 11 mm Grip (includes 4) – Left Port Only DM001171 Kit, Six-Position Splice Chip, (includes 10) DM000870

Notes: 1. All standard OPN-500 configurations come equipped with a ¾” NPT fitting, rubber grommet and Heyco 3231 compression fitting, along with a splice chip for six single fusion splices. 2. Contact AFL customer service for additional configurations. 3. See OptiNID Accessory Page for additional kits.

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

OptiNID® 760XL Optical Demarcation Closure The OptiNID (OPN) 760XL is an optical demarcation closure designed for use in either indoor or outdoor environments. It is capable of housing up to 24 bulkhead adapters in two 118 LGX® compatible adapter plates and is equipped with a splice tray (LL-2425), which holds up to 24 single fusion splices. The OPN-760XL can be either wall or pole-mounted.

Features • Capacity for up to two 118 LGX compatible adapter plates • Rugged weather-resistant thermoplastic alloy • Self-latching, hinged cover design allows easy access without loose parts • Slip-in grommets allow pre-connectorized cable deployment • Provider override is provided so that technician can override customer lock • Security cover option available

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUES Dielectric Strength Minimum 2500 Vrms for 1 minute High Temperature Storage/Mold Stress °F (°C) 14 days at 159 (70.55) Temperature Cycling with Humidity °F (°C) 150 day cycling from 40-140 (4.44-60) with 95% RH Impact Test °F (°C) -40 (-40), 5*/lbs on all external surfaces Drop Test °F (°C) -40 (-40), 5* (12.7 cm) onto concrete surface 4 times Rain 24 hours at 10 psi UV Resistance (Days Exposed) 60 per ASTM-G26-84 Salt Fog (Days Exposed) 60 per ASTM-BLL7-90 Flammability UL94-5V Chemical Resistance Resists chipping and/or cracking when subject to: house paint, 30 Days at 100 °F and 95% RH Subject to: wasp spray, sulfuric acid, kerosene and sodium hydroxide Material UL® listed flame retardant thermoplastic alloy OPN-760XL with optional security cover kit Dimensions (H x W x D) in. (cm) 13 x 13 x 3.75 (32.5 x 32.5 x 9.5) Cable Entrances in. (cm) diameter—Input 4 x 0.875 (2.2)—3/4" conduit Covers Standard – molded-in snap finger and 3/8" hex head fastener

Ordering Information DESCRIPTION AFL NO. BASE PRODUCT 1,2 OptiNID OPN-760XL, No Adapters, No Security Cover DM001000 OptiNID OPN-760XL, No Adapters, Security Cover DM001022 ACCESSORIES 3 3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit (includes 2) DM001174 OPN-760XL with 3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit OPN-760XL Security Cover Kit DM000923 OPN-760XL Pole Mounting Kit DM000927 Notes: 1. All standard OPN-760XL configurations come equipped with four slip-in rubber grommets and a splice tray equipped for 32 single fusion splices. 2. Contact AFL customer service for additional configurations. 3. See OptiNID Accessory Page for additional kits.

3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00161, Revision 5, 3.18.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 198 OptiNID® 1224 Optical Demarcation Closure The OptiNID-1224 is an optical demarcation closure designed for use in either indoor or outdoor environments. It is capable of housing up to 36 bulkhead adapters in three 118 LGX® compatible adapter plates and comes equipped with a splice tray (LL-2425), which holds up to 32 single fusion splices. The OPN-1224 can be either wall or pole-mounted.

Features • Capacity for up to three 118 LGX compatible adapter plates • Weather-resistant thermoplastic alloy • Self-latching, hinged cover design allows easy access without loose parts • Self-sealing individual entrance ports prevent water and insects from entering • Provider override is provided so that technician can override customer lock

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUES Dielectric Strength Minimum 2500 Vrms for 1 minute High Temperature Storage/Mold Stress °F (°C) 14 days at 159 (70.55) Temperature Cycling with Humidity °F (°C) 150 day cycling from 40-140 (4.44-60) with 95% RH Impact Test °F (°C) -40 (-40), 5*/lbs on all external surfaces Drop Test °F (°C) -40 (-40), 5* (12.7 cm) onto concrete surface 4 times Rain 24 hours at 10 psi UV Resistance (Days Exposed) 60 per ASTM-G26-84 Salt Fog (Days Exposed) 60 per ASTM-BLL7-90 Flammability UL94-5V Chemical Resistance Resists chipping and/or cracking when subject to: house paint, 30 Days at 100°F and 95% RH wasp spray, sulfuric acid, kerosene and sodium hydroxide Material UL® listed flame retardant thermoplastic alloy Dimensions (H x W x D) in. (cm) 12.25 x 12 x 5.25 (22.80 x 22.80 x 7.60) Cable Entrances in. (cm) diameter - Output 5 x 0.625 (1.5) Cable Entrances in. (cm) diameter - Input 2 x 0.75 (1.5), 1 x 0.250 (0.6) (ground wire) Covers Standard - molded-in snap finger and "F" termination

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. OptiNID OPN-1224, Splice Tray, No Adapter Plate Or Adapters DM000183

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00159, Revision 3, 6.14.13 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 199 Hermetic Fiber Assemblies Hermetic Fiber Assemblies are designed to meet today’s environmental sealing requirements for optical components used in military, telecommunication and sensing applications. The assembly is designed to integrate hermetic functionality (metalized and non-metalized), mechanical robustness, optical integrity and performance into a single package. Termination options include high-performance connectors, capillaries, lensed fibers and bare fiber endfaces.

Features Applications • Metalized SM or Polarization Maintain- • Laser Packages (LDs, Source Lasers, etc.) ing (PM) fibers • Military Components • Kovar ferrule construction for thermal • DWDM Components stability and device attachment ease • Modulators • Hermetic seals greater than • Attenuators 10-8 cc/sec helium • Sensors • Standard and custom designs available • Fiber Optic Gyros • Guaranteed polarization alignment throughout assembly for PM-based designs • Rugged construction designed to meet Telcordia and Military mechanical/environmental requirements

Specifications

METALIZATION PROPERTY SPECIFICATION AND LIMITS Coating Type Nickel/Gold Coating Thickness Gold 0.1 to 0.2 µm Nickel 4.0 + 1 µm Dimensional Tolerances Metalization Length 3.0 to 40.0 + 1.0 mm Fiber Tip Length (non-metalized 125 µm) 0.2 to 20.0 + 1.0 mm Metalization/250 µm Overcoat Length 0 to 5 mm Physical Properties Metal-Glass Adhesion > 1Kg Hermeticity < 10-9 ATM cc/sec He Pull Strength (Kovar ferrule-to-fiber) > 1Kg Solder Compatibility SnPb, InAg, AuSn Operating Temperature -40ºC to + 85ºC Fiber Types PANDA/PM, SM, MM

MiniBend™ Fiber Optic Component For Downhole Double-ended Systems and Optical Connectivity The MiniBend miniature fiber optic component employs a revolutionary technology that will change the way you plan and engineer the fiber management in your oil or gas well. This patented technology allows for a single strand of multimode or single-mode fiber to be formed at a 180° bend with a 1 mm fiber bend diameter, saving valuable real estate.

Features Applications •• Elegant, low profile solution •• Downhole fiber optic turnaround for achieving downhole fiber optic •• Fiber management systems double-ended system •• Modulators, splitters, circulators, •• Provides low-loss sub-millimeter connectors and polarizers bends for miniaturizing fiber •• Circuit boards and back planes components and circuits •• Compact test instrumentation •• No stress with the small bend radii and sensors •• Bi-directional •• Mechanically and environmentally robust •• Small and protective package

Dimensions

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Item Number DNS-1574 DNS-1575 DNS-1885 DNS-1890 Fiber Coating Type 50 µm multimode carbon 50 µm multimode single-mode carbon single-mode mid-temperature acrylate carbon/polyimide mid-temperature acrylate carbon/polyimide Operation Wavelength Range 900 to 1340 nm, 1430 to 1600 nm 1280 to 1340 nm, 1430 to 1600 nm Insertion Loss < 0.2 dB at 1310 nm of wavelength at room temperature < 0.3 dB at 1550 nm of wavelength at room temperature Operating Temperature 0 to 150°C 0 to 200°C 0 to 150°C 0 to 200°C Storage Temperature -60 to 85°C Body Size Outside Diameter = 2.2 mm +/-0.1, Length = 15 mm +/-0.3 Fiber Tail Length > 0.5 m Straight Pull 500 g

Stainless Steel Fiber Optic Tubes As the inventor and owner of the technology for placing optical fibers into stainless steel tubes, AFL offers a range of tube sizes and fiber counts for a variety of applications. Each tube is flooded with a thixotropic filling compound and hermetically sealed to protect the enclosed fibers from environmental degradation. This product is sometimes referred to as FIST (Fiber in Steel Tube) or FIMT (Fiber in Metal Tube).

Jacket Options AFL can encapsulate any of our stainless steel tubes with any of the following polymers: •• Hytrel™ •• Polypropylene •• Santoprene™ •• Nylon •• Polyethylene •• PVDF

Cable Components

Outer Jacket

Fiber

Stainless Steel Tube

Applications •• Umbilical Cables •• Downhole Cables for Oil & Gas Specifications (without jacketing) •• Towed Arrays OUTSIDE INSIDE WALL •• High Temperature Cables OPTION MAXIMUM DIAMETER DIAMETER THICKNESS NUMBER FIBER COUNT inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm) •• Hybrid Cables 1 3 0.046 (1.17) 0.036 (0.91) 0.005 (0.127) •• Sensor Cable 2 4 0.052 (1.32) 0.042 (1.07) 0.005 (0.127) •• OPGW 3 6 0.071 (1.80) 0.055 (1.40) 0.008 (0.200) 4 8 0.074 (1.88) 0.058 (1.47) 0.008 (0.200) 5 8 0.078 (1.98) 0.062 (1.57) 0.008 (0.200) 6 8 0.079 (2.01) 0.063 (1.60) 0.008 (0.200) 7 8 0.082 (2.08) 0.066 (1.68) 0.008 (0.200) 8 12 0.092 (2.34) 0.076 (1.93) 0.008 (0.200) 9 16 0.094 (2.39) 0.078 (1.98) 0.008 (0.200) 10 16 0.098 (2.49) 0.082 (2.08) 0.008 (0.200) 11 16 0.106 (2.69) 0.090 (2.29) 0.008 (0.200) 12 24 0.118 (3.00) 0.102 (2.59) 0.008 (0.200) 13 36 0.125 (3.18) 0.109 (2.77) 0.008 (0.200) 14 48 0.134 (3.40) 0.119 (3.02) 0.008 (0.200) 15 60 0.142 (3.61) 0.126 (3.20) 0.008 (0.200) 16 72 0.150 (3.81) 0.134 (3.40) 0.008 (0.200) 17 72 0.156 (3.96) 0.140 (3.56) 0.008 (0.200)

Available in Stainless Steel 304, 316 and Incoloy 825. Others sizes and materials available on request.

Traditional Downhole Cable Traditional Downhole cable from AFL is designed to perform in the well and withstand elevated temperatures, high pressure and corrosive environments. The cable is customized to the customer’s specifications in order to maximize performance at the best possible price. AFL’s Traditional Downhole cable is targeted to < 150°C offshore and land-based wells where ruggedness is essential.

Features •• Customized to customer specifications •• Up to 150°C •• Up to 20,000 psi operating pressure •• Loose tube design •• Hydrogen scavenging gel

Cable Components

Outer Stainless Steel Tube

Polyprolylene Inner Jacket

Inner Stainless Steel Tube

Fiber

Hydrogen Scavenging Gel

Outer Encapsulation

Options and Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Inner Stainless Steel Tube Diameter 0.125" Outer Tube Diameter 0.250" Outer Tube Wall Thickness 0.028", 0.035", 0.049" Outer Tube Material Stainless Steel 316L, Incoloy™ 825 Fiber Coating Carbon Polyimide, Silicon/PFA, Pure Silica Core and others Gel Types No gel, standard gel, hydrogen scavenging gel Diameter 11 mm x 11 mm square, 11 mm round Polymer Options Polypropylene, PVDF, Nylon, Santoprene™ Operating Temperature -40°C to 150°C Operating Pressure Limit 0 to 20,000 psi

Low Profile Downhole Cable AFL’s unique offering for shallow, land-based wells provides the best combination of ruggedness and size for the price. AFL will customize the design to meet the customer’s needs in order to maximise their return on investment.

Cable Components

Outer Tube

Inner Tube

Fiber

Hydrogen Scavenging Gel

Inside Tube Features •• Small diameter •• Low weight Options and Specifications •• Redundant hermetic seal VALUE •• Encapsulation options PARAMETER DOUBLE TUBE TRIPLE TUBE •• Lower cost Outer Tube Diameter 0.125 0.125 •• Patent pending Tube Wall Thickness 0.016 0.024 Tube Material Stainless Steel 316L, Incoloy™ 825 Fiber coating Carbon Polyimide, Silicon/PFA, Pure Silica Core and others Gel types No gel, high temperature gel, hydrogen scavenging gel Polymer options Polypropylene, PVDF, Nylon, Santoprene™

STAINLESS STEEL 316L OPTION Weight 21 lbs / 1,000 ft 28 lbs / 1,000 ft Tensile 760 lbs 1,060 lbs Collapse pressure 30,000 psi 44,000 psi Bend radius (dynamic) 12.6" 12.6"

INCOLOY™ 825 OPTION Weight 22 lbs / 1,000 ft 28 lbs / 1,000 ft Tensile 814 lbs 1,134 lbs Collapse pressure 21,000 psi 32,000 psi Bend radius (dynamic) 12.6" 12.6"

ENCAPSULATION OPTION Diameter 1/4" Weight Santoprene™ 15 lbs / 1,000 ft Polypropylene 14 lbs / 1,000 ft PVDF 28 lbs / 1,000 ft Nylon 16 lbs / 1,000 ft

For specifications or questions regarding these cables please contact Dean Yamasaki 864-433-5390 or email [email protected].

High Temperature Downhole Cable AFL’s unique solution for applications > 150°C is a three-layer design with the secondary layer being 0.040" thick aluminum. Research indicates hydrogen permeability through aluminum is 100 times less than stainless steel resulting in an extended life for the optical fiber. The all metal design eliminates concerns with polymers at elevated temperatures and provides for stable, predictable performance.

Features •• Hydrogen resistant •• All metal construction •• Tight tolerances •• 300°C temperatures and beyond •• Loose tube design •• Patent pending

Cable Components

Options and Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE Inner Stainless Steel Tube Diameter 0.094" Outer Tube Diameter 0.250" Outer Tube Wall Thickness 0.028" Outer Tube Material Stainless Steel 316L, Incoloy™ 825 Weight Stainless Steel 316L 142 kg/km Incoloy™ 825 144 kg/km Fiber Types Single-mode, Multimode, Pure Silica Core Single-mode Fiber Coating Polyimide, Carbon Polyimide, Silicon/PFA, Gold, Aluminum, Copper Gel Types No gel, high temperature gel, hydrogen scavenging gel Polymer Options Polypropylene, PVDF, Nylon, Santoprene™ Operating Temperature -40°C to 300°C, higher upon request Operating Pressure Limit 0 to 20,000 psi

Fiber Optic Component for Umbilical Cable AFL’s Fiber Optic Component for Umbilical Cable is designed for subsea umbilical applications. AFL is the technology owner for hermetic stainless steel tubes which are the key building block for subsea cables. AFL provides customized designs to meet the most stringent requirements. AFL’s Fiber Optic Component is suitable for depths of 10,000 feet and beyond.

Cable Components

Outer Jacket Features Armor Wires •• Hermetic Stainless Steel Tube •• High Strength Wire Stainless Steel Tube •• Polyethylene Jacketed Inner Jacket •• Hydrogen scavenging gel •• Long lengths Optical Fiber •• In-line splice technology •• Proven technology •• Long life expectancy Options and Specifications •• Custom Jacket Colors PARAMETER VALUE Number of Fibers Up to 96 Fiber Single-mode, Multimode, 100 or 200 kpsi proof test Stainless Steel Tube Sizes 1.8 mm to 3.8 mm Stainless Steel Tube Types 304 or 316L Stainless Steel Armor 16 x 1.02 mm (0.040") wires, a range of tensile specifications are available Fiber Colors EIA 598 or customer specification Unit Weight 150 to 300 kg/km Overall Diameter 6 mm to 16 mm Storage Temperature Range -40 to +85°C Operating Temperature Range -40 to +85°C Breaking Load Up to 25 kN (dependant on armor selection) Bend Radius (design dependent) 120 mm to 320 mm Cable Marking To customer specification

For specifications or questions regarding these cables please contact Dean Yamasaki 864-433-5390 or email [email protected].

( ) © 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00073, Revision 3, 3.12.15 www.AFLglobal.com or 800 235-3423 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 206 BU Series Braided Armored Breakout Cable

Fiber Optic Cable

Braided Armored Deployable Tight Buffered Cable AFL Armored Deployable Tight Buffered Cables are ideal for use in installations where extreme environmental conditions are present. With the addition of a wire braid embedded within the jacketing system, these cables are highly resistant to damage caused by repetitive impacts, high flex, crush, and abrasion as well as other harsh conditions. By utilizing AFL's tight buffered fiber technology field, termination is simplified.

Features Applications • Cut resistant polyurethane outer jacket • Field deployment in abusive • Highly flexible construction allows for environments multiple deployments • High traffic areas Temperature Range • P erformance in wide temperature range • Security and sensing applications Operating: - 46ºC to + 85ºC • High impact and crush resistance • High Flex Applications Installation: - 20ºC to + 85ºC • Dur able in high traffic areas • Installations in industrial environments • ater and UV resistant emporary installation of critical Storage: -57°C to 85°C W • T • Multiple jacket colors available communications lines where quick • Capable of supporting all Multi-Gigabit retrieval and re-use is necessary Ethernet Protocols

Cable Components

Tight Buffered Fiber

Bronze Braiding

Aramid Yarn

Inner TPU Jacket

Outer TPU Jacket

Ordering Information NOMINAL NOMINAL TENSION DIAMETER WEIGHT LBS (N) MINIMUM FIBER BEND RADIUS AFL NO. COUNT INCHES MM LBS/1,000 FT KG/KM INSTALLATION LONG TERM INCHES (CM) XU00130180#-BB 1 0.26 6.6 42.4 64 250 (1112) 66 (290) 2.6 (6.6) XU00258180#-BB 2 .374 9.5 82.5 124 325 (1450) 66 (290) 3.7 (9.5) XU00458180#-BB 4 .374 9.5 82.5 124 325 (1450) 66 (290) 3.7 (9.5) XU00661180#-BB 6 .386 9.8 85.5 128 325 (1450) 66 (290) 3.8 (9.8) XU01270180#-BB 12 .421 10.7 104.7 156 394 (1750) 79 (350) 4.2 (10.7) Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice

Replace asterisk () in AFL number with number corresponding below. Replace pound sign (#) in AFL number with number corresponding below. 5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600 G = 500 µm Coated Optical Fiber 6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300 H = 250 µm Coated Optical Fiber 9 = Single-mode K = SM Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive * Other fiber types available.

Fiber Optic Cable

Tactical Tight Buffered Cable AFL Tactical Tight Buffered Cables are ideal for use in installations where extreme environmental conditions are present. Designed to be deployed and retrieved in the field, AFL’s Tactical Tight Buffered Cables are highly resistant to damage caused by repeated impacts or harsh conditions.

Applications Field deployment in High Traffic areas abusive environments Security and Sensing applications Temporary installation of critical Features Broadcast deployments communications lines where quick Cut resistant, Flame Retardant retrieval and re-use is necessary Installations in harsh environments Polyurethane outer jacket Highly flexible construction allows Cable Components for multiple deployments Polyurethane outer jacket All aramid strength members aramid strength member Performance in wide temperature range 250 µm or 500 µm optical fiber High impact and crush resistance 900 µm Elastomeric Tight Buffer Durable in high traffic areas MIL-PRF-46291 qualified fiber available (-RH designation) Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA Specifications 568-B3, Telecordia GR-409-CORE, CHARACTERISTIC TEST PROCEDURE PERFORMANCE ANSI/ICEA S-83-596 and Tensile and elongation EIA/TIA-455-33 ANSI/ICEA S-104-696 Operating tensile strength EIA/TIA-455-33 Two- and four-fiber cables designed Low-temp flexibility EIA/TIA-455-37 to meet MIL-PRF-85045 Cyclic flexing EIA/TIA-455-104 2000 Temperature Range Crush resistance EIA/TIA-455-41 2000 N/cm Impact EIA/TIA-455-25 200 Operating: -56ºC to +85ºC Temperature cycling EIA/TIA-455-3 -46°C to 85°C Installation: -20ºC to +85ºC Temperature/humidity cycling EIA/TIA-455-5 Method B Life aging EIA/TIA-455-4 Freezing water immersion EIA/TIA-455-98 Ordering Information

MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD MINIMUM BEND RADIUS FIBER NOMINAL DIA. NOMINAL WT. AFL NO. LBS (N) INCHES (CM) COUNT INCHES (MM) LBS/1000FT (KG/KM) INSTALLATION LONG TERM INSTALLATION LONG TERM XU00130180G 1 0.12 (2.9) 5.4 (8) 250 (1112) 75 (334) 1.5 (3.8) 1.25 (3.2) XU00258180G 2 0.23 (5.8) 21.5 (32) 375 (1668) 150 (667) 3.25 (8.3) 2.25 (5.7) XU00458180G 4 0.23 (5.8) 21.5 (32) 375 (1668) 150 (667) 3.25 (8.3) 2.25 (5.7) Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice

Replace asterisk () in AFL number with number corresponding below. Fiber Notes/Options 5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600 G = Elastomer over 500 µm 6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300 – RH = Indicates Radiation Hardened Fiber 9 = Single-mode K = SM Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive

Non-Armored Security Cable Acting as the backbone for most of today’s fiber based systems, stranded fiber optic cables play a critical role in the high speed network. AFL’s Non-Armored Security fiber optic cables are designed to provide high fiber counts with the flexibility and versatility required for today’s most demanding installations. Our cables feature fiber counts up to 288, compliance with EIA/TIA and REA/RUS PE-90, and are S-Z stranded for easy mid-span access. Industry standard designs combined with innovative technologies, such as a dry core product, yield a world class cable that will support today’s and tomorrow’s technological needs.

Cable Components

Product Applications •• Security Sensing •• Long Haul Networking •• Building Interconnections (Campus LAN) •• Trunking Lines Direct to Telecommunications Closet •• Local Loop •• Distance Learning •• Distribution •• Intrabuilding Backbones

Temperature Range Mechanical Data

Operating...... -40ºC to +70ºC MAXIMUM LENGTHS* Storage...... -40ºC to +75ºC FIBER SINGLE-MODE MULTIMODE COUNT FEET METERS FEET METERS Installation...... -30ºC to +70ºC 6 - 60 24,600 7,500 24,600 7,500 72 - 96 17,700 5,400 17,700 5,400 108 -120 14,100 4,300 14,100 4,300 132 - 144 11,500 3,500 11,500 3,500 216 9,500 2,900 9,500 2,900 288 8,500 2,600 8,500 2,600 * Longer lengths may be available upon request. Optical Information

MAXIMUM ATTENUATION OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN. BANDWIDTH GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN. LINK FIBER TYPE (dB/km) (MHz•km) DISTANCE (METERS) 850 nm 1300 nm 1550 nm 850 nm 1300 nm 850 nm 1300 nm (6) 62.5/125 GIGA-Link™ 300 3.5 1.2 N/A 200 600 300 550 (8) 62.5/125 GIGA-Link™ 1000 3.5 1.2 N/A 350 600 500 1000 (5) 50/125 GIGA-Link™ 600 3.5 1.2 N/A 500 500 600 600 (7) 50/125 GIGA-Link™ 2000 3.5 1.2 N/A 500 800 750 2000 (9) Single-mode N/A 0.4 0.3 N/A N/A N/A N/A Gigabit Ethernet Minimum Link Distances are based on “bandwidth”/modal dispersion constraints. Actual link distances may be constrained by attenuation, depending on specific loss budget.

Non-Armored Security Cable

Ordering Information

NOMINAL MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD MINIMUM BEND RADIUS NOMINAL WEIGHT PART FIBER NUMBER OF DIAMETER LBS (N) INCHES (CM) NUMBER COUNT TUBES/FIBERS SHORT SHORT INCHES MM LBS/1,000FT KG/KM LONG TERM LONG TERM TERM TERM LE006C5T21N1 6 1w/6 (4 fillers) 0.51 12.9 80 120 600 (2670) 200 (890) 10.2 (26.0) 5.1 (12.9) LE012C5T21N1 12 1w/12 (4 fillers) 0.51 12.9 80 120 600 (2670) 200 (890) 10.2 (26.0) 5.1 (12.9) LE018C5T21N1 18 1w/12,1w/6 (3 fillers) 0.51 12.9 84 125 600 (2670) 200 (890) 10.2 (26.0) 5.1 (12.9) LE024C5T21N1 24 2w/12 (3 fillers) 0.51 12.9 84 125 600 (2670) 200 (890) 10.2 (26.0) 5.1 (12.9) LE030C5T21N1 30 2w/12,1w/6 (2 fillers) 0.51 12.9 84 125 600 (2670) 200 (890) 10.2 (26.0) 5.1 (12.9) LE036C5T21N1 36 3w/12 (2 fillers) 0.51 12.9 84 125 600 (2670) 200 (890) 10.2 (26.0) 5.1 (12.9) LE048C5T21N1 48 4w/12 (1 filler) 0.51 12.9 84 125 600 (2670) 200 (890) 10.2 (26.0) 5.1 (12.9) LE060C5T21N1 60 5w/12 (no fillers) 0.51 12.9 84 125 600 (2670) 200 (890) 10.2 (26.0) 5.1 (12.9) LE072C6T21N1 72 6w/12 (no fillers) 0.53 13.9 95 141 600 (2670) 200 (890) 10.6 (27.0) 5.3 (13.4) LE084C8T21N1 84 7w/12 (1 filler) 0.60 15.2 118 176 600 (2670) 200 (890) 12.0 (30.4) 6.0 (15.2) LE096C8T21N1 96 8w/12 (no fillers) 0.60 15.2 118 176 600 (2670) 200 (890) 12.0 (30.4) 6.0 (15.2) LE108CAT21N1 108 9w/12 (1 filler) 0.67 17.0 149 222 600 (2670) 200 (890) 13.4 (34.0) 6.7 (17.0) LE120CAT21N1 120 l0w/12 (no fillers) 0.67 17.0 149 222 600 (2670) 200 (890) 13.4 (34.0) 6.7 (17.0) LE132CCT21N1 132 11w/12 (1 filler) 0.74 18.9 179 269 600 (2670) 200 (890) 14.9 (37.8) 7.5 (18.9) LE144CCT21N1 144 12w/12 (no fillers) 0.74 18.9 179 269 600 (2670) 200 (890) 14.9 (37.8) 7.5 (18.9) LE216CIT21N1 216 18w/12 (no fillers) 0.82 20.8 217 303 600 (2670) 200 (890) 16.4 (41.6) 8.2 (20.8) LE288COT21N1 288 24w/12 (no fillers) 0.87 22.0 241 360 600 (2670) 200 (890) 17.3 (44.0) 8.7 (22.0) Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice

 Fiber Types – Replace asterisk () in part number with number corresponding to desired fiber type below.

5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600 7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000 6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300 8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000 9 = Single-mode Q = Non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode

Reel Information

REEL A REEL B REEL C ITEM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM Reel Height 42 106.7 58 147.3 66 167.6 Reel Width Outside 36 91.4 38 96.5 42 106.7 Reel Width Inside 32 81.6 32 81.3 36 91.4 Drum Diameter 23 58.7 28 71.1 36 91.4 Arbor Hole Diameter 3 7.9 3 7.9 3 7.9 Reel Weight With Lagging 180 lbs 82 kg 420 lbs 191 kg 685 lbs 311 kg AFL provides ADSS cable on three standard sizes of non-returnable wooden reels. Non-standard reel sizes are available upon request.

Product Applications •• Security Sensing •• Connectorized Trunking Cables •• Service (Drop) Cables •• Distance Learning •• Building Interconnections •• Distribution (Campus LAN)

Cable Components outer jacket inner jacket strength member buffer tube Temperature Range optical fiber Operating ...... -40ºC to + 70ºC water blocking gel Storage ...... -40ºC to + 75ºC ripcord Installation ...... 0ºC to + 70ºC termite resistant jacket

Mechanical Data

MAXIMUM LENGTHS* FIBER SINGLE-MODE MULTIMODE COUNT FEET METERS FEET METERS 2 - 12 20,000 6,000 20,000 6,000

* Longer lengths may be available. Ordering Information

MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD MINIMUM BEND RADIUS ITEM FIBER NOMINAL DIAMETER NOMINAL WEIGHT LBS (N) INCHES (CM) NUMBER COUNT INCHES (MM) LBS/1,000FT (KG/KM) SHORT TERM LONG TERM SHORT TERM LONG TERM LE00221100N1 2 LE00441100N1 4 LE00661100N1 6 0.38 (9.7) 51 (76) 600 (2670) 200 (890) 6.3 (16.0) 3.1 (8.0) LE00881100N1 8 LE010A1100N1 10 LE012C1100N1 12

Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice

 Fiber Types – Replace asterisk () in part number with number corresponding to desired fiber type below.

5 = 50/125µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600 7 = 50/125µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000 6 = 62.5/125µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300 8 = 62.5/125µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000 9 = Single-mode Q = Non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode

Simplex Cable Simplex fiber optic cables provide the strength and flexibility required for today’s fiber interconnect applications. AFL offers the broadest selection of simplex cordage including Plenum, Riser and LSZH, available in all diameters. Our simplex cable is tested to meet Telcordia GR-326 when used in connectorized assemblies. AFL provides customized performance with regard to jacket stiffness and flexibility, diameter, print legend, jacket color and tight buffer strippability. The easy strip option allows removal of up to one meter of 900 µm material without stripping the fiber’s 250 µm coating. Compliant with Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS).

Features Applications Cable Components • Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA • Building Interconnections (Campus LAN) tight buffered fiber (900 µm buffer) 568-133 and Telcordia GR-409-CORE • Trunking Lines Direct to • Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC Telecommunications Closet aramid yarn outer jacket (RoHS) • Fiber patch panels within • LSZH meets the requirements of communications closets IEC 61034-1, 61034-2, 60332-1-1, • Long Haul Networks 60332-1-2, 60754-1, 60754-2 • Links between electronic equipment and fiber patch panels • Connectorized patch cords for cross connect applications

Mechanical Data NOMINAL WEIGHT TENSION BENDING RADIUS DIAMETER TEMPERATURE RANGE AFL NO. FIBER RISER PLENUM LBS (N) INCHES (CM) COUNT LBS/1000 FT LBS/1000 FT LONG LONG OPERATING/ INCHES (MM) (KG/KM) (KG/KM) INSTALLATION TERM INSTALLATION TERM INSTALLATION STORAGE PLENUM SP001301001 1 0.11 (2.9) — 6 (9) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) 0°C to +70°C -40°C to SP001241001 1 0.09 (2.4) — 5 (7) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) +75°C SP001201001 1 0.08 (2.0) — 3 (5) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) SP001161001 1 0.06 (1.6) — 2 (3) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) RISER SA001301001 1 0.11 (2.9) 5 (7) — 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) -20°C to +70°C -40°C to SR001241001 1 0.09 (2.4) 3 (5) — 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) +75°C SR001201001 1 0.08 (2.0) 3 (4) — 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) SR001161001 1 0.06 (1.6) 2 (2) — 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) LSZH SE00130100E 1 0.11 (2.9) 5 (7) — 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) 0°C to +70°C -40°C to SE00124100E 1 0.09 (2.4) 3 (5) — 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) +75°C SE00120100E 1 0.08 (2.0) 3 (4) — 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0)  Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below) 1 = 100/140 µm multimode fiber 5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600 7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000 6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300 8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000 9 = 9/125 µm single-mode L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive

Contact Customer Service for special fiber types/performance needs.

Simplex Cable

Specifications

GIGABIT ETHERNET 10 GIGABIT ETHERNET OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN. MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM) EMB MIN. LINK DISTANCE MIN. LINK DISTANCE CORE SIZE/ FIBER TYPE BANDWIDTH (MHZ•KM) c ISO/ (MHZ•KM) (METERS) (METERS) IEC 850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300 OM1 3.5 1.2 N/A 200 600 N/A 300 550 32 — (8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 1000 OM1 3.5 1.2 N/A 350 600 N/A 500 1000 65 — (5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600 OM2 3.5 1.5 N/A 500 500 N/A 600 600 82 — (7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000 OM2 3.5 1.2 N/A 500 800 N/A 750 2000 110 — (A) 50 Laser-Link 150 OM2 3.0 1.2 N/A 700 500 950 800 550 150 — (L) 50 Laser-Link 300 OM3 3.0 1.2 N/A 1500 500 2000 1000 550 300 — (C) 50 Laser-Link 550 OM4 3.0 1.2 N/A 3500 550 4700 1040 550 550 — (K) SM Futureguide SR-15e OS2 N/A 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 N/A 10,000 Bend Insensitive (ITU G.657.A) (9) SM OS2 N/A 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A 5,000 N/A 10,000 (1) 100/140 Multimode 5.5 3.5 N/A 100 100 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE

Maximum Cable Length - Reel Size ITEM FIBER BOX* REEL Z REEL A REEL B Reel/Box Height (inches) 15.13 14.0 16.0 24.0 Reel/Box Outside Width 13.0 12.0 15.0 17.0 (inches) Drum Diameter (inches) 8.0 8.0 8.0 12.0 Reel Weight (lbs) 6.0 7.0 10.0 23.0 CAPACITY: METERS (FEET) Simplex 1.6 — 5,000 (16,404) 5,000 (16,404) — Simplex 2.0 — 3,500 (11,483) 5,000 (16,404) — Simplex 2.4 — — 4,000 (13,123) 5,000 (16,404) Simplex 3.0 914 (3,000) — 2,500 ( 8,202) 5,000 (16,404)

* Add suffix "– XMFBOX" to cable AFL number to specify "Fiber-In-A-Box" solution. "X" indicates length of cable in thousands of feet. Only available in standard lengths as indicated in chart above. EXAMPLE: SP0019301001–3MFBOX

Would be the resulting AFL number for 3,000 feet of SP001*301001 cable with 9/125 µm single-mode fiber and the Fiber-In-A-Box solution. Refer to Fiber-In-A-Box data at front of catalog.

Zipcord, Dual-link and Micro-Dual Cable Zipcord, DUAL-link and Micro-Dual cables provide links to the future for such protocols as FDDI, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, ATM, and Fibre Channel. Connections are easy to terminate with this flexible, two-fiber design. AFL offers the broadest selection of duplex cordage including Plenum, Riser and LSZH in all diameters. LSZH jacketed cables are OFNR listed. One design for global companies that don’t want to maintain multiple cable types for varying global standards. Compliant with Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS).

Features • Print legend customization • Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA Applications • Jacket color (12 standard colors available) 568-133 and Telcordia GR-409-CORE • Communications closet to wall outlet • Tight Buffer strippability (easy strip • LSZH meets the requirements of • Wall outlet to desk option allows removal of up to 1 meter IEC 61034-1, 61034-2, 60332-1-1, • Connectorized patchcords for intercon- of 900 µm material without stripping 60332-1-2, 60754-1, 60754-2 nect and cross-connect applications the fiber’s 250 µm coating) • Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC • Easy interface to ESCON®, FDDI, and • Ruggedized Duplex designs for transport (RoHS) various other duplex connectors from communications closet to wall outlet

Cable Components Zipcord DUAL-Link Micro-Dual Ruggedized Duplex

Mechanical Data

NOMINAL WEIGHT TENSION BENDING RADIUS AFL NO. TEMPERATURE RANGE DIAMETER RISER PLENUM LBS (N) INCHES (CM) CABLE FIBER LBS/ LBS/ TYPE COUNT INCHES LONG LONG OPERATING/ RISER PLENUM LSZH 1000 FT 1000 FT INSTALLATION INSTALLATION STORAGE (mm) TERM TERM INSTALLATION (kg/km) (kg/km) Zipcord 0.11 x 0.22 ZA002301001 ZP002301001 ZE00230100E 2 10 (15) 12 (18) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) (2.9 x 6.0) 0.09 x 0.19 ZR002241001 ZP002241001 ZE00224100E 2 7 (10) 9 (14) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) (2.4 x 4.8) PLENUM: 0.08 x 0.16 ZR002201001 ZP002201001 ZE00220100E 2 5 (8) 7 (10) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) (2.0 x 4.0) 0°C to 0.06 x 0.12 +70°C ZR002161001 ZP002161001 — 2 4 (6) 7 (6) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) -40°C to (1.6 x 3.2) +75°C Micro-Dual DR00220100B DP00220100B DE00220100B 2 0.08 (2.0) 3 (5) 5 (7) 22 (100) 7 (30) 1.2 (3.0) 0.78 (2.0) RISER: DUAL-Link DA002481001 DP002481001 DE00248100E 2 0.19 (4.8) 13 (20) 17 (20) 22 (100) 7 (30) 3.1 (7.2) 2.0 (7.2) -20°C to DR002281001 DP002281001 DE00228100E 2 0.11 (2.8) 5 (7) 6 (9) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) +70°C DR002241001 DP002241001 DE00224100E 2 0.094 (2.4) 3 (5) 5 (7) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) Ruggedized 0.185 x 0.30 RR002301001 RP002241001 — 2 34 (50) — 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.8 (7.1) 1.9 (4.7) Duplex (4.7 x 7.6)

 Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below) 5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600 8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000 K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive 7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000 9 = 9/125 µm single-mode 6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300 L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet Contact Customer Service for special fiber types/performance needs

Zipcord, Dual-link and Micro-Dual Cable

Specifications

10 GIGABIT ETHERNET OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN. GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN. MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM) MIN. LINK DISTANCE CORE SIZE/ FIBER BANDWIDTH (MHZ•KM) EMBc LINK DISTANCE (METERS) TYPE ISO/ (MHZ•KM) (METERS) IEC 850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300 OM1 3.5 1.2 N/A 200 600 N/A 300 550 32 — (8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 1000 OM1 3.5 1.2 N/A 350 600 N/A 500 1000 65 — (5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600 OM2 3.5 1.5 N/A 500 500 N/A 600 600 82 — (7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000 OM2 3.5 1.2 N/A 500 800 N/A 750 2000 110 — (A) 50 Laser-Link 150 OM2 3.0 1.2 N/A 700 500 950 800 550 150 — (L) 50 Laser-Link 300 OM3 3.0 1.2 N/A 1500 500 2000 1000 550 300 — (C) 50 Laser-Link 550 OM4 3.0 1.2 N/A 3500 550 4700 1040 550 550 — (K) SM Futureguide SR-15e OS2 N/A 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 N/A 10,000 Bend Insensitive (ITU G.657.A) (9) SM OS2 N/A 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A 5,000 N/A 10,000 (1) 100/140 Multimode 5.5 3.5 N/A 100 100 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE

Maximum Cable Length - Reel Size

ITEM FIBER BOX* REEL A REEL B REEL C Reel/Box Height (inches) 15.13 16 24 30 Reel/Box Outside Width (inches) 13.0 15 17 15.25 Drum Diameter (inches) 8.0 8 12 12 Reel Weight (lbs) 6.0 10 23 34 CAPACITY: Meters (Feet) Zipcord 1.6mm — 4,500 (14,764) — — Zipcord 2.0mm — 2,850 (9,350) 5,000 (16,400) — Zipcord 2.4mm — 2,000 (6,562) 5,000 (16,400) — Zipcord 3.0mm 914 (3,000) 1,250 (4,100) 4,000 (13,123) 5,000 (16,400) DUAL-Link 2.4mm — 4,000 (13,123) 5,000 (16,400) — DUAL-Link 2.8mm — 2,500 (8,200) 5,000 (16,400) — DUAL-Link 4.8mm 305 (1,000) 900 (2,953) 3,200 (10,500) 4,500 (14,764) Ruggedized Duplex — — 1,500 (4,921) 2,500 (8,200)

Would be the resulting AFL number for 3,000 feet of ZA002*301001 cable with 9/125 µm single-mode fiber and the Fiber-In-A-Box solution. Refer to Fiber-In-A-Box data at front of catalog.

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 © 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00067, Revision 4.1, 11.26.12 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 215 PTIC R O CA E BL IB E F Fiber Optic Cable

RIBBON-Link® Cable RIBBON-Link cables combine high fiber density in a small diameter, flexible package. These cables can be terminated with 12 or 24 fiber multi-fiber connectors or the fibers can be fanned out and terminated individually. Plenum, Riser and LSZH options are all UL listed.

Features Applications • Fiber counts up to 48 with unitized, zip • Direct interface to computers with the use configuration construction of “backplane” style fiber connectors • Maximum of two 12-fiber ribbons per unit • High density interconnection to wall • Skew matched ribbons available (<10, outlets or patch panels with ribbon <6, <5, <4, <3, <2, <1.2 ps/meter) connector interfaces • Easy interface to MT and MTP based • “Micro-diameter” fanout cables utiliz- connectors as well as today’s newest ing standard industry fiber connectors ribbon connectors (12- or 24-fiber (ST, SC, FC, LC, MT-RJ.) ferrules) • VSR OC-192/OC-768 Interface based • Ruggedized versions with additional on parallel fiber optics jacketing are available • Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-A / GR-409-CORE • Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS)

Cable Components

24-Fiber Single Pod outer jacket fiber subunit aramid yarn

24-Fiber Dual Pod Specifications

MAXIMUM ATTENUATION OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN. GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN. 10 GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN. ISO/ (DB/KM) BANDWIDTH (MHZ•KM) EMBc LINK DISTANCE (METERS) LINK DISTANCE (METERS) CORE SIZE/ FIBER TYPE (MHZ•KM) IEC 850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300 OM1 3.5 1.2 N/A 200 600 N/A 300 550 32 — (8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 1000 OM1 3.5 1.2 N/A 350 600 N/A 500 1000 65 — (5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600 OM2 3.5 1.5 N/A 500 500 N/A 600 600 82 — (7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000 OM2 3.5 1.2 N/A 500 800 N/A 750 2000 110 — (A) 50 Laser-Link 150 OM2 3.0 1.2 N/A 700 500 950 800 550 150 — (L) 50 Laser-Link 300 OM3 3.0 1.2 N/A 1500 500 2000 1000 550 300 — (C) 50 Laser-Link 550 OM4 3.0 1.2 N/A 3500 550 4700 1040 550 550 — (K) SM Futureguide SR-15e OS2 N/A 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 N/A 10,000 Bend Insensitive (9) SM OS2 N/A 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A 5,000 N/A 10,000 (1) 100/140 Multimode 5.5 3.5 N/A 100 100 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 © 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00062, Revision 2, 9.27.11 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 216 PTIC R O CA E BL IB E F Fiber Optic Cable

RIBBON-Link® Cable

Mechanical Data

NOMINAL TENSION BENDING RADIUS AFL NO. WEIGHT TEMPERATURE RANGE DIAMETER LBS (N) INCHES (CM) CABLE FIBER TYPE COUNT LBS/ PLENUM PLENUM INCHES LONG LONG OPERATING/ RISER LSZH 1000 FT INSTALLATION INSTALLATION STORAGE (PVDF) (PVC) (MM) TERM TERM INSTALLATION (KG/KM) RIBBON- 0.08 x 0.16 WP004141012 WK004141012 WR004141012 WE004141012 4 7.5 (11) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.4 (6.0) 1.6 (4.0) LINK (2.1 x 4.0) (single 0.08 x 0.16 WP006161012 WK006161012 WR006161012 WE006161012 6 7.5 (11) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.4 (6.0) 1.6 (4.0) pod) (2.1 x 4.0) 0.08 x 0.16 WP008181012 WK008181012 WR008181012 WE008181012 8 7.5 (11) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.4 (6.0) 1.6 (4.0) (2.1 x 4.0) 0.08 x 0.18 WP0121C1012 WK0121C1012 WR0121C1012 WE0121C1012 12 8 (12) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.7 (6.9) 1.8 (4.6) (2.1 x 4.6) RISER: 0.10 x 0.18 WP0241D1012 WK0241D1012 WR0241D1012 WE0241D1012 24 8.7 (13) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.7 (6.9) 1.8 (4.6) -20°C to (2.5 x 4.6) +70°C -40°C to RIBBON- 0.08 x 0.32 WP008241012 — WR008241012 WE008241012 8 15 (22) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.4 (6.0) 1.6 (4.0) +75°C LINK (2.1 x 8.2) PLENUM: (dual- 0.08 x 0.32 0°C to WP012261012 — WR012261012 WE012261012 12 15 (22) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.4 (6.0) 1.6 (4.0) pod) (2.1 x 8.2) +70°C 0.08 x 0.32 WP016281012 — WR016281012 WE016281012 16 15 (22) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.4 (6.0) 1.6 (4.0) (2.1 x 8.2) 0.08 x 0.36 WP0242C1012 — WR0242C1012 WE0242C1012 24 15 (24) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.7 (6.9) 1.8 (4.6) (2.1 x 9.2) ROUND WP002301012 — WR002301012 WE002301012 2 0.11 (2.9) 5 (7) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0) RIBBON (simplex) WP004301012 — WR004301012 WE004301012 4 0.11 (2.9) 5 (7) 22 (100) 7 (30) 2.0 (5.0) 1.2 (3.0)

 Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below)

5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600 7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000 6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300 8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000 9 = 9/125 µm single-mode L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive

Contact Customer Service for optical performance specifications and for additional mechanical specifications.

Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cable Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cables are for use in applications requiring fiber counts between 18 and 144 fibers. Unitized construction allows for ease of fiber identification and rapid installation.

Applications Features • Head-end termination to a fiber • Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-A "backbone" / GR-409-CORE • Termination of fiber rack systems • Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC • Multi-floor deployment where select (RoHS) fibers are used at each floor • Hybrid constructions are available • Intrabuilding "backbones"

Cable Components

Mechanical Data

NOMINAL WEIGHT TENSION BENDING RADIUS AFL NO. CABLE FIBER DIAMETER RISER PLENUM LBS (N) INCHES (CM) TYPE COUNT LBS/1000FT LBS/1000FT LONG LONG RISER PLENUM INCHES (MM) INSTALLATION INSTALLATION (KG/KM) (KG/KM) TERM TERM CPC CR018441001 CP018441001 18 0.55 (13.3) 121 (180) 134 (200) 300 (1320) 150 (660) 8.3 (20.0) 5.5 (13.3) with 6   24 0.55 (13.3) 121 (180) 134 (200) 300 (1320) 150 (660) 8.3 (20.0) 5.5 (13.3) Fiber CR024 441001 CP024 441001 Subunits CR036441001 CP036441001 36 0.62 (15.6) 147 (220) 171 (255) 300 (1320) 150 (660) 9.2 (23.4) 6.2 (15.6) CPC CR024551001 CP024551001 24 0.30 x 0.52 (7.6 x 13.2) 57 (86) 62 (92) 300 (1320) 150 (660) 5.0 (12.0) 4.0 (10.0) with 12 CR036551001 CP036551001 36 0.61 (15.4) 120 (180) 134 (200) 300 (1320) 150 (660) 9.1 (23.1) 6.1(15.4) Fiber Subunits CR048551001 CP048551001 48 0.61 (15.4) 120 (180) 134 (200) 300 (1320) 150 (660) 9.1 (23.1) 6.1 (15.4) CR060551001 CP060551001 60 0.76 (19.3) 184 (275) 211 (315) 300 (1320) 150 (660) 10.4 (26.4) 6.9 (17.6) CR072551001 CP072551001 72 0.76 (19.3) 184 (275) 211 (315) 300 (1320) 150 (660) 11.4 (29.0) 7.6 (19.3) CR096551001 CP096551001 96 0.90 (22.8) 281 (420) 295 (440) 300 (1320) 150 (660) 13.5 (34.2) 9.0 (22.8) CR144551001 CP144551001 144 1.0 (25.4) 288 (430) 302 (450) 300 (1320) 150 (660) 15.0 (38.1) 10.0 (25.4)

Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below) 5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600 7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000 6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300 Temperature Specifications 8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000 TEMPERATURE RANGE 9 = 9/125 µm single-mode L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet CABLE TYPE OPERATING/ STORAGE K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive INSTALLATION PLENUM 0°C to +70°C Contact Customer Service for special fiber types/performance -40°C to +75°C RISER -20°C to +70°C

Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cable

Specifications

10 GIGABIT ETHERNET OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN. GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN. MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM) MIN. LINK DISTANCE CORE SIZE/ FIBER BANDWIDTH (MHZ•KM) EMBc LINK DISTANCE (METERS) TYPE ISO/ (MHZ•KM) (METERS) IEC 850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300 OM1 3.5 1.2 N/A 200 600 N/A 300 550 32 — (8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ OM1 3.5 1.2 N/A 350 600 N/A 500 1000 65 — 1000 (5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600 OM2 3.5 1.5 N/A 500 500 N/A 600 600 82 — (7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000 OM2 3.5 1.2 N/A 500 800 N/A 750 2000 110 — (A) 50 Laser-Link 150 OM2 3.0 1.2 N/A 700 500 950 800 550 150 — (L) 50 Laser-Link 300 OM3 3.0 1.2 N/A 1500 500 2000 1000 550 300 — (C) 50 Laser-Link 550 OM4 3.0 1.2 N/A 3500 550 4700 1040 550 550 — (K) SM Futureguide OS2 N/A 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 N/A 10,000 SR-15e Bend Insensitive (ITU G.657.A) (9) SM OS2 N/A 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A 5,000 N/A 10,000 (1) 100/140 Multimode 5.5 3.5 N/A 100 100 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE

Cable Length - Reel Size

ITEM REEL F REEL G Reel Height (inches) 42 60 Reel Outside Width (inches) 36 36 Drum Diameter (inches) 23 30 Reel Weight (lbs) 148 287 CAPACITY: METERS (FEET) 18 Fiber CPC 2,300 (7,546) 2,500 / (8,200) 24 Fiber CPC 2,300 (7,546) 2,500 / (8,200) 36 Fiber CPC (6F subunits) 1,600 (5,250) 2,500 / (8,200) 36 Fiber CPC (12F subunits) 1,500 (4,921) — 48 Fiber CPC 1,500 (4,921) — 60 Fiber CPC 1,250 (4,100) 1,500 / (4,921) 72 Fiber CPC 1,000 (3,280) 1,500 / (4,921) 96 Fiber CPC — 1,500 / (4,921) 144 Fiber CPC — 1,300 / (4,265)

Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable AFL’s Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cables are perfectly suited for rugged applications and installations requiring increased performance. Available in 2 to 12 fiber counts, these cables feature a UV- and fungal-resistant semi-pressure extruded outer jacket. The individual sub-units measure 2.5 mm, allowing for ease of field termination, and use water-blocking aramid which further protects the tight-buffered fiber.

Features Applications • Fungus, water and UV-resistant PVC • Harsh Environment jacket featuring SP extrusion technology • Mining • Riser-rated with water-blocked sub-units • Industrial • Sub-units and tight buffer available in a • Campus Environment variety of colors • Tested to meet or exceed GR-409-CORE and ICEA-S-104-696 • Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS) Cable Components • MSHA approved for mining applications

2-Fiber 12-Fiber

PVC outer jacket PVC outer jacket 2.4 mm water-blocked simplex sub-unit 2.5 mm simplex sub-unit - 900 µm buffered ber - 900 µm buffered ber - water swellable aramid yarn strength members - water swellable aramid yarn strength members - PVC jacket - PVC jacket strength member (2) upjacketed FRP center strength member ripcord ripcord

Mechanical Data

NOMINAL TENSION BENDING RADIUS FIBER DIAMETER WEIGHT LBS (N) INCHES (CM) AFL NO. COUNT INCHES (MM) LBS/1000FT (KG/KM) INSTALLATION LONG TERM INSTALLATION LONG TERM BX002251801 2 0.30 (7.5) 32 (49) 300 (1335) 150 (667) 3.8 (9.6) 2.5 (6.4) BX004251801 4 0.32 (8.2) 37 (55) 450 (2000) 185 (825) 3.9 (9.9) 3.2 (8.1) BX006251801 6 0.38 (9.6) 54 (80) 750 (3360) 375 (1680) 4.8 (12.2) 3.8 (9.7) BX008251801 8PVC 0.44outer jacket (11.1) 75 (111) 1000 (4450) 425 (1750)PVC outer jacket 6.6 (16.8) 4.4 (11.2) 2.4 mm water-blocked simplex sub-unit 2.5 mm simplex sub-unit  BX012 251801 12 - 900 0.57 µm (14.5) buffered ber 165 (245) 1425 (6360) 570 (2535) - 900 µm buffered ber 8.5 (21.6) 5.7 (14.5) - water swellable aramid yarn strength members - water swellable aramid yarn strength members 2.9 mm sub-units are also available. - PVC jacket - PVC jacket strength member (2) upjacketedTemperature FRP center strength member Specifications  Please specify fiber type when orderingripcord (see below) ripcord PARAMETER VALUE 5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600 Storage -40°C to +70°C 7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000 6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300 Operating -40°C to +70°C 8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000 Installation -20°C to +70°C 9 = 9/125 µm single-mode L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link™ 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive

Contact Customer Service for special fiber types/performance needs.

Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable

Specifications

OVERFILL LAUNCH GIGABIT ETHERNET 10 GIGABIT MAXIMUM ATTENUATION MIN. BANDWIDTH MIN. LINK DISTANCE ETHERNET MIN. LINK (DB/KM) (MHZ•KM) (METERS) DISTANCE (METERS) CORE SIZE/ ISO/ EMBc FIBER TYPE IEC 850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (MHZ•KM) 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300 OM1 3.5 1.2 N/A 200 600 N/A 300 550 32 — (8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 1000 OM1 3.5 1.2 N/A 350 600 N/A 500 1000 65 — (5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600 OM2 3.5 1.5 N/A 500 500 N/A 600 600 82 — (7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000 OM2 3.5 1.2 N/A 500 800 N/A 750 2000 110 — (A) 50 Laser-Link™ 150 OM2 3.0 1.2 N/A 700 500 950 800 550 150 — (L) 50 Laser-Link™ 300 OM3 3.0 1.2 N/A 1500 500 2000 1000 550 300 — (C) 50 Laser-Link™ 550 OM4 3.0 1.2 N/A 3500 550 4700 1040 550 550 — (K) SM Futureguide SR-15e OS2 N/A 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 N/A 10,000 Bend Insensitive (ITU G.657.A) (9) SM OS2 N/A 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A 5,000 N/A 10,000 (1) 100/140 Multimode 5.5 3.5 N/A 100 100 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE

Cable Length - Reel Size

ITEM REEL F Reel Height (inches) 42 Reel Outside Width (inches) 36 Drum Diameter (inches) 23 Reel Weight (lbs) 148 CAPACITY: METERS (FEET) 4 Fiber Breakout 2,500 / (8,200) 6 Fiber Breakout 2,500 / (8,200) 8 Fiber Breakout 2,500 / (8,200) 12 Fiber Breakout 1,600 / (5,250)

The Cletop connector cleaner is a rugged palm-sized cleaner that offers exceptional performance with a proven track record. The choice of many leading manufacturers and telecom carries worldwide for nearly 20 years – Cletop is a name you can rely on.

Why Clean Fiber Connectors?

Cletop -S Series •• Pits and scratches are often caused by dirt •• Dust, dirt, oils, etc. are everywhere and will migrate to exposed connector end-faces •• Dirty connectors attenuate signal levels and can increase digital bit error rates •• Always clean both connectors when mating / unmating to avoid contamination transfer

Cletop Cassette Cleaner Options •• Cletop Series - Original version (proven reliability) •• Cletop –S Series - Second generation cleaner offering the same Cletop cleaning performance with “Drop-in” replacement tape cartridge and ergonomic design that works equally well for left or right handed operators •• Type A and -SA - Designed for single 2.5mm ferrules (SC, FC, ST, & D4) Cletop Series •• Type B and -SB - Cleans SC, SC2, FC, ST®, DIN, D4, MU, LC, MT, MPO/MTP® without pins, MT-RJ without pins •• Type MPO - Accepts MPO/MTP connectors with pins •• Type MT-RJ - Accepts MT-RJ connectors with pins

Features •• Compact and lightweight design is ideal for use in laboratories, assembly lines, or in the field •• Consistent cleaning results without IPA alcohol, which is toxic, flammable, and leaves a residue on fiber ends (white haze) •• Excellent anti-static properties for static sensitive applications and to minimize reattachment of dust to ferrule after cleaning •• Simple push button shutter operation exposes cleaning tape only when in use – minimizing unwanted dust •• Replaceable and cost effective cleaning tape •• Over 400 wipes per tape

Specifications

Size 130 x 75 x 40 mm (5.1 x 3.0 x 1.6 in) Weight 160 g/0.35 lb

Ordering Information DESCRIPTION AFL NO. CLETOP – S SERIES Cletop -SA with Blue Tape 8500-10-0020MZ Cletop -SB with Blue Tape 8500-10-0029MZ Cletop -SB with White Tape 8500-10-0016MZ Replacement Tape Type S - Blue 8500-10-0021MZ Replacement Tape Type S - White 8500-10-0017MZ CLETOP ORIGINAL SERIES Cletop Type A with Blue Tape 8500-10-0027MZ Cletop Type A with White Tape 8500-10-0011MZ Cletop Type B with Blue Tape 8500-10-0028MZ Cletop Type B with White tape 8500-10-0014MZ Cletop for MT-RJ with pins (White Tape) 8500-10-0032MZ Cletop for MPO/MTP with pins (White Tape) 8500-10-0033MZ Replacement Tape Blue 8500-10-0012MZ Replacement Tape White 8500-10-0015MZ

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

Features •• Cleans connectors on jumpers and in adapters •• Low cost per clean •• Effective on a variety of contaminates including dust and oils •• Ergonomic, comfortable design with single action cleaning •• Automatic advance ensures each clean is performed with fresh cleaning tape •• Compliant with EU/95/2002/EC Directive (RoHS) •• Compact One-Click Cleaner Mini versions available •• Available with enlarged cleaning area up to 2 mm •• Duplex LC version available •• MPO/MTP version available

The Original One-Click Cleaner MU/LC SC/ST/FC ODC The One-Click Cleaner is an easy-to-use option for cleaning connectors on jumpers and in adapters. Simply insert the One- Click Cleaner into an adapter and push until an audible “click” is heard. The One-Click Cleaner uses the mechanical push action to advance an optical grade cleaning tape while the cleaning tip is rotated to ensure the fiber end-face is effectively, but gently cleaned. The One-Click Cleaner is a must-have for field technicians. Small enough to fit in a shirt pocket and a great addition to cleaning kits. Save your wrist – no more twist!

Rugged ODC® Version Mini-100 MU/LC Mini-100 SC, ST, FC With the increasing demand of Outdoor Connector (ODC) plug and socket styles, the ODC One-Click Cleaner, which cleans the ferrules in ODC plug, socket and 1.25 mm ferrules, is an essential cleaning tool for WiMax Base Station, Fiber-to-the-Antenna, Broadcasting and Surveillance Video technicians.

Compact One-Click Cleaner Mini Offering the same technology and performance as the original, the One-Click Cleaner is now available in a smaller, more compact size, which allows for cleaning of connectors in tighter places. Its smaller size also makes it a great addition to test kits Mini-500 MU/LC Mini-500 SC, ST, FC and cleaning kits. The One-Click Mini that is offered by AFL as a low cost solution with 100+ cleans per unit is now also available with same 500+ cleans per unit as the standard One-Click. The One-Click Mini is an effective, easy-to-use cleaning solution for SC, ST, FC, LC, MU and TFOCA connectors.

One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 The One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 has an enlarged cleaning area to clean more of the connector end-face. Cleaning up to a 2 mm diameter area of the connector end-face, the One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 is a superior cleaner for SC, ST, and FC connectors.

One-Click Cleaner D-LC (Duplex LC) Reduce cleaning time with the new One-Click Cleaner D-LC. Offering the same performance and easy-to-use one-click technology as the original, the One-Click Cleaner D-LC cuts cleaning time in half by effectively cleaning both LC connectors of a duplex LC at one time. 500+ duplex LC cleans per cleaner (1000+ LC connector cleans).

D-LC (Duplex LC) 2.5 Ultra One-Click Cleaner MPO One-Click Cleaner MPO Designed to clean MPO and MTP® multi-fiber connectors used in Data Centers and other high density optical networks, the new One-Click Cleaner MPO is a revolutionary push-type cleaner, which simplifies cleaning of the ferrule end-face of both MPO/ MTP exposed connectors and connectors in adapters. As with all One-Click Cleaners, the One-Click Cleaner MPO uses the innovative push-to-clean design. The mechanical push action advances the optical grade cleaning tape while effectively and gently cleaning the end-face of the connector.

Ordering Information MODEL DESCRIPTION LENGTH BASE AFL NO. One-Click SC, ST, FC One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500 cleans) 172 mm (6.88 in) 17.5 x 17.5 mm (0.7 x 0.7 in) 8500-05-0001MZ One-Click MU/LC One-Click Cleaner MU/LC (500 cleans) 172 mm (6.88 in) 17.5 x 17.5 mm (0.7 x 0.7 in) 8500-05-0002MZ One-Click ODC One-Click Cleaner ODC (outdoor connector, 500 cleans) 172 mm (6.88 in) 17.5 x 17.5 mm (0.7 x 0.7 in) 8500-05-0004MZ One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC One-Click Cleaner Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100 cleans) 120.65 mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0005MZ One-Click Mini-100 MU/LC One-Click Cleaner Mini-100 MU/LC (100 cleans) 120.65 mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0006MZ One-Click Mini-500 SC, ST, FC One-Click Cleaner Mini-500 SC, ST, FC (500 cleans) 120.65 mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0009MZ One-Click Mini-500 MU/LC One-Click Cleaner Mini-500 MU/LC (500 cleans) 120.65 mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0010MZ One-Click Ultra Cleaner 2.5 One-Click Ultra Cleaner 2.5 SC, ST, FC 203.2 mm (8 in) 22.2 x 33.3 mm (0.8 x 1.3 in) 8500-05-0007MZ (enlarged cleaning area, 500 cleans) One-Click D-LC One-Click Ultra Cleaner D-LC (Duplex LC, 500 cleans x 2) 195 mm (7.7 in) 18 x 30 mm (0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0008MZ One-Click MPO One-Click Cleaner MPO (MPO/MTP®, 500 cleans) 203.2 mm (8 in) 19 x 44.5 mm (0.8 x 1.8 in) 8500-05-0030MZ

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. 8500-05-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-30 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 225 Cletop Adapter Cleaning Sticks Cletop (ACT) adapter cleaning sticks are an easy to use efficient means of cleaning fiber optic connectors in adapters and cleaning adapter alignment sleeves. Cletop sticks are available in sizes for most common commercial connectors (ST, SC , FC, LC, MU), military connectors, and LEMO connectors for video applications. When connectors need to be cleaned inside adapters, you can rely on the Cletop stick.

Features Type 2.5 mm •• Easy to use and efficient. Delivers a consistently high level of cleaning performance •• Easy to clean ferrule end-faces inside the plug-in fiber optic connectors and various adapters •• Lightweight and safe to use. Compact and disposable •• Suitable for cleaning inside adapters for dust control

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION CONNECTORS AFL NO. ACT-01 — 2.5 mm Cletop Sticks (Box of 200) FC, SC, ST, D4 8500-10-0024MZ ACT-02 — 1.25 mm Cletop Sticks (Box of 200) LC, MU 8500-10-0022MZ Type 1.25 mm ACT-03 — 2.0 mm Cletop Sticks (Box of 200) Military termini, high definition 8500-10-0023MZ Double-ended 2.0/2.5 mm Cletop Sticks (Box of 100) television camera connectors 8500-10-0030MZ such as LEMO

Recommended Cleaning Procedure for ACT Cleaning Sticks

Procedure: Notes: 1. Ensure Insert: that stick is held straight 1. Number of possible wipes: when inserting into sleeve. - Maintenance (repair): approximately 1 use 2. Load: Apply sufficient pressure - Equipment construction: 4 uses (max.) (approximately 600-700 g) to ensure ferrule 2. FCC2 Fluid will improve cleaning performance. is a little depressed in sleeve. 3. Rotate: Rotate stick clockwise 4-5 times while ensuring direct contact with ferrule end-face is maintained.

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

©2015, AFL, all rights reserved. ACT1-00-2000 Revision 1F, 2015-02-24 www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 226 CCT - Connector Cleaning Tips

AFL is pleased to offer a unique technology in fiber connector end-face cleaning. Rather than a fabric-covered or foam-covered stick, we are offering a molded cleaning tip that will trap contamination and wick cleaning solvents from bulkhead connectors. The cleaning tip is a molded, sintered polymer that is both porous and pliable conforming to virtually any fiber end-face polish geometry while trapping and absorbing contaminants.

Features •• Molded sintered polymer construction assures perfect bulkhead fit and consistent performance with each cleaning tip •• No fibers, binders, adhesives or outgassing that may contaminate the connector •• Traps and holds liquid and particle contaminants in an absorbent open cell matrix ranging from 10-25 microns •• The elastic cleaning head enhances entrapment of particles and oils, while allowing the Applications tip to conform to virtually any fiber end-face geometry (8 degree, domed polish, etc.) •• Dual-head design permits wet and dry •• Very absorbent cleaning in one swab •• US and Foreign patents pending •• Solvent and chemical resistant, not physically altered by solvent contact Tip Configurations •• Designed to work with FCC2 Fiber •• CCTS and CCTX series: cleaning tip is exposed for cleaning ferrule end-faces in Connector Cleaner alignment sleeves that are recessed within sockets or bulkhead adaptors. •• Most connectors cleaned the first time •• CCTP series: cleaning tip is recessed in the “straw” for cleaning exposed ferrules and termini (jumpers). Fits 2.5 mm and smaller ferrules.

Ordering Information Cleaning tips are available for most common commercial and Mil Spec ferrule sizes. SIZE TYPE COMMENTS AFL NO. (diameter of ferrule or termini) 2.5 mm Pin Examples: SC, ST, FC, etc. CCTP-25-0900 2.5 mm Socket Examples: SC, ST, FC, etc. CCTS-25-0900 2.0 mm Pin Mil T 29504/14 For Mil C 28876 CCTP-25-0900 2.0 mm Socket Mil T 29504/15 For Mil C 28876 CCTS-16-0900 1.6 mm Pin Mil T 29504/04 For Mil C 38999 CCTP-25-0900 1.6 mm Socket Mil T 29504/05 For Mil C 38999 CCTS-16-0900 1.25 mm Pin Examples: LC, MU CCTP-25-0900 1.25 mm Socket Examples: LC, MU CCTS-12-0900 ® MT ferrule Pin Examples: MPO, MPX * CCTX-MT-0900 ® MT ferrule Socket Examples: MPO, MPX * CCTX-MT-0900 * Registered Trademark of TYCO Electronics Corp.

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

FCC2 Enhanced Fiber Connector Cleaner is a nonflammable, environmentally safe, residue-free solvent engineered to clean fiber connector end-faces and bare fiber before field terminating or fusion splicing. The 3-way dispenser is intended for easy one-handed use with fiber wipes, convenient wetting of CCT connector cleaning tips, and spray nozzle functionality. Packaged in unique, spill-proof containers, it can be shipped with connector cleaning and termination kits so technicians avoid wasting time sourcing a cleaner locally. Offering high purity and fast consistent cleaning, FCC2 was developed with and is packaged by Micro Care Corporation, a world leader in cleaning solvents.

Features •• Not Hazardous/Not Regulated for all modes of transport, including air cargo •• Unique dispenser for use with AFL Connector Cleaning Tips and FiberWipes •• Up To 400+ cleanings per can •• Dries without a residue, unlike alcohol •• Dissipates static charge •• Safe on all surfaces including soft plastics

Applications •• Cleans all types of connector end-faces •• Cleans bare fiber before field terminating or fusion splicing •• Removes oils, salts, dust, dirt and uncured epoxies •• Safe on glass, ceramic, metal, plastic optical fiber •• Compact size fits easily into tool kits, instrument cases, termination kits, and inspection kits •• Perfectly cleans all optic components

EU RoHS and WEEE Compliant FCC2 is certified as a lead-free product and meets RoHS and WEEE standards.

Health and Safety Data Flashpoint (TCC) None Weight 3 oz / 85 g Safety Rating Nonflammable NFPA Health: 3 | Fire: 1 | Instability: 0 HMIS: Health: 1 | Flammability: 1 | Physical: 0 Transportation Not regulated

Ordering Information DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid in 3 oz / 85 g can FCC2-00-0902 Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid , Case of 12 cans FCC2-00-0903

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. FCC2-00-2000 Revision 1F, 2015-01-22 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 228 Field Portable Duffle Bag Cleaning Kits The FCP2 kits offer a complete selection of fiber optic cleaning products for field cleaning of connector end-faces in a convenient duffle bag style carry case. The Basic Cleaning Kit includes FCC2 cleaning fluid, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FiberWipes™ and a Cletop SB. The carry case has room to add additional FCP2-00-0900 Basic Cleaning Kit cleaning supplies, inspection scope, or test equipment. FCP2 kit options are available with inspection, loss testing and MPO/MPT cleaning capabilities.

FCC2 Fiber Connector Cleaner FCC2 is a nonflammable, environmentally safe, residue-free solvent engineered to clean fiber connector end-faces. A new and improved design of the 3-way dispenser intended for easy one-handed use with fiber wipes, convenient wetting of CCT connector cleaning tips, and spray nozzle functionality. Packaged in unique, spill-proof containers, it can be FCPR-00-0900 Refill for Basic Cleaning Kit shipped with tool kits so technicians avoid wasting time sourcing a cleaner locally.

•• New 3-way dispenser in one convenient package •• Electrically conductive, FCC2 neutralizes “particle cling” by releasing ionic bonds that bind contaminates to the fiber end-face •• Double-filtered to 0.2 microns, this optical grade solvent leaves no residue when drying •• Less drying time than IPA Alcohol •• Low odor, nonflammable •• Ozone safe, environmentally safe, US EPA SNAP approved •• Not Hazardous/Not Regulated for all modes of transport, including air cargo FCP2-01-0900 Basic Cleaning and Inspection Kit •• Excellent for cleaning light oils, salts, moisture, fingerprints, dust, lint, grime, flux residues and uncured epoxies •• With rapid drying time, the FCC2 is essential when cleaning connectors in adapters where airflow is minimal

One-Click Cleaner The One-Click Cleaner is an easy-to-use option for cleaning connectors on jumpers and in adapters. Simply insert the One-Click Cleaner into an adapter and push until an audible “click” is heard. The One-Click Cleaner uses the mechanical push action to advance an optical grade cleaning tape while the cleaning tip is rotated to ensure the fiber end-face is effectively, but gently cleaned. FCP2-02-0900 Basic Cleaning, Inspection & Test Kit •• Cleans connectors on jumpers and in adapters •• Ergonomic, comfortable design with single action cleaning •• Precise mechanical action delivers consistent cleaning results •• Low cost per clean •• Effective on a variety of contaminates including dust and oils 1400-01-0095PZ Carry Case •• Automatic advance ensures each clean is performed with fresh cleaning tape •• Compliant with EU/95/2002/EC Directive (RoHS)

FiberWipes™ Cletop Cassette Cleaner Specifically designed to remove and trap common contaminants The Cletop connector cleaner is a rugged palm-sized cleaner that found in fiber optic installations, FiberWipes provide superior offers exceptional performance with a proven track record. The cleaning results from material that is stronger and more choice of leading manufacturers and telecom carries worldwide absorbent, yet softer than traditional cellulose wipes. Packaged for nearly 20 years – Cletop is a name you can rely on. in a clean room, the fabric is considered “fiber optic grade”. •• Compact design is ideal for use in labs, assembly lines, or in the •• Cleaning optical fibers prior to termination or splicing field •• Cleaning fiber optic connector end-faces •• Consistent cleaning results without IPA alcohol, which is toxic, •• Cleaning lenses, mirrors, and other optical surfaces flammable, and leaves a residue on fiber ends (white haze) •• Small package footprint ideal for a laboratory or field use •• Excellent anti-static properties for static sensitive applications and to minimize reattachment of dust to ferrule after cleaning •• Rugged 90-wipe mini-tub keeps wipes clean and dry prior to use •• Simple push button shutter operation exposes cleaning tape only when in use – minimizing unwanted dust •• Solvent safe; may be moistened to provide wet/dry cleaning •• Replaceable and cost effective cleaning tape •• Instructions for use on the side of the tub •• Over 400 wipes per tape

Ordering Information Basic Cleaning and Inspection Kit This kit adds inspection capabilities to the Basic Cleaning Kit with an OFS300-200 inspection scope. The kit includes OFS300-200 inspection scope, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB and convenient duffle bag carry case. Basic Cleaning, Inspection and Test Kit Adds inspection along with multimode and single-mode loss test capabilities. The kit includes OFS300-200 inspection scope, CSM1-2 contractor series power meter, CSS1-MM contractor series multimode light source, CSS1-SM contractor series single-mode light source, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB and convenient duffle bag carry case.

DESCRIPTION INCLUDES AFL NO. Basic Cleaning Kit with Carry Case One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB and Carry Case FCP2-00-0900 Refill for Basic Cleaning Kit One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB FCPR-00-0900 (no Carry Case) Basic Cleaning Kit with MPO Cleaners One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC, and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB, MPO/MTP FCP2-00-0901 and Carry Case Cleaner and Carry Case Basic Cleaning and Inspection Kit OFS300-200 inspection scope, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC, and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FCP2-01-0900 FiberWipes, Cletop SB Basic Cleaning, Inspection and Loss OFS300-200 inspection scope, CSM1-2 power meter, CSS1-MM multimode light source, CSS1-SM single-mode FCP2-02-0900 Test Kit light source, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC, and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB Carry Case Field Portable Duffle Bag Cleaning Supplies Carry Case 1400-01-0095PZ

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

New Material – New Packaging – Superior Wipes Specifically designed to remove and trap common contaminants found in fiber optic installations, FiberWipes provide superior cleaning results from material that is stronger and more absorbent, yet softer than traditional cellulose wipes. Packaged in a clean room, the fabric is considered “fiber optic grade”. FiberWipes are available in rugged mini-tubs (90 wipes) or in hermetically sealed individual packages (FiberAide 1) and are the perfect size for tool kits and test kits.

Applications •• Cleaning optical fibers prior to termination or splicing •• Cleaning fiber optic connector end-faces FiberWipes •• Cleaning lenses, mirrors, and other optical surfaces

FiberWipes •• Small package footprint ideal for a laboratory or field use •• Rugged 90-wipe mini-tub keeps wipes clean and dry prior to use •• Octagonal cover minimizes rolling distance if dropped •• Solvent safe; may be moistened to provide wet / dry cleaning •• Instructions for use on the side of the tub

FiberAide 1 •• Hermetically sealed wipes remain uncontaminated and ready for use •• Foil backed wipes protect skin from cleaning solvents and cable gel •• Packaging contains no glues to leach out •• Button hole for placement on panel board or keychain •• Ideal for shipping with OEM equipment to prevent contamination of fiber surfaces at FiberAide 1 installation •• Solvent safe; may be moistened to provide wet / dry cleaning Features •• Pictorial instructions on each package •• Lint free •• Sized for fiber and connector cleaning Specifications •• Robust and tear-resistant PRODUCT WIPE SIZE PACKAGE SIZE PACKAGE WEIGHT FiberWipes 4.25” W x 2” H 3” Dia x 3” H 2.6 oz FiberAide 1 2.75” W x 1.5” H 4.25” W x 2.75” H 0.6 oz / 10 packets

Ordering Information DESCRIPTION AFL NO. FiberWipes – case of 24 mini-tubs (2160 total wipes, 90 wipes per mini-tub) 9000-03-0026MZ FiberWipes is a trademark of MicroCare Corporation. FiberAide 1 is patent pending. FiberAide 1 – case of 600 packets (60 bundles, 10 packets per bundle) 9000-03-0027MZ

International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. FOW1-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-29 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 231 Fiber Optic Tool Kits As the leader in fiber optic training, The Light Brigade®, AFL's training division, understands the special tool needs of technicians and what it takes to do the job in a safe, efficient, and effective manner. Our tool kits were developed with the insight and feedback from experts in the industry. We include options for these tool kits that allow technicians to order variations based on personal preferences without driving up the cost of the kits with unnecessary or redundant tools.

Cable Preparation Tool Kit A basic tool kit designed for fiber optic cable preparation and closure/enclosure preparation for splicing inside or outside. It is also for loose tube or premise cable applications where the right tool is needed to strip, clean, and prepare fiber optic cable for splicing and termination.

Included Items

PART NO. DESCRIPTION BRAND PART NO. DESCRIPTION BRAND T-2CCS Fiber cable sheath Ideal T-3MS Miller strippers Ripley Ordering Information stripper T-3NP 6" needle nose pliers Husky DESCRIPTION AFL NO. T-2CK Cable knife Ripley T-3SDP Screwdriver—Phillips Stanley T-2CS Cable slitter Ripley Tool Kit including The Light T-KCP T-3SDS Screwdriver—standard Stanley T-2CW Multi-socket can Ripley Brigade branded bag and T-3SR Seam ripper Clauss wrench listed tools T-3TM 12' tape measure Stanley T-2CXC Cable cutters Ripley T-5ETB Electrical tape—black 3M ™ T-2KV Kevlar shears with Ripley T-5SPM Permanent marker— Sharpie pouch black T-2RT Ideal buffer cutting tool Ideal T-5STB Small tool bag LBI T-2SC Splicer’s scissors Ripley 12" x 11" x 9"

© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-5-00001, Revision 0, 4.3.12 www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 232232 Emergency Restoration Tool Kit A specialized tool kit designed for loose tube outside plant applications where fiber optic cable damage has occurred and a quick repair kit is needed to support emergency restoration. Includes hand tools for fiber cable preparation and closure preparation, mechanical splices, and a basic cleaver.

Included Items

PART NO. DESCRIPTION BRAND PART NO. DESCRIPTION BRAND Universal Fibrlok 3M T-2SC Splicer’s scissors Ripley Ordering Information S-D2501 assembly tool T-3LP 8” lineman pliers Husky DESCRIPTION AFL NO. S-D2509 Fibrlok II cap lifter tool 3M T-3MS Miller strippers Ripley Tool Kit including The Light T-KERM Universal Fibrlok— 3M T-3NP 6” needle nose pliers Husky S-D2529-6 Brigade branded bag and Package of 6 T-3SDP Screwdriver – Phillips Stanley listed tools T-1VL Staple cleaver OFS T-3SDS Screwdriver – standard Stanley Fiber cable sheath Ideal T-3SR Seam ripper Clauss T-2CCS stripper T-3TM 12’ tape measure Stanley T-2CK Cable knife Ripley T-5ETB Electrical tape – black 3M T-2CS Cable slitter Ripley T-5SPM Permanent marker – black Sharpie Multi-socket can Ripley T-5STB Small tool bag LBI T-2CW wrench 12” x 11” x 9” T-2CXC Cable cutters Ripley Kevlar™ shears with Ripley T-2KV pouch

Master Splicer Tool Kit An all-inclusive master tool kit specifically designed for fiber optic cable preparation and closure/enclosure preparation. It is also for loose tube or premise cable applications where the right tool is needed to strip, clean and prepare fiber optic cable for splicing and termination. Includes specialized tools needed to do mid-cable access procedures and prepare special fiber optic cables such as OPGW, ADSS, MicroCable, and armored loose tube for splicing or termination.

Ordering Information Included Items

DESCRIPTION AFL NO. PART NO. DESCRIPTION BRAND PART NO. DESCRIPTION BRAND Tool Kit including The Light T-KMS T-2BC Small bolt cutters— Workforce T-3SDP Screwdriver—Phillips Stanley Brigade® branded bag and OPGW strands 14" T-3SDS Screwdriver—standard Stanley listed tools T-2CCS Fiber cable sheath stripper Ideal T-3SR Seam ripper Clauss T-2CKSC Cable knife and scissors Ripley T-3TM 12' tape measure Stanley T-2CW Multi-socket can wrench Ripley T-5ETB Electrical tape—black 3M tool T-5ETBL Electrical tape—blue 3M T-2CXC Cable cutters Ripley T-5ETG Electrical tape—green 3M ™ T-2KV Kevlar shears with Ripley T-5ETR Electrical tape—red 3M pouch T-5HSG Heat shrink gun Wagner T-2OPGW Mini SST pipe cutter— JHL T-5SPM Permanent marker— Sharpie 1/8" to 5/8" black T-2RT Ideal buffer cutting tool Ideal T-HS- Heat tubes T-3JP 8" joint pliers Husky Assort 1/8", 1/4", 1/2", 1" (6" segments) T-3MS Miller strippers Ripley T-5LTB Large tool bag— LBI T-3MSAT MSAT mid-span access Ripley 11" x 17" x 10" tool

© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-5-00001, Revision 0, 4.3.12 www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 233233 OEM and Specialty Products

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

234 Training Available from Light Brigade®

Since 1987, The Light Brigade has trained more than 50,000 technicians, installers, engineers, and designers from a wide variety of industries: telephony, broadband cable, utilities, media broadcast, industrial, manufacturing, mining, government, and aerospace, along with the various branches of the military. Whether your application is a small local telephone network, a complex fiber to the home network, a sophisticated military facility, or an undersea oil explorationsite, The Light Brigade can provide critical training for your personnel to lower operating cost and improve installation efficiency. Instructors Our professional instructors and technicians are technically skilled and have a variety of real world practical experience in all aspects of fiber optics. With experience in applications such as communications, signaling, security, and network control, our instructors provide valuable insight into the design, installation, and operation of state-of-the-art fiber optic systems. Hands-on Training By having extensive hands-on sessions in each training class, our attendees learn fiber optics by doing rather than by watching. Attendees spend class time building, testing, or troubleshooting an actual fiber optic system. In each of our courses, the ratio of students to instructors during the hands-on sessions ensures that there is direct personal interaction and attention to each student. Technology-based In our training classes, you receive an objective viewpoint, not a sales pitch. We teach fiber techniques that are applicable to any product, and select the best available equipment and supplies from many different manufacturers. You can choose to develop your skills using our state-of-the-art equipment and accessories, or bring your own to learn how to use it more effectively.

Relevant Our course materials are constantly updated to stay in step with current and emerging technologies. All of our materials and techniques are written and taught based on the latest standards, recommendations, and codes from ANSI, ITU, TIA/EIA, IEEE, IEC, Telcordia, MSHA, NEC, NESC, and others. Continuing Support To ensure continued long-term support, we offer technical assistance to our class attendees. If you have a question or need help after the class is over, our staff is there to help.

Certification Options

TE ICS CH N N O I Light Brigade Certificate of Completion R C T I A C

E S

Everyone who completes one of our courses will receive a Light Brigade E

A S N Certificate of Completion, signed by the course instructor. This certificate S O O C I A T I specifies the content and total number of instructional hours for both the Electronics International Fiber Optic Utilities classroom and hands-on portions and is traceable to the class attended. Technicians Municipal Signal Association Telecom Association (ETA) Association (IMSA) (FOA) Council Third-party Credits and Certification Many of our classes are eligible for independent certifications through third-party industry organizations and groups. These certifications are typically progressive levels and show competency in hands-on skills and technical knowledge. See individual course details for more information. Building Industry In addition, many of our courses are eligible for BICSI Continuing Consulting Service Certified Fiber Society of Cable Education Credits (CECs), SCTE recertification units (RUs), and IMSA International, Inc. (BICSI) to the Home Telecommunications Professional Engineers Technical Advancement Recognition Points (TARPs).

(206) 575-0404 • (800) 451-7128 • www.lightbrigade.com www.AFLglobal.com

CAT-01201 6.10.2015